Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 5325 - Contract - Pharr & Company - Rodgers Community Center Renovations - 10/17/1996RESOLUTION NO.5325 October 17, 1996 Item 411 BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract, attached herewith, by and between the City of Lubbock and Pharr & Company, of Lubbock, Texas, to install and furnish all materials and services as bid for the Rodgers Community Center Renovations, and any associated documents, which Contract shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this 17th day of October , ALEX "T' COOKE MAYOR PRO TEMPORE ATTEST: Kaythiobarnell, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Victor Kilma4Puhasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: D&nald G. Vandiver, First Assistant City Attorney da/ccdocs/pharr.res October 10, 1996 CITY OF LUBBOCK MEMORANDUM To: Rusty Black Parks and Recreation Manager From: Earl M. Hilton, Recreation Superintendent Date: May 9, 1997 Re. Change Order for Supercenter Project The Parks and Recreation Department is supervising a project to connect the Arnett -Benson Senior Citizen Center and the Rodgers Community Center. The contract for construction was awarded to Pharr and Company fora bid of $241,887. Satisfactory completion of this project will require the following cosmetic improvements: 1. Paint the south, north and east wall, and ceiling of the Social Hall, Room 106, 2. Paint the walls and ceiling above the ledge in the north entrance, Room 102, 3. Paint the north men's and women's restrooms, 4. Paint the Kitchen, Room 118, S. Tile the Kitchen, Room 118, 6. Carpet the Classroom, Room 120, 7. Tile the Vestibule, Room 117, and 8. Tile the Senior Dining Area, Room 114. Pharr and Company propose to complete these improvements for $ $24,968. This amount represents less than 11 % of total project budget. Approval of this change order will ensure that patrons of the Rodgers/Arnett-Benson Center have facilities which maximize form and function. 1 understand that as the proposed change order is below the statutory maximum of $25, 000 or 25% of total contract cost the City Manager has sole discretionary authority for approval. Any assistance in securing endorsement of this change order is appreciated MAY 14 1997 01 s Cf; -'iAHY LUW30CK, iFXAS f` MAY 12; 1997 W, - s a CITY OF LUBBOCK CHANGE ORDER CHANGE ORDER #: 6 DATE: May 9, 1997 PROJECT NAME: Arnett -Benson Supercenter DESCRIPTION OF WORK: CONTRACTOR: Pharr & Co. CITY OF LUBBOCK BID#: 13683 Tile Room(s)118, 117, and 114; Carpet Room 120; Paint the south, north and east walls and ceiling of Room 106; Paint the walls and ceiling above the alcove in Room .102; Paint the existing men's and women's restrooms; Paint Room 118. ITEM DESCRIPTION VALUE A. ORIGNIAL CONTRACT VALUE $241,887 B. AMOUNT OF THIS CHANGE ORDER 524,968 C. PERCENT OF CONTRACT VALUE THIS CHANGE ORDER 10.32% D. AMOUNT OF PREVIOUS CHANGE ORDERS $4,987.11 E. TOTAL AMOUNT OF ALL CHANGE ORDERS $29,955.11 F. PERCENT OF CONTRACT FOR ALL CHANGE ORDERS 12.38% G. NEW CONTRACT AMOUNT $271,842.11 Owner' sentative asingg c� l �l1 City Manager CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR ARNETT BENSON COMMUNITY SUPERCENTER RENOVATIONS BID #13683 CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas 1 m 0 r 0 z 0 tn w w V Cn City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 606-767-2167 Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR: September 6, 1996 CLOSE DATE: September 19, 1996 @ 4:00 P.M. ITB 913683 - ARNETT BENSON COMMUNITY SUPERCENTER RENOVATIONS ADDENDUM 01 The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named ITB. Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. On the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT, please change Item #3 Owners Representative, to read as follows: "Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including pians and specifications, were prepared, and CRAIG WUENSCHE ENVIRONMENTAL PROJECT MANAGER who will Inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or Inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shah not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting in behalf of the Contractor. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Questions may be faxed to: PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID. Ir &'wfa�dead4Aoc!/30/962.10PM Laura Ritchie Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 (806)767-2164 FTHA K YOU, (m� �L RA RITCHIE BUYER i City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 606-767-2167 Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR: September 13,1996 OLD CLOSE DATE: September 19, 1996 @ 4:00 P.M. NEW CLOSE DATE: September 26, 1996 @ 3:00 P.M. ITB 013683 - ARNETT BENSON COMMUNITY SUPERCENTER RENOVATIONS ADDENDUM #2 The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named ITB. Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. On the Drawings, Sheet S-2: Roof framing members may be changed to a 6" x 2.5 x 16 gauge, light gauge CEE Puriins at 16 inches O.C. in lieu of that shown and detailed. Load bearing wall studs called to be 12 inches O.C. may be changed to 16 inches O.C. (A vertical stud under each ref joist). if the contractor accepts to perform ref framing as described above, the contractor will be responsible for the coordination of all other detailing and fitting of construction products to incorporate this change. 2. Floor Finish Pian, Sheet A-3, Room 116, Arts & Crafts; replace 4 with 6 (Vinyl Compositions Tile - As Specified) as indicated by square on the Floor Finish Plan Notes. 3. The bid dosing has changed from. September 19, 1996 4.00 P.M. to: September 26,1996 3:00 P.M. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted In writing and directed to: Laura Ritchie Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)767-2164 THANK YOU, % LAURA RITCHIE BUYER PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID. Ir s.�ee doc WM61:36 rn 1. F, im City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 806-767-2167 MAILED TO VENDOR: OLD CLOSE DATE: NEW CLOSE DATE: Office of Purchasing September 26, 1996 September 26,1996 @ 3:00 P.M. October 3,1996 @ 3:00 P.M. ITB #13683 - ARNETT BENSON COMMUNITY SUPERCENTER RENOVATIONS ADDENDUM #3 The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named ITB. Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. The bid closing has changed from: September 26, 1996 @ 3:00 P.M. to: October 3,1996 @ 3:00 P.M. 2. Asbestos Containing Building Materials (ACBM) have been identified at Rodgers Community Center and Amett-Benson Senior Center. Prior to the issuance of a Notice to Proceed for the successful bidder of the Amett-Benson Community Supercenter Renovations, identified ACBM that might be disturbed during construction will be removed from the facilities by a certified ACBM company hired by the City of Lubbock The successful bidder will not be delayed during the abatement of these products, and should not consider said abatement as part of the fees associated with the above referenced bid. The City of Lubbock shall be responsible for all ACMB at this facility and at no cost to contractor. All requests for additional information or ciarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Questions may be faxed to: PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID. Ir b.Pw&,ad&=d-Ldoc!/ Y%3:07PM Laura Ritchie Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 (806)767-2164 THANK YOU, LA RA RITCHIE BUYER CITY OF LUBBOCK COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT BLOCK GRANT PROGRAM SPECIFICATIONS FOR TITLE: ARNETT BENSON COMMUNITY SUPERCENTER RENOVATIONS ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID NUMBER: 13683 CDWO: B -95 -MC -48-0022 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT INDEX NOTICE TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE HUD CERTIFICATIONS CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT EXHIBITS: A. COPELAND ANTI -KICKBACK REGULATIONS B. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS SPECIFICATIONS NOTICE TO BIDDERS 7 NOTICE TO BIDDERS r. BID #13683 I Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 4:00 o'clock p.m. on the 19th of September. 1996, as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: ` "ARNETT BENSON COMMUNITY SUPERCENTER RENOVATIONS" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the , t Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager �- for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. C The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 10th day of October. 1996, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior, as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Ir It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local t conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be -understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre-bid conference on 11th day of September. 1996, at 9:00 o'clock a.m., in the Training Center Room L-01, Lubbock, Texas b Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which ,.. document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of dj Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response i - to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. r, A The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre-bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 767-2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. VZZ7 CITY OF LUBBOCK VICTOR KIL N PURCHASING MANAGER Bid documents may be obtained upon request from the Purchasing Department at 162513th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas 79401; Telephone (806)767-2167/Fax (806)767-2164. 7 7 r GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS a E GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the ARNETT-BENSON COMMUNITY SUPERCENTER RENOVATIONS. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without 1 charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. BIDDER INQUIRIES No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid must be addressed to: 5 r 6 r A,I LAURA RITCHIE BUYER CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 FAX (806)767-2164 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 180 (ONE HUNDRED EIGHTY) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. in the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to Insure completion of the project within the time specified. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of.the General Conditions of the contract documents. 7. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid In full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 8. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve _ the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 9. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 10. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use -- during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 11. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A swom statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the < project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 15. EXPLOSIVES j The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, ^� or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractors intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 16. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE 6 The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 17. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in theGeneral Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of t Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All },.s policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and cant' at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such _ insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. 'A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than'three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, swom, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy Is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. f' The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 21. PREPARATION FOR BID The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Bid for (description of the project). Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 22. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 7 23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to -- complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: 1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. 2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, _ without delay or interference. 3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. 4. The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. N i k BID SUBMITTAL r r l• t r f; r t ?WW t BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT PLACE: Lubbock, Texas DATE: October 3, 1996 PROJECT NUMBER: 13683 - ARNETT-BENSON COMMUNITY SUPERCENTER RENOVATIONS Bid of PHARR CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. D/B/A PHARR & COMPANY --(hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a Arnett -Benson Community Supercenter Renovations Bid 113683 having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. BASE BID: Minor renovations and building additions, including HVAC systems, rest rooms, structural, architectural, site utilities, mechanical, plumbing, electrical and finishes. MATERIALS:__ One Hundred Sixty Thousand Forty -Four and no/100----.($ 160,044.00 SERVICES:__ Fifty -Three Thousand Three Hundred Forty -Nine & no/10(t$ 53,349.00 1 TOTAL BASE BID: Two Hundred Thirteen Thousand Three Hundred ($ 213,393.00 Ninety -Three and no/100 ALTERNATE NO. 1: Movable storage units. (Reference sheet A-13 for alternate) TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO. 1 (ADD): Three Thousand Six Hundred & no/1(D($ 3,600.00 ALTERNATE NO. 2: Built in millwork unit. (Reference sheet A-13 for alternate) TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO.2 (ADD): One Thousand Eight Hundred Eighty 1,882.00 7 '--' Two and no/100 7 ALTERNATE NO. 3: Covered porch. (Reference sheet A-13 for alternate) TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO.3 (ADD): Eleven Thousand Six Hundred -($ 11, 650.00 ) Fifty and no/100 ALTERNATE NO. 4: Bench Seating. (Reference sheet A-13 for alternate) TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO.4 (ADD): Three Thousand Three Hundred Nine -($ 3,309. 00 ) and no/100 ALTERNATE NO. 5: Directors area millwork. (Reference sheet A-10 for alternate) TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO.5 (ADD): Seven Thousand Seven Hundred ($__7,703.00 ) ---%JThree and no/100 1� ALTERNATE NO. 6: Modified bitumen roofing. (Reference sheet A-12 for alternate) TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO.6 (ADD): Three Hundred Fifty and no/100 .($ 350.00 ) (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 180 (ONE HUNDRED EIGHTY) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated In the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of 500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS2 for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. " Enclosed with this bid is a Cashiers Check or Certified Check for N/A Dollars ($ l or a Bid Bond in the sum of 52 of total amount bid Dollars which it Is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned falls to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance! of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. r r Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST-) Secreta Jackie Miller 9 7 •, P"� -(- 41, Aut rized Signature J hn K. Pharr, Vice—President (Printed or Typed Name) Pharr Construction Co., Inc. Company " P.O. Boa 2791. Address Lubbock, Lubbock City, County Texas 79408 State Zip Code Telephone: 806 . 763-5263 Fax: 806 - 763-5843 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS 9}'O Minority Owned Yes No n 0 9-**' 2. 0 9- 3. Aa 0 ,gr 4. 0 0 A 5. ❑ p 6. 0 0. 7• 0 0 8. 0 0 9• 0 0 10. 0 ❑ a 9 d 1 l i C r I i UNITED STATES".4 AR.ANTY COMPANY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: 4 r BID BOND BONDNUMBER........................................».............................................. THAT................»Pharr Construction Co., Inc. .dba »Pharr & »Company »» » » » . » ..................................»................................................................................ of.»Lubbocka.... P; ................................................... »..... ......... »»..».... ................................................................................................................................................».......... as Principal , and UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, a Maryland corporation, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto ................... »......................................... ......... ».»......... — ...............City. .... of...Lubbock................................»...............................».. as Obligee, in the full and just sum of ............ E.IuE..PERCERM OF...Al`1CIIIAIT—EID...BX...PRIXCU. AL --r..--- ....................»... (5% of Bid) .................................................................................. ......................... ........................ ... ».... ................. ................. .............................. ..... Dollars, lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the said Principal is herewith submitting its proposal Arnett Benson Community Supercenter Renovations Bid #13683 THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the aforesaid Principal shall be awarded the contract the said Principal will, within the time required, enter into a formal contract and give a good and sufficient bond to secure the performance of the terms and conditions of the contract, then this obligation to be void; otherwise the Principal and Surety will pay unto the Obligee the difference In money between the amount of the bid of the said Principal and the amount for which the Obligee legally contracts with another party to perforin the work if the latter amount be in excess of the former, but in no event shall liability hereunder exceed the penal sum hereof. Signed, sealed and delivered .............. October 3,,,,,.19.9,6 (Date) Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company ......... :..................................................... .... ........................... ... »» BEAU ............. .................f..»...........»..».........».....................»...»..»(BEAU J n R. Pharr, Vice—President UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY ....»�.....�..'�'....:`»"../........ .......... _______llttorney-infact Laura Espinoza n •.� i:s r; IE/' :i{;• ' dr::i2:. ss (�!%{i 1% AWI f4175k% ... . f<F:i'si�. •tsi: ti� � .a,v rf,c 1 .tit• :;' :.ti4+. l/:. l .'Jt�a{�C\ !/ills .lists iii'ti Contract i i (Revised) (1-74) 1149050 6 UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY t POWER OF ATTORNEY �r NO. 108673 U S F � Uy I131aAIII � KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY. a co rporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland and having its principal office at the City of Baltimore, in the State of Maryland, does hereby constitute and appoint Donal Boley, Steve Deal, Laura Espinoza and Staci Gross of the CRy of Wichita Falls , State of Texas its true and lawful Attorney(s}in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as sumty to. and w execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalfof the Company in its business of guaranteeing the fidelity ofpersons• guaranteeing the petfo®aaee of contracts; and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof. the said UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY has caused this instrument to be sealed with its corpoate seal. duly attested by the signatures of its Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, this 5th day of August . A.D. 19 94. UNITED STATES FIDEL= AND GUARANTY COMPANY smraraa (Signed) By...%. ... ........................ 8 Senior Vice Presider (Signed) By........ . . STATE OF MARYLAND) SS: BALTIMORE CITY I Onthis 5th dayof August A.D.19 94.befortmepersonallycame Robert J. Lamendola Senior Vice President of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY and Paul D. Sims . Assistant Secretary of said Company, with both of whom I am personally acquainted. who being by we severally duly sworn. said. that they, the said Robert J. Lamendola and Paul D. Sims were respectively the Senior Vice Presider and the Assistant Secretary of the said UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, the eotporstion described in and which executed the foregoing Power of Attorney; that they each knew the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said Power of Attorney was such corporate seal. that it was to affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that they signed their names thereto by like order as Senior Via Presider and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of the Company. My Commission expires the 11th dayin% Marchi A.D. 19 955. e (Signed) 4/.rlf!�. ^fir .... za .. . li�„'c 4^.•• NOTARY PUBLIC This Power of Attorney is ted under and. authority of the following Resolutions y f �Y 1P� by ritY 8 adopted b the Board of Directors of the UNTIED STATES r FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on September 24,1992: RESOLVED, that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds. undertakings, contracts and other instmments relating to said business may be signed, executed. and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attomey(*in-Fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in Poo accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the acme and on behalf of the Company, either by the Chairman, or the President. or an Executive Vice President, or a Senior Vice Presider. ora Via President or an Assistant Vice Presider, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved. printed or litho Y 8a P graphed The signature of each of the foregoing officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate gelating thereto appointing "! Attomey(s)-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and unless subsequently revoked and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is validly attached. RESOLVED, that Attorney(s)-in-Fact shall have the power and authority, unless subsequently revoked and, in any case, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of Attorney issued to them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings, i and otherwritings obligatory in the nature thereof; and any such instrument executed by such Attorney(s)-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an Executive Officer apd sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company. r L Paul D. Sims , an Assistant Secretary ofthe UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY. do hereby certify that the foregoing is a true excerpt from the Resolution of the said Company as adopted by its Board of Directors on September 24. 1992 and that this Resolution is in &II force and effect. 1, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. In Testimony Whereof♦ I have hereunto set my hand and the seal ofe1-17 _ STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPAw on this 3rd day of October ,19 96. - r ` A10 �� .. �Sq ...................V... ....................... Assistant Secretary FS'3 (10-92) M PAYMENT BOND BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENS1 T AS DATE 1m Vp 7'nI '///j��� UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY 4 U N 1 +Vr IISIIAItI L TEXAS STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND (Penalty of this bond must be 100% of con"at amount) 7 STATE OF TEXAS L COUNTY OF18 0120 08552 96 5 Bond Number ............................... . KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That .Pharr..Cons t:xucx.�.o� .Gc.•., . �4oG...db� . �kt�t F ...G4>n.>?�nx .............. . .......................... 7................................................................................................... ................... (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, a Corporate Surety authorized and admitted to do 4 , business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds as Surety, (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto.................................................................... . ... q#y..of ,Lubbock ............................................. .................................................. (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the penal sum of .. TWO. HUNDRED . FORTY .ONE. THOUSAND . EIGHT .HUNDRED.. ., • • EZGH.-TY. STEVEN. AND. NO/100r"r w...................................................................... Dollars ($ 2A1.R87 .00 ........................... ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered Into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the... 17th .......... day of ...... October . , , ... . . 19 96 .. , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof, for Bid #13683 -Arnett -Benson Community Supercenter Renovations NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond to all such claimants shall be determined in accordance with the provisions thereof to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this ..22nd... ... ,day, ...October....... d. ........ .......................................... rContact 214 (Texas) (1.94) hn �K.Pharr, Vice -Pre. .""" ' .. • • • • • (Seal) si�ent ...................................................... (Seal) UNITED STATES FiDEUTY AND GUARANTY COMPANY By........................`.v:'✓............. (Seal) Laura Espinoza Attorney-in-fact The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designatesAlan Henry Agency an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. a Approved as to form: City of Uibbock t, ey. Cr Attorney Ir Alan Henry Agency Surety * Note: if signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. if signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. r 1149039 UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY POWER OF ATTORNEY NO. 108673 US F 1 W I I S I I A I t i KNOW ALL MEN BY Tf1ESE PRESENTS: That UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY. a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland and having its principal office at the City of Baltimore, in the State of Maryland, does hereby constitute and appoint Donal Boley, Steve Deal, Laura Espinoza and Staci Gross ofthe Cry of Wichita Falls , state of Texas its true and lawful Attorney(s)win-Fact, each in their separate capacity if mors than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds. undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the — urt thereof on behalf of the Company in its business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons; guaranteeing the performance of contracts; and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. in Witness Whereof, the said UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY has caused this instrument to be sealed with its corporate seal, duly attested by the signatures of its Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, this 5th day of August , A.D. 19 94. 4115 UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY �tl7mcwvm (Signed) By.../ ...... . . .. ........................ __ J Senior Vice President (Signed) By........ .i�......... tete.. Assistant Secretary STATE OF MARYLAND) SS: BALTIMORE CITY ) on" 5th dayof August ,A.D.19 94, before mepetsonauycame Robert J. Lamendola Senior Vice President ofthe UNITED STATES FIDEITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY and Paul D. Sims, . Assistant Secretary of said Company, with both of whom I am personally acquainted, who being by me severally duly sworn, said, that they. the said Robert J. Lamendo la and Paul D. Sims were respectively the Senior Vice President and the Assistant Secretary of the said UJNTTED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY. the corporation described in and which executed the foregoing Power of Attorney; that they each knew the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said Power of Attorney was such corporate seal, that it was to affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that they signed their names thereto by like order as Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of the Company. My Commissioneapiresthe 11th dayin March A.D. 19 95 . (Signed) tete. ..orwn - . +'.�..-..:...r444,*1 94� NOTARY PUBLIC This Power of Attorney is granted under and by authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of the UNIT® STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on September24, 1992: RESOLVED, that in connection with the futility and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments relating to said business may be signed, executed. and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attorney(s)-in-Fact pursuant to t Power of Attorney issued in accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company, either by the Chairman, or the President, or an Executive Vice President, or a Senior Vice President, or a Vice President or an Assistant Vice President. jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved. printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Attomey(s)4n-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereo& and, unless subsequently revoked and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or certificate beating such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is validly attached. RESOLVED, that Attomey(s)-in-Fact shall have the power and authority, unless subsequently revoked and, in any ease, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of Attorney issued to them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof; and any such instrument executed by such Attorney(s)-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company. 1. Paul D. Sims , an assistant Secretary of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, do hereby certify that the foregoing is a tate excerpt from the Resolution of the said Company as adopted by its Board of Directors on September 24, 1992 and that this Resolution is in full force and effect I, the undersigned Assistant Sec=Lwy of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. In Testimony Whereof, I have hereunto set my band and the seal ;27A TES FIDISITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on this ZZIIdIay Of October ,19 96 .................................... N taste < Assistant Secretary raN� FS 3 (10.92) PERFORMANCE BOND r r BOND CIAECK n BEST RATING 1i LICEN I 1 T DATE ITP UNITED STATES FIDELITY U S �F+C` ANDGUARANTY COMPANY IIS1141tE ' TEXAS STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND 9 (Pena ty of M bond must be 100% of Contract amount) STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF gond Number18 0120 08552 96 5 ................................ KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That .Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company ............................................................... ................................................................... ................................................... F (hereinafter called the Pdncipaq, as Principal, and UNITED STATES FiDEUTY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, a Corporate Surety, authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds as Surety, (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto ......................................... . ........................... City of Lubbock .............................:..................................... ......................................... ............. (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the penal sum of . TWO. HUNDRED FORTY ONE THOUSAND EIGHT HUNDRED ...................................... 44------- .......... ........................................... ............ Dollars ($ , 241,887.00 ...) payment of which sum well and trul to be .............................. for the a y made, bind ourselves, r..our heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, g jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 17th .................. .,,day of .....October ............ .19 .96.. , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof, for Bid 113683 -Arnett -Benson Community Supercenter Renovations 7 NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBUGATION IS SUCH, that H the said Principal perform the work in acordance with the tans, shall faithfully p specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; rbtherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas vemment Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions thereof to the game extent as if it were copied at length herein. r IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this .. 22nd....... da Of .. October , 96 ohn K. Pharr Vice-Presi�erit """""" (Seal) ....................................................................................................... (Seal) 213 (Texas) (1 .94) UNITED STATES OELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY By ... .�- .... .............. (Seal) Laura Espinoza Aftwey-h-ftwt rr 'I The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business In Texas, and hereby designatesAlan Henry Agency an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may bedelivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Alan Henry Agency Surety (Title) Approved as to form: City of Lubbock t By: C ttomey Note; if signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 'r ill 1149039 UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARAN'T'Y COMPANY �i POWER OF ATTORNEY NO. 108673 U S F-47 SIIIIti KNOW ALL MEN BY r ESE PRESENTS: That UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY. a corporation organized and casting under the laws of the State of Maryland and having its principal office at the City of Baltimore, in the State of Maryland, does hereby constitute and appoint Donal Boley, Steve Deal, Laura Espinoza and Staci Gross of the Cay of Wichita Falls , State of Texas its true and lawful Atrorney(s)win-Fact. each in their separate capacity if moue than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to. and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Company in its business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons: guaranteeing the petfo>mance of contracts; and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed bylaw. In Witness Whereof. the said UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY his caused this instrument to be sealed with its corporate seal, duly attested by the signatures of its Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, this 5 th day of August , A.D. 19 94. UNITED STATES FIDELTIY AND GUARANTY COMPANY YC°'Or'p (Signed) By.../ A tt>ss �►PIPSenior Vice President (Signed) By........ ................. .......................... STATE OF MARYLAND) SS: Assistant Secretary BALTIMORE CITY ) ou this 5th day of August A.D. 19 94, before me personally came Robert J. Lamendola Senior Vice President of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY and Paul D. Sims . Assistant Secretary of said Company, with both of whom I am personally acquainted, who being by we severally duly sworn, said, that they, the said Robert J. Lamendo la and Paul D. Sims were respectively the Senior Vice President and the Assistant Secretary of the said UNTrW STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY. the corporation described in and which executed the foregoing Power of Attomey: that they each knew the seal of said corporation: that the seal affixed to said Power of Attorney was such corporate seal. that it was so affixed by order of the Boud of Directors of said corporation. and that they signed their names thereto by like order as Senior Via President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of the Company. My Commission expires the 11th dsy in March A.D. 19 95. e (Signed) . /..:... y .. NOTARY PUBLIC This Power of Attorney is granted under and by authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of the UNTIED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on September 24.1992: RESOLVED, that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company. all bonds, undettakings, contracts and other instruments relating to said business may be signed, executed, and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attomey(s)nin-Fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company, either by the Cbairman, or the President, or an Executive Vice President, or a Senior Vice President, ora Vice President or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Attomey(s)-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereo& and, unless subsequently revoked and subject to any limitations set forth therein. any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal sball be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is validly attached. RESOLVED, that Attomey(s)-in-Fact shall have the power and authority, unless subsequently revoked and. in any rax, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of Attorney issued to them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings, and otherwritings obligatory in the nature thereof and any such instrument executed by such Attorney(s)win-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and attested toby the Secretary of the Company. L Paul D. Sims , an Assistant Secretary of the UNITED STATES FIDELrf Y AND GUARANTY COMPANY. do hereby certify that the foregoing is a rue excerpt from the Resolution of the said Company as adopted by its Board of Directors on September 24. IM and that this Resolution is in full fora and effecL 4 the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the UNTIED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY do hereby Attorney is in full force and effect and Its not been revoked. certify that the foregoing Power of In Testimony Whereof. I have hereunto set my hand and the seal ;t7ATES FIDIZTTY AND GUARANTYCOMPANYon this 22n�lay of October ,I9 96 ,a, ............................................. �, leans Assistant secretary 'mitt uNs. FS 3 (10-92) CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE �3DUCER Boley Featherston Insurance O. Drawer 10 �chita Falls TX 76307 zoley Featherston Insurance Phone No. 817-723-7111 Fax No "URED PHARR & COMPANY P O BOX 2791 LUBBOCK TX 79408 COMPANY A U S FIDELITY .AND GUARANTY COMPANY B NORTHBROOK PROPERTY & CASUALTY COMPANY C TEXAS WORKERS COMP INS FUND COMPANY D ....:..; :: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. 7 TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION N DATE (MM/DD/YY) DATE (MM/DD/YY) GENERAL LIABILITY A� X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY ITC1419899500 CLAIMS MADE ® OCCUR A X OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT OCP14551525000 (CITY OF LUBBOCK) 1 MILL OCC/1 MILL ITB131513811 04/01/96 06/01/96 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY A X ANY AUTO a.� i' FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 50,000 ALL OWNED AUTOS 04/01/96 04/01/97 SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ (Per person) X HIRED AUTOS X NON-0WNEO AUTOS ITB131513811 04/01/96 06/01/96 04/01/97 04/01/97 GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $1,000,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1,000,000 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 50,000 MED EXP IAny one person) $ 51000 04/01/96 04/01/97 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 BODILY INJURY $ (Per person) BODILY INJURY $ (Per accident) OF OPERAI )_ #136 THE INSURED LUBB0 03 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MNL CITY OF LUBBOCK 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, P O BOX 2000 BLIT FAILURE TO MNL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY LUBBOCK TX 79457 OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. PROPERTY DAMAGE $ GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ ANY AUTO OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACH ACCIDENT $ AGGREGATE $ EXCESS LIABILITY X UMBRELLA FORM ULC145515777 04/01/96 04/01/97 EACH OCCURRENCE $2,000,000. AGGREGATE $ OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY WCRSTATU O RH ". EL EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 THE PROPRIETOR/ X INCL PARTNERS/EXECUTNE TSFOOOIO50714 11101195 / 11/01/96 EL DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 OFFICERS ARE: EXCL OTHER EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 Al BUILDERS RISK 72327572 11/01/95 11/01/96 PER JOB 2,000,000 CAT LIMIT 2,000,000 OF OPERAI )_ #136 THE INSURED LUBB0 03 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MNL CITY OF LUBBOCK 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, P O BOX 2000 BLIT FAILURE TO MNL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY LUBBOCK TX 79457 OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Appropriate Insurance Agent/Broker Prior to Award of Contract I^^ I, the undersigned Agent/Broker, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Contractor. If the below identified Contractor is awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) days after being notified of such award by �-- contractor, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. Agent (Signature) Name of Agent/Broker: _ ' Address of Agent/Broker: i City/State/Zip: Agent/Broker Telephone Number: Date: CONTRACTOR'S NAME: (Print or Type ) CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS: Agent (Print) NOTE TO AGENT/BROKER If this time requirement is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806)767-2165. F BID #13683 - ARNETT-BENSON COMMUNITY SUPERCENTER RENOVATIONS r G G r CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor. (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a n9w certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter, (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services.❑ HUD CERTIFICATIONS SECTION WSTATEMENT OF WORK FORCE NEEDS r CERTIFICATION IN COMPLIANCE WITH SECTION 109 OF PUB. L. 100-202 REGARDING RESTRICTIONS ON THE AWARD OF CERTAIN CONTRACTS AND SUBCONTRACTS TO FOREIGN COUNTRIES (a) Definitions. The definitions pertaining to this provision are those that set forth in the clause entitled "Restrictions �., on Public Works Projects." (b) Certification. Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this provision, by submission of its bid or proposal, the bidder certifies that it: (1) Is not a Contractor of a foreign country included on he list of countries that discriminate against U. S. firms published by the Office of the United States Trade Representative (USTR) (see paragraph (h) of this provision); (2) Has not or will not enter into any subcontract with a subcontractor of a foreign country included on the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms published by the USTR; and (3) Will not provide any product of a country included on the list of foreign countries that discriminate against U.S. firms published by USTR. (c) Inability to certify. A bidder unable to certify in accordance with paragraph (b) of this provision shall submit with its offer a written explanation fully describing the reasons for its inability to make the certification. r'. (d) Applicability of 18 U.S.C. 1001. The certification in paragraph (b) of this provision concerns a matter within the jurisdiction of an agency of the United States, and the making of a false, fictitious, or fraudulent certification may render the maker subject to prosecution under Title 18, U.S.C. 1001. fi (e) Notice. The bidder shall provide immediate written notice to the Contracting Officer, if, at any time before the contract award, the bidder teams that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. (f) Restrictions on contract award. Unless a waiver to these restrictions is granted by the Secretary of Housing r., and Urban Development, no contract will be awarded to a bidder (1) who is owned or controlled by a citizen or national of a foreign country included on the list of foreign countries that discriminate against U.S. firms published by the USTR, (2) whose subcontractors are owned or controlled by citizens or nationals of a foreign country on the USTR list in the public works project. w (g) Recordkeeping. Nothing contained in he foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render, in good faith, the certification required by paragraph (b) of this provision. The rknowledge and information of a bidder is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings. r e (h) USTR List. The USTR published an initial list in the Federal Register on December 30, 1987 (53 FR 49244), which identified one Country - Japan. The USTR can add countries to the list, and remove countries from it, in accordance with section 109(c) of Pub. L. 100-202. K - 1 I (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) r ATTEST: rr Secretary k: t f G t 1 e -- I �y 1, P Contractor (Printed or Typed Name) Company Address City, County State Zip Code Telephone: Fax Number. a TO: City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock,Texas 79457 r I t 1. CONTRACTOR INFORMATION DATE: PROJECT NUMBER CDWO: PROJECT NAME: The undersigned, having submitted a bid to the City of Lubbock for the construction of the above identified project, certifies that: (a) The legal name and business address (including zip code) of the undersigned is: The undersigned is: (a) A single proprietorship (list sole owner). (b) A partnership (list all partners). (c) A corporation (names of all principals and their titles). President: Vice -President: Secretary/Treasurer: r The Taxpayer Identification Number for the undersigned is (whichever is applicable): (a) Employer Identification Number (Federal Identification Number): (b) Social Security Number: If awarded this bid for the aforementioned project, the undersigned agrees to forward to the City of Lubbock within ten days after the execution of any subcontractor(s) a list of all subcontractors who will be employed on said project. This list will consist of the subcontractor's legal name and business address. Contractor (Printed or Typed Name) Company Address City, County I State Zip Code Telephone: Fax Number: CONTRACT I rCONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK a THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 17th day of October. 1996 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through David R. Langston, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and PHARR & COMPANY of the City of Lubbock. County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. r WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID # 13683 - ARNETT-BENSON COMMUNITY SUPERCENTER RENOVATIONS - $241 887.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. i The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. t; ATTEST: CITY OF LYLIP8 C S (OWNER) By: ry MAY R PROTEM APPROVErD' AS TO CONTENT: CONTRACTOR: is Owner's epresentative PHAR COMPANY AP ROVED AS O FORM:�� By: Attorney PRINTED NAME: J TITLE: VIA �Q�51 D l ATTEST: `�� - COMPLETE ADDRESS: Co to Secreta Pharr & Company P.O. Box 2791 Lubbock,Texas 79408 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT r' r r { i i 4 3. 4. 4 7. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to wit: PHARR & COMPANY who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including plans and specifications, were prepared, and CRAIG WUENSCHE, ENVIRONMENTAL PROJECT MANAGER, who will inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's, Representative is Intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials _ or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. — 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but stili may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically providedherein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out allwork and stall -- accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to hirr and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents"' He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. — 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his — Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. J t 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representatives' estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract. "" The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. s 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his decision. r■• 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 1"' 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's r Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be -permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, property secluded from public -- observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. if any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if.requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be In accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. ar 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES } It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid ` according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally ,.� planned. s a 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15%) percent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph + shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, r for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. -Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be Incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, — general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive -- compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein below provided. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans — and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an — insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in I Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject r" matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. �,. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1_,000.000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury C f B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $1.000.000 Combined Single — Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1.000.000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. — D. Builder's Risk Insurance Policy The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $0.00 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500.000. 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate') - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC- 82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. I Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in '❑ entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. ro 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new t� certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that r- materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. f 8. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. �•* 9. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts `" and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor. {1) . a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for `. one year thereafter; �f (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and — (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will — provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self - Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: — (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date bome by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (S) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall '– (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation Insurance. This Includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project; regardless of the Identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512/440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to repos` an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (iv) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; -- (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; _ (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any, person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against -a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN, AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. roll 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION • The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shallindemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to r•• the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof. If i the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. r 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and P• regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. 34. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES r" It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. i If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the F", completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. y; i' The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the - impracticability and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. it is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the worts shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this coptract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to cavy on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. EXTENSION OF TIME The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an extension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then consider such written request and respond to Contractor in writing granting or rejecting the request for an extension of time to complete the project. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. It is understood and _ agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ I somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor ..: agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any r injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character of the work. p " 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work 10• by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses !"" incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. r 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the 7 contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owners premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. r 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owners Representative an application for partial payment. Owners Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owners Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owners Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage due Contractor. i 43. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. _ 44. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials fumished under the terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK -- Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials _ conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's -- Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. 46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of --- substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. 47. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. i 48. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners',Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents. 49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or r„r another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is i greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess i^ to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the a r i Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the _ risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery,` equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the *jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, _ which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the attached bid, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by _ said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. 51. BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds _ $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this — contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during his performance and to cavy out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 55. CLEANING UP d The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. PAYROLLS AND BASIC PAYROLL RECORDS OF CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS The Contractor and each subcontractor shall prepare their payrolls on forms satisfactory to and in accordance with instructions to be furnished by the Local Public Agency or Public Body. The Contractor shall submit weekly to the Local Public Agency or Public Body two certified copies of all payrolls of the Contractor and of the subcontractors, it being understood that the Contractor shall be responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls of all subcontractors. Each such payroll shall contain the "Weekly Statement of Compliance" set forth in Section 3.3 of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations. The payrolls and basic payroll records of the Contractor and each subcontractor covering all laborers and mechanics employed upon the work covered by this Contract shall be maintained during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three (3) years thereafter. Such payrolls and basic payroll records shall contain the name and address of each such employee, his correct classification, rate of pay (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated of the types described in Section 1(b)(2) of the Davis - Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. In addition, whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under Section 5.5(a)(1)(iv) of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in Section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act, the Contractor or subcontractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such be is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall make their employment records with respect to persons employed by them upon the work covered by this Contract available for inspection by authorized representatives of the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, the Local Public Agency or Public Body and the United States Department of Labor. Such representatives shall be permitted to interview employees of the Contractor or of any subcontractor during working hours on the job. 2. MINIMUM WAGES (See Exhibit B: In excess of $2,000) All laborers and mechanics employed upon the work covered by this Contract shall be r" paid unconditionally and not less often than once each week, and without subsequent c deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are made mandatory by law and such other payroll deductions as are permitted by the applicable r., regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, pursuant to the Anti -Kickback Act hereinafter identified), the full amount due at time of payment computed at wage rates not less than those contained in the wage determination decision of said Secretary of Labor (a copy of which is included in Exhibit B) regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the Contractor or any subcontractor and such laborers and mechanics. All laborers and mechanics employed upon such work shall be paid in cash, except that payment may be by check if the employer provides or secures satisfactory facilities approved by the Local Public Agency or Public Body for the cashing of the same without cost or expense to the employee. For the purpose of this clause, contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated under Section 1(b)(2) of the Davis -Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of Section 5.5(a)(1)(iv) of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations. Also for the purpose of this clause, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a F weekly period under plans, funds or programs, but covering the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. 3. POSTING WAGE DETERMINATION DECISIONS AND AUTHORIZED WAGE DEDUCTIONS The applicable wage poster of the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, and the applicable wage determination decisions of said Secretary of Labor with respect to the various classification of laborers and mechanics employed and to be employed upon the work covered by this Contract, and a statement showing all deductions, if any, in accordance with the provisions of this Contract, to be made from wages actually earned by persons so employed -or to be employed in such classifications, shall be posted at appropriate conspicuous points at the site of the work. 4. EMPLOYMENT OF LABORERS OR MECHANICS NOT LISTED IN AFORESAID WAGE DETERMINATION DECISIONS Any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination decisions and which is to be employed under the Contract will be classified or reclassified conformably to the wage determination by the Local Public Agency or Public Body, and a report of the action taken shall be submitted by the Local Public Agency or Public Body, through the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, to the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor. In the event the interested parties cannot _ agree on the proper classification or reclassification of a particular class of laborers and mechanics to be used, the question, accompanied by the recommendation of the Local Public Agency or Public Body, shall be referred, through the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, to the Secretary of Labor for final determination. 5. SPECIFIC COVERAGE OF CERTAIN TYPES OF WORK BY EMPLOYEES The transportation of materials and supplies to or from the site of the Project or Program to which this Contract pertains by the employees of the Contractor or of any subcontractor, and the manufacturing or furnishing of materials, articles, supplies or equipment on the site of the Project or Program to which this Contract pertains by persons employed by the Contractor or by any subcontractor, shall, for the purposes of this Contract, and without limiting the geniality of the foregoing provisions of this Contract, be deemed to be work to which these Federal Labor Standards Provisions are applicable. 6. UNDERPAYMENTS OF WAGES OR SALARIES In case of underpayment of wages by the Contractor or by any subcontractor to laborers or mechanics employed by the Contractor or subcontractor upon the work covered by _ this Contract, the Local Public Agency or Public Body, in addition to such other rights as may be afforded it under this Contract, shall withhold from the Contractor, out of any payments due the Contractor, so much thereof as the Local Public Agency or Public Body may consider necessary to pay such laborers or mechanics the full amount of wages required by this Contract. The amount so withheld may be disbursed by the Local Public Agency or Public Body, for and on account of the Contractor or the subcontractor (as may be appropriate), to the respective laborers or mechanics to whom the same is _ due, or on their behalf to plans, funds or programs for any type of fringe benefit prescribed in the applicable determination. 7 j 7. ANTICIPATED COSTS OF FRINGE BENEFITS If the Contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other thins person, he may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing fringe benefits under a plan or program of a type expressly listed in the wage determination decisions of the Secretary of Labor, which are a part of this Contract: Provided, the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the Contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis -Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the Contractor to set aside, in a separate account, assets for meeting the obligations under the plan or program. A copy of any findings made by the Secretary of Labor in respect to fringe benefits being provided by the Contractor must be submitted to the Local Public Agency or Public Body with the first payroll filed by the Contractor subsequent to receipt of the findings. 8. FRINGE BENEFITS NOT EXPRESSED AS HOURLY WAGE RATES The Local Public Agency or Public Body shall require, whenever the minimum rate prescribed in the Contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefits which is not expressed as an hourly wage rate, and the Contractor is obligated to pay the cash equivalent of such a fringe benefit, an hourly cash equivalent thereof to be established. In the event the interested parties cannot agree upon a cash equivalent of the fringe benefit, the question, accompanied by the recommendation of the Local Public Agency or Public Body, shall be referred, through the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, to the Secretary of Labor for determination. 9. OVERTIME COMPENSATION REQUIRED BY CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT (76 STAT. 357-360: TITLE 40 U.S.C., SECTIONS 327- 332) (a) Overtime requirements. No Contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the Contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics, including watchmen and guards, shall require or permit any laborer or mechanic in any work week in which they are employed on such work to work in excess of 40 hours in such work week unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times their basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours in such work week. (b) Violation: Liability for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (a) of this Section, the Contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable to any affected employee for his unpaid wages. In addition, such Contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (a) in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such employee was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard work week of 40 hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (a). (c) Withholding for liquidated damages. The Local Public Agency or Public Body shall withhold or cause to be withheld from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the Contractor or any subcontractor such sums as may r administratively be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such Contractor or subcontractor for liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (b) of this Section. (d) Subcontracts. The Contractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) of this Section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontract which they may enter into, together with a clause requiring this insertion in any further subcontracts that may in turn be made. 10. EMPLOYMENT OF APPRENTICES/TRAINEES (a) Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they perform when they are employed and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U. S. Department of Labor, Manpower Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the Contractor as to his entire work force under the registered program. Any employee listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate who is not a trainee as defined in paragraph (b) of this Section, or is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid the wage rate determined by the Secretary of Labor for the classification of work he actually performs. The Contractor or subcontractor will be required to furnish to the contracting officer, or a representative of the Wage -Hour Division of the U. S. Department of Labor, written evidence of the registration of and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeymen hourly rates), for the area of construction prior to using any apprentice on the Contract work. The wage rate paid apprentices shall be not less than the appropriate percentage of the journeyman's rate contained in the applicable wage determination. (b) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.15, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has receivedprior.approval, evidenced by formal certification, by the U. D. Department of Labor, Manpower Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. The ratio of trainees to journeymen shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for his level of progress. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a tralning plan approved by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training shall be paid not less than the wage rate determined by the Secretary of Labor for the classification of work he actually performs. The Contractor or subcontractor will be required to performs. The Contractor or subcontractor will be required to furnish the contracting officer or a representative of the Wage -Hour Division of the U. S. Department of Labor written evidence of the certification of his program, the registration of the trainees and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in that program. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training withdraws approval of a training program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less 7 than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (c) Equal Employment Opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30. No laborer or mechanic to whom the wage, salary or other labor standards provisions of this Contract are applicable shall be discharged or in any other manner discriminated against by the Contractor or any subcontractor because such employee has filed any complaint or instituted or caused to be instituted any proceeding or has testified or is about to testify in any proceeding under or relating to the labor standards applicable to his employer under this Contract. 14. CLAIMS AND DISPUTES PERTAINING TO WAGE RATES Claims and disputes pertaining to wage rates or to classifications of laborers and mechanics employed upon the work covered by this Contract shall be promptly reported by the Contractor, in writing, to the Local Public Agency or Public Body for referral by the latter through the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development to the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, whose decision shall be final with respect thereto. 15. QUESTIONS CONCERNING CERTAIN FEDERAL STATUTES AND REGULATIONS All questions arising under this Contract which relate to the application or interpretation I of (a) the aforesaid Anti -Kickback Act, (b) the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, (c) the aforesaid Davis -Bacon act, (d) the regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, pursuant to said Acts or (e) the labor standards provisions of any other pertinent Federal statute, shall be referred, through the Local Public Agency or Public Body and the Secretary of Housing and Urban �^ Development, to the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, for said 11. EMPLOYMENT OF CERTAIN PERSONS PROHIBITED r- No person under the age of sixteen years and no person who, at the time, is serving sentence in a penal or correctional institution shall be employed on the work covered by this Contract. 12. REGULATIONS PURSUANT TO SO-CALLED "ANTI -KICKBACK ACT. The Contractor shall comply with the applicable regulations (See Exhibit A, attached and herein incorporated by reference) of the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, made pursuant to the so-called "Anti -Kickback Act" of June 13, 1934 (48 Stat. 948, 62 Stat. 862, 63 Stat. 108, 72 Stat. 967; 62 Stat. 740: Title 18 U.S.C., Section 874 r' and Title 40 U.S.C., Section 276c) and any amendments or modifications thereof, and shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in subcontracts to insure compliance therewith by all subcontractors subject thereto, and shall be responsible for the submission of affidavits required by subcontractors thereunder, except as said Secretary of Labor may specifically provide for reasonable limitations, variations, tolerances and exemptions from the requirements thereof. 13. COMPLAINTS PROCEEDINGS OR TESTIMONY BY EMPLOYEES No laborer or mechanic to whom the wage, salary or other labor standards provisions of this Contract are applicable shall be discharged or in any other manner discriminated against by the Contractor or any subcontractor because such employee has filed any complaint or instituted or caused to be instituted any proceeding or has testified or is about to testify in any proceeding under or relating to the labor standards applicable to his employer under this Contract. 14. CLAIMS AND DISPUTES PERTAINING TO WAGE RATES Claims and disputes pertaining to wage rates or to classifications of laborers and mechanics employed upon the work covered by this Contract shall be promptly reported by the Contractor, in writing, to the Local Public Agency or Public Body for referral by the latter through the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development to the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, whose decision shall be final with respect thereto. 15. QUESTIONS CONCERNING CERTAIN FEDERAL STATUTES AND REGULATIONS All questions arising under this Contract which relate to the application or interpretation I of (a) the aforesaid Anti -Kickback Act, (b) the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, (c) the aforesaid Davis -Bacon act, (d) the regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, pursuant to said Acts or (e) the labor standards provisions of any other pertinent Federal statute, shall be referred, through the Local Public Agency or Public Body and the Secretary of Housing and Urban �^ Development, to the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, for said Secretary's appropriate ruling or interpretation, which shall be authoritative and may be relied upon for the purpose of this Contract. 16. BREACH OF FOREGOING FEDERAL LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS In addition to the causes for termination of this Contract as herein elsewhere set forth, the Local Public Agency or Public Body reserves the right to terminate this Contract if the Contractor or any subcontractor whose subcontract covers any of the work covered by this Contract shall breach any of these Federal Labor Standards Provisions.' A breach of these Federal Labor Standards Provisions may also be grounds for debarment, as provided by the applicable regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor. A breach of Section 45 and the Federal Labor Standards Provisions may be grounds for termination of the Contract, and for debarment as provided in 29 CFR 5.6. 17. INTEREST OR MEMBER OF OR DELEGATE TO CONGRESS No member of or Delegate to Congress or Resident Commissioner shall be admitted to any share of this Contract or to any benefit that may arise therefrom, but this provision shall not be construed to extend to this Contract if made with a corporation for its general benefit. 18. OTHER PROHIBITED INTERESTS No official of the Owner who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the Owner to negotiate, make, accept or approve, or to take part in negotiating, making, accepting or approving any architectural, engineering, inspection, construction or material supply contract or any subcontract in connection with the construction of the project shall become directly or indirectly interested personally in this Contract or in any part hereof. No officer, employee, architect, attorney, engineer or inspector of or for the Owner who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the Owner to exercise any legislative, — executive, supervisory or other similar functions in connection with the construction of the project shall become directly or indirectly interested personally In this Contract or in any part thereof, any material supply contract, subcontract, insurance contract or any other contract pertaining to the project. - 19. SPECIAL EQUAL OPPORTUNITY PROVISIONS A. Activities and Contracts Not Subiect to Executive Order 11246 as Amended. Applicable to Federally assisted construction contracts and related subcontractors under $10.000) During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: (1) The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex or national origin. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants for employment are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, religion, sex or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. r�+ (2) The Contractor shall post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the Contracting Officer setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. The Contractor shall state that all qualified applicants will roll receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex or national origin. (3) The Contractor shall incorporate the foregoing requirements in all subcontracts. B. Contracts Subject to Executive Order 11246 as Amended. (Applicable to Federally assisted construction contracts and related subcontracts exceeding $10.000) During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: (1) The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex or national origin. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants for employment are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, religion, sex or national origin. Such action shall include, but not limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer,; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the Contracting Officer setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. (2) The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex or national origin. (3) The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided by the Contract Compliance Officer advising the said labor union or workers' representative of the Contractor's commitment under this Section, and shalt post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (4) The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and the rules, regulations and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. (5) The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by 7 Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and the rules, regulations and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records and accounts by the C r Department and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations and orders. (6) In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this Contract, or with any of such rules, regulations or orders, this Contract may be canceled, terminated, or — suspended in whole or in part, and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts or federally assisted construction contract procedures authorized In Executive Order 11246 of — September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by laws. (7) The Contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately preceding paragraph B(1) of this Section, and the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (7) which follow, in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontractor or purchase order as the Department may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance. Provided, however, that in the event a Contractor become involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with the Department, the Contractor may request the United States to enter such litigation to protect the interest of the United States. C. "Section 3" Compliance in the Provision of Training, Employment and Business Opportunities: (Applicable to Federally assisted construction contracts and related subcontracts exceeding $10,000) During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: (1) The Contractor agrees to comply with the requirements of Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968 (1 USC 170(u)), as amended, the HUD regulations issued pursuant thereto at 24 CFR Part 135, and any applicable rules and orders of HUD issued thereunder. (2) The "Section 3" set forth in 24 CFR 135.20(b) shall form part of this Contract, as set forth in Paragraph 1 of the General Conditions, "Contract and Contract Documents." (3) Contractors shall incorporate the "Section 3 clause" shown below and the foregoing requirements in all subcontracts. Section 3 Clause as set forth in 24 CFR 135.20(b) A. The work to be performed under this Contract is on a project assisted under a program providing direct Federal financial assistance from the Department of Housing and Urban Development and is subject to the requirements of Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701 u. Section 3 requires that to the greatest extent feasible opportunities for training and employment begiven lower income residents of the project area, and contracts for work in connection with the project be awarded to business concerns which are located in, or owned in substantial part by persons residing in the PM area of the project. B. The parties to this Contract will comply with the provisions of said Section 3 and the regulations issued pursuant thereto by the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development and set forth in 24 CFR 135.20(b), and all applicable rules and orders of the Department issued thereunder, prior to the execution of this Contract. The parties to this Contract certify and agree that they are under no contractual or other disability which would prevent them from complying with these requirements. C. ' The Contractor will send to each labor organization or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, if any, a notice advising the said labor organization or workers' representative of his commitments under this Section 3 clause, and shall posts copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment or training. D. The Contractor will include this Section 3 clause in every subcontract for work in connection with the project and will, at the direction of the applicant for or recipient of Federal financial assistance, take appropriate action pursuant to a subcontract upon a finding that a Subcontractor is in violation of regulations issued by the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, 24 CFR 135.20 (b). The Contractor will not subcontract with any subcontractor where the Contractor has notice or knowledge that the subcontractor has been found in violation of regulations under 24 CFR 135.20 (b), and will not let any subcontract unless the subcontractor has first provided said Contractor with a preliminary statement of ability to comply with the requirements of these regulations. E. Compliance with the provisions of Section 3, the regulations set forth in 24 CFR 135.20 (b), and all applicable rules and orders of the Department issued thereunder prior to the execution of the Contract, shall be a condition of the Federal financial assistance provided tot he project, binding upon the applicant or recipient for such assistance, its successors and assigns. Failure to fulfill theses requirements shall subject the applicant or recipient, its contractors and subcontractors, its successors and assigns to those sanctions specified by the grant or loan agreement or contract through which Federal assistance is provided, and to such sanctions as are specified by 24 CFR 135.20(b). 20. CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH AIR AND WATER ACTS (Applicable to Federally assisted construction contracts and related subcontracts exceeding $100.000) �^ Compliance with Air and Water Acts During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor and all subcontractors shall comply with the requirements of the Clean Air Act, as amended, 42 USC 1857 et seq., and the Federal water Pollution Control Act, as amended, 33 USC 1251 et seq., and the regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency with respect thereto, at 40 CFR Part 15, as amended. In addition to the foregoing requirements, all non-exempt contractors and subcontractors shall furnish to the Owner the following: (1) A stipulation by the Contractor or subcontractors that any facility to be utilized in the performance of any nonexempt contract or subcontract is not listed on the List of Violating Facilities issued by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) pursuant to 40 CFR 15.20. (2) An agreement by the Contractor to comply with all the requirements of Section 114 of the Clean Air Act, as amended, (42 USC 1857c-8) and Section 308 of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, (33 USC 1318) relating to inspection, monitoring, entry, reports and information, as well as all other requirements specified in said Section 114 and Section 308, and all regulations and guidelines issued thereunder. (3) A stipulation that as a condition for the award of the Contract, prompt notice will be given of any notification received from the Director, Office of Federal Activities, EPA, indicating that a facility utilized, or to be utilized for the contracts, is under consideration to be listed on the EPA List of Violating Facilities. (4) An agreement by the Contractor that he will include, or cause to be included, the criteria and requirements in paragraphs (1) through (4) of this Section in every nonexempt subcontract and requiring that the Contractor will take such action as the Government may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. 21. SPECIAL CONDITIONS PERTAINING TO HAZARDS SAFETY STANDARDS AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION A. Lead -Based Pain Hazards (Applicable to contracts and related subcontracts for construction or rehabilitation of residential structures exceeding $100.000) The construction or rehabilitation of residential structures is subject to the HUD Lead -Based Paint regulations, 24 CFR Part 35. The Contractor and subcontractors shall comply with the provisions for the elimination of lead-based paint hazards under sub -part B of said regulations. The Owner will be responsible for the inspections and certifications required under Section 35.14(f) thereof. B. Use of Explosives The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. When the use of explosives is necessary for the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall observe all local, state and Federal laws in purchasing and handling explosives. The contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect completed work, neighboring G.. property, water lines or other underground structures. Where there is danger to structures or property from blasting, the charges shall be reduced and the �- material shall be covered with suitable timber, steel or rope mats. The Contractor shall notify all owners of public utility property of his intention to use explosives at least eight hours before blasting is done close to such property. Any supervision or direction of use of explosives by the Engineer does not in any way reduce the responsibility of the Contractor or his Surety for damages that may be caused by such use. C. Danger Signals and Safety Devices The Contractor shall make all necessary precautions to guard against damages to property and injury to persons. He shall put up and maintain in good condition sufficient red or warning lights at night, suitable barricades and other devices necessary to protect the public. in case the Contractor fails or neglects to take such precautions, the Owner may have such lights and barricades installed and charge the cost of this work to the Contractor. Such action by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of any liability incurred under these specifications or Contract. 22. NONDISCRIMINATION AGAINST THE HANDICAPPED - SECTION 504 The Contractor shall not discriminate against any otherwise qualified handicapped employee or applicant for employment solely by reason of his handicap. The Contractor shall comply with Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (P.L. 93-112) as amended (129 U.S.C.A. section 794). EXHIBITS A. COPELAND ANTI -KICKBACK REGULATIONS B. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS r■• ATTACHMENT TO FEDERAL LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS SO-CALLED "ANTI -KICKBACK ACT" AND REGULATIONS PROMULGATED PURSUANT THERETO BY THE SECRETARY OF LABOR, UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF LABOR TITLE 18, U.S.C., SECTION 874 (Replaces Section 1 of the Act of June 13, 1934 (48 Stat. 948, 40 U.S.C., Sec. 276b) pursuant to ., the Act of June 25, 1948, 62 Stat. 862) KICKBACKS FROM PUBLIC WORKS EMPLOYEES Whoever, by force, intimidation, or threat of procuring dismissal from employment, or by any other manner whatsoever induces any person employed in the construction, prosecution, completion or repair of any public building, public work, or building or work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States to give up any part of the compensation to which he is entitled under his contract of employment, shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than five years, or both. SECTION 2 OF THE ACT OF JUNE 13, 1934, AS AMENDED (48 Stat. 948, 62 Stat. 862, 63 Stat. 108, 72 Stat. 967, 40 U.S.C., Sec. 276c) The Secretary of Labor shall make reasonable regulations for contractors and subcontractors engaged in the construction, prosecution, completion or repair of public buildings, public works or buildings or work finance din whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States, including a provision that each contractor and subcontractor shall furnish weekly a statement with respect to the wages paid each employee during the preceding week. Section 1001 of Title 18 (United State Code) shall apply to such statements. ---XXX--- Pursuant to the aforesaid Anti -Kickback Act, the Secretary of Labor, United States Department of Labor, has promulgated the regulations hereinafter set forth, which regulations are found in Title 29, Subtitle A, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 3. The term "this part," as used in the regulations hereinafter set forth, refers to Part 3 last above mentioned. Said regulations are as follows: TITLE 29 LABOR Subtitle A - Office of the Secretary of Labor PART 3 - CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS ON PUBLIC BUILDING OR !- PUBLIC WORK FINANCED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY LOANS OR GRANTS f FROM THE UNITED STATES Section 3.1 Purpose and scope. This part prescribes "anti -kickback" regulations under Section 2 of the Act of June 13,1934, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276c), popularly known as the Copeland Act. This part applies to any contract which is subject to Federal wage standards 1 and which is for the construction, prosecution, completion, or repair of public buildings, public works or buildings or work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States. The part is intended to aid in the enforcement of the minimum wage provisions of the Davis -Bacon Act and the various statutes dealing with Federally -assisted construction that contain similar minimum wage provisions, including those provisions which are not subject to Reorganization plan No. 14 (e.g., the College Housing Act of 1950, the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, and the Housing Act of 1959), and in the enforcement of the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours Standards Act whenever they are applicable to construction work. The part details the weekly submission of statements regarding the wages paid on work covered thereby; sets forth the circumstances and procedures governing the making of payroll deductions from the wages of those employed on such work; and delineates the methods of payment permissible on such work. Section 3.2 Definitions. As used in the regulation in this part: (a) The terms "building" or "work" generally includes construction activity as distinguished from manufacturing, furnishing of materials, or servicing and maintenance work. The terms include, without limitation, buildings, structures, and improvements of all types, such as bridges, dams, plants, highways, parkways, streets, subways, tunnels, sewers, mains, power lines, pumping stations, railways, airports, terminals, docks, piers, wharves, ways, lighthouses, buoys, jetties, breakwaters, levees, and canals; dredging, shoring, scaffolding, drilling, blasting, excavating, clearing, and landscaping. Unless conducted in connection with and at the site of such a building or work as is described In the foregoing sentence, the manufacture or furnishing of materials, articles, supplies, or equipment (whether or not a Federal or State agency acquires title to such materials, articles, supplies, or equipment during the course of the manufacture or furnishing, or owns the materials from which they are manufactured or furnished) is not a "building" or "work" within the meaning of the regulations in this part. (b) The terms "conditions", "prosecution", "completion", or "repair" mean all types of work done on a particular building or work at the site thereof, including, without limitation, altering, remodeling, painting and decorating, the transporting of materials and supplies to or from the building or work by the employees of the construction contractor or construction subcontractor, and the manufacturing or furnishing of materials, articles, supplies, or equipment on the site of the building or work, by persons employed at the site by the contractor or subcontractor. (c) The terms "public building" or "public work" include building or work for whose construction, prosecution, completion, or repair, as defined above, a Federal agency is a contracting party, regardless of whether title thereof is in a federal agency. (d) The term "building or work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States" includes building or work for whose construction, prosecution, completion, or repair, as defined above, payment or part payment is made directly or indirectly from funds provided by loans or grants by a Federal agency. The term does not include building or work for which Federal assistance is limited solely to loan guarantees or insurance. (e) Every person paid by a contractor or subcontractor in any manner for his labor In the construction, prosecution, completion, or repair of a public building or public work or building or work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States is "employed" or receiving "wages", regardless of any l.. contractual relationship alleged to exist between him and the real employer. (f) The term "any affiliated person" includes a spouse, child, parent, or other close relative of the contractor or subcontractor, a partner or officer of the contractor or subcontractor, a corporation closely connected with the contractor or subcontractor as parent, subsidiary or otherwise, and an officer or agent of such corporation. (g) The term "Federal agency" means the United States, the District of Columbia, and all executive departments, independent establishments, administrative agencies, and instrumentality's of the United States and of the District of Columbia, including corporations, all or substantially all of the stock of which is beneficially owned by the United States, by the District of Columbia, or any of the foregoing departments, establishments, agencies, and instrumentality's. Section 3.3 Weekly statement with respect to payment of wages. (a) As used in this section, the term "employee" shall not apply to persons in classifications higher than that of laborer or mechanic and those who are the immediate supervisors of such employees. (b) Each contractor or subcontractor engaged in the construction, prosecution, completion, or repair of any public building or public work, or building or work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants form the United States, shall furnish each week a statement with respect to the wages paid each of its employees engaged on work covered by 29 CFR Parts 3 and 5 -during the preceding weekly payroll period. This statement shall be executed by the contractor or subcontractor or by an authorized officer or employee of the contractor or subcontractor who supervises the payment of wages, and shall be on form WH 348 "Statement of Compliance", or on an identical form on the back of WH 347, "Payroll (For Contractors Optional Use)" or on any form with identical wording. Sample copies of WH 347 and WH 347 and WH 348 may be obtained from the Government contracting or sponsoring agency, and copies of these forms may be purchased at the Government Printing Office. (c) The requirements of this section shall not apply to any contract of $2,000 or less. (d) Upon a written finding by the head of a Federal agency, the Secretary of Labor may provide reasonable limitations, variations, tolerances, and exemptions from the requirements of this section subject to such conditions as the Secretary of Labor may specify. (29 F.R. 95, Jan. 4, 1964, as amended at 33 F.R. 10186, July 17, 1968) Section 3.4 Submission of weekly statements and the preservation and inspection of weekly payroll records. (a) Each weekly statement required under Section 3.3 shall be delivered by the contractor or subcontractor, within seven days after the regular payment date of the payroll period, to a representative of a Federal or State agency in charge at site of the building or work, or, if there is nor representative of a Federal or State agency at the site of the building or work, the statement shall be mailed by the contractor or subcontractor, within such time, to a Federal or state agency contracting for or financing the building or work. After such examination and check as may be made, such statement, or a copy thereof, shall be kept available, or shall be transmitted together with a report of any violation, in accordance with applicable procedures prescribed by the United States Department of Labor. (b) Each contractor or subcontractor shall preserve his weekly payroll records for a period of three years from date of completion of the contract. The payroll records shall set out accurately and completely the name and address of each laborer and mechanic, his correct classification, rate of pay, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Such payroll records shall be made available at all times for inspection by the contracting officer or his authorized representatives of the Department of Labor. Section 3.5 Payroll deductions permissible without application to or approval of the Secretary of Labor. Deductions made under the circumstances or in the situations described in the paragraphs of this section may be made without application to and approval of the Secretary of Labor. (a) Any deduction made in compliance with the requirements of Federal, State, or local law, such as Federal or State withholding income taxes and Federal social security taxes. (b) Any deduction of sums previously paid to the employee as a bona fide prepayment of wages when such prepayment is made without discount or interest. A "bona fide prepayment of wages" is considered to have been made only when cash or its equivalent has been advanced to the person employed in such manner as to give him complete freedom of disposition of the advanced funds. (c) Any deduction of amounts required by court process to be paid to another, unless the deduction is in favor of the contractor, subcontractor or any affiliated person, or when collusion or collaboration exists. (d) Any deductions constituting a contribution on behalf of the person employed to funds established by the employer or representatives of employees, or both, for the purpose of providing either form principal or income, or both, medical or hospital care, pensions or annuities on retirement, death benefits, compensation for injuries, illness, accidents, sickness, or disability, or for insurance to provide any of the foregoing, or unemployment benefits, vacation pay, savings accounts, or similar payments for the benefit of employees, their families and dependents: Provided, however, that the following standards are met: (1) The deduction is (e) Any deduction contributing toward the purchase of United States Defense Stamps and Bonds when voluntarily authorized by the employee. (f) Any deduction requested by the employee to enable him to repay loans to or to purchase shares in credit unions organized and operated in accordance with Federal and State credit union statutes. (g) Any deduction voluntarily authorized by the employee for the making of contributions to govemmental or quasigovemmental agencies, such as the American Red Cross. (h) Any deduction voluntarily authorized by the employee for the making of contributions to community Chests, United Givers Funds, and similar charitable organizations. (i) Any deduction to pay regular union initiation fees and membership dues, not including fines or special assessments: Provided, however, that a collective bargaining agreement between the contractor or subcontractor and representatives of its employees provides for such deductions and the deductions are not otherwise prohibited by law. 0) Any deduction not more than for the "reasonable cost" of board, lodging, or other facilities meeting the requirements of section 3(m) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, and Part 531 of this title. When such a deduction is made the additional records required under Section 516.27(a) of this title shall be kept. Section 3.6 Payroll deductions permissible with the approval of the Secretary of Labor. Any contractor or subcontractor may apply to the Secretary of Labor for permission to make any deduction not permitted under Section 3.5. The Secretary may grant permission whenever he finds that: (a) The contractor, subcontractor, or any affiliated person does not make a profit or benefit directly or indirectly form the deduction either in the form of a commission, dividend, or otherwise' (b) The deduction is not otherwise prohibited by law; (c) The deduction is either (1) voluntarily consented to by the employee in r writing and in advance of the period in which the work is to be done and such consent is not a condition either for the obtaining of employment or its continuance, or (2) provided for in a bona fide collective bargaining agreement C not otherwise prohibited by "(2) A is either (1) Voluntarily consented to by the employee in writing and in advance of the period in which the work is to be done and such consent is not a condition either for the obtaining of or for the continuation of employment, or (ii) provided for in a bona fide collective bargaining agreement between the contractor or subcontractor and .- representatives of its employees; (3) no profit or other benefit is otherwise obtained, directly or indirectly, by the contractor or subcontractor or any affiliated person in the form of commission, dividend, or otherwise; and (4) the w deductions shall serve the convenience and interest of the employee. (e) Any deduction contributing toward the purchase of United States Defense Stamps and Bonds when voluntarily authorized by the employee. (f) Any deduction requested by the employee to enable him to repay loans to or to purchase shares in credit unions organized and operated in accordance with Federal and State credit union statutes. (g) Any deduction voluntarily authorized by the employee for the making of contributions to govemmental or quasigovemmental agencies, such as the American Red Cross. (h) Any deduction voluntarily authorized by the employee for the making of contributions to community Chests, United Givers Funds, and similar charitable organizations. (i) Any deduction to pay regular union initiation fees and membership dues, not including fines or special assessments: Provided, however, that a collective bargaining agreement between the contractor or subcontractor and representatives of its employees provides for such deductions and the deductions are not otherwise prohibited by law. 0) Any deduction not more than for the "reasonable cost" of board, lodging, or other facilities meeting the requirements of section 3(m) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, and Part 531 of this title. When such a deduction is made the additional records required under Section 516.27(a) of this title shall be kept. Section 3.6 Payroll deductions permissible with the approval of the Secretary of Labor. Any contractor or subcontractor may apply to the Secretary of Labor for permission to make any deduction not permitted under Section 3.5. The Secretary may grant permission whenever he finds that: (a) The contractor, subcontractor, or any affiliated person does not make a profit or benefit directly or indirectly form the deduction either in the form of a commission, dividend, or otherwise' (b) The deduction is not otherwise prohibited by law; (c) The deduction is either (1) voluntarily consented to by the employee in r writing and in advance of the period in which the work is to be done and such consent is not a condition either for the obtaining of employment or its continuance, or (2) provided for in a bona fide collective bargaining agreement C between the contractor or subcontractor and representatives of its employees; and (d) The deduction serves the convenience and interest of the employee. Section 3.7 Applications for the approval of the Secretary of Labor. Any application or the making of payroll deductions under Section 3.6 shall comply with the requirements prescribed in the following paragraphs of this section: (a) The application shall be in writing and shall be addressed to the Secretary of Labor. (b) The application shall identify the contract or contracts under which the work in question is to be performed. Permission will be given for deductions only on specific, identified contracts, except upon a showing of exceptional circumstances. (c) The application shall state affirmatively that:there is compliance with the standards set forth in the provisions of Section 3.6. The affirmation shall be accompanied by a full statement of the facts indicating such compliance. (d) The application shall include a description of the proposed deduction, the purpose to be served thereby, and the classes of laborers or mechanics form whose wages the proposed deduction would be made. (e) The application shall state the name and business of any third person to whom any funds obtained from the proposed deductions are to be transmitted and the affiliation of such person, if any, with the applicant. Section 3.8 Action by the Secretary of Labor upon applications. The Secretary of Labor shall decide whether or not the requested deduction is permissible under provisions of Section 3.6; and shall notify the applicant in writing of his decision. _ Section 3.9 Prohibited payroll deductions. Deductions not elsewhere for by this part and which are not found to be permissible under Section 3.6 are prohibited. Section 3.10 Methods of payment of wages. The payment of wages shall be by cash, negotiable instruments payable on demand, or the additional forms of compensation for which deductions are — permissible under this part. Not other methods of payment shall be recognized on work subject to the Copeland Act. Y P t Section 3.11 Regulations part of contract All contracts made with respect to the construction, prosecution, completion, or repair of any public building or public work or building or work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States covered by the regulations in this part shall expressly bind the contractor or subcontractor to comply with such of the regulations in this part as may be applicable. In this regard, see Section r 5.5 (a) of this subtitle. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS i - U.S. Department of Housing and uroan uevetopmeua Office of Labor Relations Texas State Office, Southwest 1600 Throckmorton Street r ';GPost office Box 2905 "ek cEVE�c Fort worth, Texas 76113-2905 August 19, 1996 k Lemuel L. Green Economic/Capital Project Specialist Lubbock Community Develop ment Agency i- 1625 13th Street j Lubbock, TX 79457 Dear Mr. Green: SUBJECT: Project Number: B95MC480022 Project Name ReArnettfTwo BensonuSeniorsCitizensCommunity Center & Supercenter Proj. Location: Luubbbockbock ,County LTX Enclosed is a copy of the schedule of Wage Rates, Decision Number TX960015, of the Secretary of Labor, dated 06/14/96. This schedule must be made part of the contract documents for the subject project. Please refer to the enclosed instructions nconcerneedi tanceg wage please determinations. If you have any questions, contact Dianna Isbell at (817)-885-5829. S inc rely,, II Ferias E. Ferguson , Labor Relations Off�yer Enclosures General Decision Number TX960015//4- 9� Superseded General Decision No. TX950015 State: TEXAS Construction Type: BUILDING County(ies): LUBBOCK BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include residmienapartments up construction consisting of single family homes and to and including 4 stories). (Use current heavy & highway general wage determination for Paving & Utilities Incidental to Building Construction). Modification Number 0 1 2 Publication Date 03/15/1996 05/31/1996 06/14/1996 TX960015 - 1 06/14/1996 COUNTY(ies): LUBBOCK CARP1884A 07/01/1993 Rates Fringes CARPENTERS 12.50 2.73 MILLWRIGHTS 13.00 2.73 --------------------------------------------------------- - ELECO850A 05/30/1996 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIANS 14.60 3.20+3.25% ----------------------------------------------------- * PLUM0629A 06/01/1996 Rates Fringes PLUMBERS: Mechanical contracts over $150,000 15.70 2.88 Mechanical contracts $150,000 or less 10.50 1.59 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SFTX0669A 01/01/1995 Rates Fringes SPRINKLER FITTERS 18.25 5.78 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2048A 03/16/1992 Rates Fringes ACOUSTICAL CEILING AND DRYWALL MECHANICS 10.00 .25 BRICKLAYETS 11.74 GLAZIERS 9.50 LABORERS 5.95 LATHERS 11.17 MASON TENDERS 6.25 PAINTERS 10.50 PLASTERERS 11.17 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS: Backhoe 10.50 •42 ROOFERS 9.71 SHEET METAL WORKERS (Including duct work) 8.80 .69 ----------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for the craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ---------------------------------------------------------------- Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after TX960015 - 2 06/14/1996 award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(v))------------------------------------------- In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates listed under that illlecotherldesignations bargained wage and fringe benefit rates indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be prevailing. END OF GENERAL DECISION TX960015 - 3 06/14/1996 Ono SPECIFICATIONS r SPECIFICATIONS FOR RENOVATIONS ANIS ADpITIONS FOR THE ARNETT-5ENSON COMMUNITY "SUPERCENTER" FOR THE OFFICE OF PARKS ,4ND RECREATION ie+NP THE GTY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS SPEGAL NOTE: These project drawings and bid documents do not encompass the presence of asbestos containing building materials (AGSM) or lead containing materials. For bidding purposes, all materials shown to be removed, demolished, or otherwise renovated are to be assumed to be asbestos and lead free. Recent investigation has identified the potential presence of ACBM in various building materials in this facility. Management of asbestos and lead containing materials are beyond the scope of this contract, and should be coordinated with the city of Lubbock Office of Parks and Recreation to determine the scope of any additional services, should they be required. i ED ARC � yO�j SCHf��' r- SLS PARTNERSHIP, INC. ARCHITECTS • INTERIORS • PLANNERS a 6502 Slide Road - Suite 403 a �' Lubbock, Texas 79424.1311 1 62 CO 806.794.4726 Fax 806.794.4667 DIVISIONS 2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10 .Oz q7 RTR ENGINEERS, INC. CONSULTING ENGINEERS 2574 74th Street - Suite 202 Lubbock, Texas 79423.1406 806.745.4881 Fax 806.745.9688 DIVISION 3, SECTIONS 02200, 02514, 04230, 05120, 05400 COMPLIANCE SERVICES GROUP, INC. ENGINEERS AND SCIENTISTS 7619 University Avenue - Suite 2A Lubbock, Texas 79423.2126 806.748.0040 Fax 806.748.0030 DIVISION 15 DIVISION 16 k �taa�.w ••pj- ! & in t `t TADL5 OF CONTENTS SPECIAL NOTE: These project drawings and bid documents do not encompass the presence of asbestos containing building materials (ACBM) or lead containing materials. For bidding purposes, all materials shown to be removed, demolished, or otherwise renovated are to be assumed to be asbestos and lead free. Recent investigation has identified the potential presence of ACBM in various building materials in this facility. Management of asbestos and lead containing materials are beyond the scope of this contract, and should be coordinated with the City of Lubbock Office of Parks and Recreation to determine the scope of any additional services, should they be required. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK DIVISION 2 51TE WORK Section 02060 02012 02100 02200 02222 02446 02514 DIVISION 5 CONCRETE Section 05251 05510 DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04200 04250 042'10 DIVISION 5 METALS Section 05120 05400 05500 05605 Building Demolition Minor Demolition for Remodeling site Clearing Earthwork Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling Wood Fences Concrete Walks Expansion and contraction Joints concrete Work Unit Masonry Reinforced Unit Masonry Vass Unit Masonry Structural steel cold -Formed Metal Metal Fabrications Expansion Joint Assemblies DIVISION 6 CARPENTRY AND WOODWORK Section 06 100 carpentry Work 06400 Architectural Woodwork 55 5 5 2 10 3 8 5 2 22 10 6 5 10 5 5 4 6 5 PAGE 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Pages 171VISION '1 MOISTURE AND THERMAL PROTECTION Section 0111,75 Water Repellant Coating 2 0121 O Building Insulation 2 0'1241 Exterior Insulation Finish 5y5tem 4 0'1520 Built Up Roofing and Sheetmetal 5 0179100 caulking and Sealants 5 DIVISION 8 DOORS, WINOOW5 AN17 &LASS Sect ion 06150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 6 06210 Wood Doors 4 06,700 Finish Hardware 5 06600 &lass and blazing 5 DIVISION q FINISHES Section Oq 260 &ypeum Wallboard 5y5tems '1 011510 Acoustical Ceilings 5 0g650 Resilient Flooring 4 Og650 carpeting 4 09 g00 Painting 10 2"" i DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES t Section 10166 Baked Polyurethane Toilet Compartments 5 �.. 10400 Signage 2 10522 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories 5 10500 Toilet Accessories 2 f DIVISION 1 1 EQUIPMENT (Not in this Contract) DIVISION 12 FURNISHIN&5 (Not in this Contract) DIVISION 15 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION f (Not In this contract) .r f DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS t (Not in this Contract) r= PAGE 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL Section 15000 General Provisions For Mechanical 15100 Trenching 15 1'TO Motors 151 CIO Mechanical Identification 15260 Piping Insulation 1 5 2 90 Ductwork Insulation 15410 Plumbing Piping 15450 Plumbing Specialties 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 15625 Forced Air Furnaces 156"70 Power ventilators 15690 Ductwork 154110 Ductwork Accessories 1 5940 Air Outlets and Inlets DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16000 beneral Requirements for all Electrical Work 16111 Conduit 16125 Building Wire and Cable 16150 Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 161 '70 Grounding and Bonding 161 90 Supporting Devices 16195 Electricalldentification 16441 Enclosed 5witche5 164'70 Panelboards 164 7 7 Fuses 16461 Enclosed Motor Controllers 16510 Interior Luminaries DRAWIN65 BOUND SEPARATELY End of Table of Contents Pages 1g 5 5 4 5 8 s 6 5 5 5 2 5 10 'T 4 4 4 8 s 2 s 8 2 4 4 PAGE 5 r ' GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL NOP CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS r SECTION "A" PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Application for Payment. B. Change procedures. 1.05 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section "H° - Submittals: Schedule of Values. B. Section "o"- Material and Equipment: Product substitutions. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. submit three copies of each application on AIA Form C7 102 - Application and Certificate for Payment. B. content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Payment Period: As defined in Owner -Contractor agreement. D. Aalver of liens from subcontractor. 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURE5 A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201, 1 a8? Edition, Paragraph '1.4 by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form C77 10. B. The Architect may issue a change Request Proposal which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in contract Time for executing the change. contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 'T days. c. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the riork. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the contract r- l PAGE 1 SECTION -A" GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK, CONTRACT CONSIVERATIONS SECTION "A" Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. document any requested substitutions in accordance with 5ectlon ,`O% D. Stipulated 5um/Price Change order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as ,approved by Architect. E. Unit Price change order: For pre -determined unit prices and quantities, the change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre -determined, execute work under a construction Change Authorization. changes in contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material change Order. F. Construction Change Authorization: Architect may issue a directive, on AIA Form _ 6115 Construction Change authorization signed by the Owner, instructing the contractor to proceed with a change in the work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the work, and designate method of determining any change in contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change. 6..r Time and Material change order: Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the conditions of the Contract. Architect will determine the change allowable in contract Sum/Pride and Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. H. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full -- Information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the work. L Change Order Forms: AIA 610 Change Order. .�. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided In the conditions of the contract. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 5. EXECUTION Not Used End of Section SECTION "A" f'AGE 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK CONTRACT CONSIVERATIONS SECTION "A" SECTION "A" PAGE 5 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK COORDINATION ANP MEETINGS r' SECTION "B" PART 1. 6ENER-AL 1.01 RELATEP VOCUMENTS A.. Prawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and vivision 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. S. Field engineering. C. Cutting and patching. V. Preconstruction conference. E. site mobilization conference. F. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. S. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for .repairs. D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. r� a SECTION "B" PAGE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK COORDINATION AND MF-ETINC79 SECTION "B" E. Large Apparatus: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be Installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. F. Items which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. voltage 2. Phase S. Ampacity 4. Number and size of wires S. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location "1. Control devices and details G. Coordinate completion and clean up of work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.. 1.04 FIELD ENGINEERING A. -Contractor to locate and protect survey control and reference points. B. Control datum for survey is that shown on,Drawings. C. Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized engineering surveg practices. 1.05 GUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. S. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects: — 1. Structural integrity of element. SECTION "B" Pr4GE 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK COOKPINATION ANP MEETINGS SECTION "B" 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. s. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. S. work of Owner or separate contractor. G. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, t mplete work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other work. 2. Uncover ►Mork to install or correct ill-timed work. s. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming work. 4. Remove samples of installed work for testing. S. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. a. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Gut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. F. Restore work with new products In accordance with requirements of Contract documents. 6. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. J. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the work to the Architect/Engineer for decision or remedy. 1.06 PRECONSTRUGTION CONFERENCE A. Architect will schedule a confOrence after Notice to Proceed. SECTION "8" PAGE 5 r GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL NORK COORDINATION ANP MEETINGS SECTION "B" B. Attendance Required: Owner's Representative, Architect, contractor and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2, distribution of contract Documents. s. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule. �- 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in contract and the Architect. _ S. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, change Orders and contract — closeout procedures. 6. Scheduling. 1.01 SITE MOBILIZATION cONFERENGE A. Architect will schedule a conference at the Project site prior to contractor — Occupancy. B. Attendance Required: Architect, special consultants, contractor, contractor's — Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. use of premises by Owner and contractor. 2, owner's requirements. S. construction facilities and controls provided by contractor. 4. Temporary utilities provided by contractor. S. Survey and building layout. 6. Site security. 'T. Schedules. SECTION "B" PAGE 4 GENERAL. PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL NORK COORDINATION ANP MEETINGS SECTION 1B" r 6. Procedures for testing. C q. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 1 O. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 1 1. inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 1.06 PROGRESS MEETIN65 A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the work at maximum j, monthly intervals. 5. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days to Architect, participants, and those affected by decisions made. G. Attendance Required: .lob superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, r architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. s V. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of riork progress. < 5. , Field observations, problems, and decisions. �.., 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. e. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6.. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. ,7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 6. corrective measures to regain projected schedules. q. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. coordination of projected progress. 1 1. Maintenance of quality and work standards. SECTION °B" PAGE 5 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK COORDINATION AND MEETING5 SECTION "B" 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. — 15. Other business relating to Work. 1.01q PREINSTALLATION CONPERENCE5 A. when required in individual specification 5ectlon, convene a preinstallation _ conference at work site prior to commencing work of the section. 5. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. — C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. P. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and 'distribute copies — within two days after conference to participants, with three copies to Architect. E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related work. PART 2. PRODUCTS Not Used .— PART 5. EXECUTION Not Used End of Section SECTION "S" PAGE 6 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK GUTTING ANP PATCHING SECTION "C" PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENT5 A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary beneral conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION t A. contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, required to complete the riork and to make its several parts fIt'together properly. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request to Architect well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects the work of the Owner or any separate contractor or the structural value or integrity of any structural element of the Project. 5. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, Contractor shall submit request for substitution. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. comply with applicable specifications section for each specific product Involved. 5. Mere cutting and patching Is required on existing surfaces, use same quality, type and appearance of existing material. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSPECTION A. inspect existing conditions of the Project, Including elements sub feat to damage or to movement during cutting and patching. 5. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of Products, or performance of the work. C,. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Architect In writing; ro,SECTION "C" PAGE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL YVORK GUTTING ANP PATCHING SECTION "C" do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions. 5.02 PREPARATION _ A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure the structural value or integrity of the affected portion of the work. — 8. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. _ 3.05 PERFORMANCE A. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other _ work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. B. After installation of the work, carefully fit around, 41o5e up, repair, patch and/or point up all such work to match adjoining surface by use of proper tools and materials and by skilled workmen to which the work belongs. C. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. V. Restore work which has been cut or removed; Install new products to provide completed work in accord with requirements of Contract documents. E. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. F. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. End Of Section SECTION "C" J PAC7S 2 i r 6ENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK REFERENCE STANDARPS SECTION "P" PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 STAN17ARDS A. References to standards, codes, Specifications, recommendations and regulations refer to the latest edition or _printing prior to date of issue of the Contract Vocuments. B. Applicable portions of standards listed that are not in conflict with contract documents are hereby made a part of the Specifications. r' c. Modifications or exceptions to standards shall be considered as amendments and unmodified portions shall remain in full effect. in cases of discrepancies between standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern. r P. 5chedule of Standards Acoustical d Insulation Materials Association ATMA nee: AMA Aluminum Association AA American Association of State Highway Officials AASHO American concrete Institute AGI American Hot Dip Galvanizers Association AHn6A American Institute of Architects AIA American Institute of Electrical Engineers AIEE American Institute of Steel construction AISC American Insurance Association AIA nee: National Board of Fire underwriters American National standards Institute ANSI nee: American Standards Association ASA American Plywood Association APA American Society of Mechanical Engineers A5ME American Society of Testing and Materials ASTM American Welding Society AW5 American Wood 'Preservers Association AYWA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers AssoclAtlon AAMA Architectural Woodwork Institute AWI SECTION "V" PA6E 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK REFERENCE STANV A►RPS SECTION "V" California Redwood Association GRA Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute GLFMI Commercial Standards Gs — Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CRSI Elevator safety Code as Approved by the American standards Association ASE Code _ Factory Mutual Research corporation FMRC nee: FMEG Federal specifications Fed. spec. Flat Glass .robbers Association FGJA ` Hardwood Plywood Institute HPI Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction Associated General Contractors of America AGC, Marble Institute of America MIA National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NAAMM — National Building Granite Quarries Association NS&OA National Concrete Masonry Association NCMA National Electric Code National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NEMA National Fire Protection Association NFPA National Hardwood Lumber Association NHLA _ National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association NTMA National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association NWMA Occupational safety and Health Act OSHA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America PPCA Portland Gement Association PGA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. SMACGNA Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SPIE Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding of the American Wielding Society steel .foist Institute SJI ._ Structural Clay Products Institute SCPI Texas state Department of Highways and Public Transportation Tile Council of America TGA — Underwriter's Laboratory UL West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WGLiB PART .2 PRODUCTS (Does not Apply) SECTION "D" IPAC7E 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL )NORK REFERENCE STANVARt7S SECTION "P" PART E EXECUTION (Does not Apply) End of Section SECTION "17" PASvE 5 r� f' GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL 1NORK .., ALTERNATES SECTION "E" PART 1 6ENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including, General Conditions, supplementary General Conditions, special conditions and General Requirements (Division 1 ), apply to the work specifled in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Alternates are to be bid on the Proposal for General construction ►Mork. B. Designate clearly on the proposal form whether the Alternate Amount Is to be added to or deducted from the Base Bid Amount. C. The Alternates will be considered by the Owner and may or may not be accepted. D. One or more of the Alternates may be accepted without regard to the order listed. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work under the alternates shall comply with the applicable provisions of the Drawings and specifications. The work under any alternate shall include any additional work required to complete the remaining work which is affected thereby, in a finished condition. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1: The Bidder shall state on the Proposal form the lump sum amount to be added to the Base Bid If: All work associated with the fabrication and installation of moveable millwork units and fixed shelves at storage, all located at the Game Room. B. Alternate No. 2: The Bidder shall state on the Proposal form the lump sum amount to be added to the Base Bid If: All work associated with the fabrication and installation of drywall framing and millwork storage/display unit at the Arts and Craft Room. Co. Alternate No. s: The Bidder shall state on the Proposal form the lump sum amount to be added to the Base Bid if: r„ SECTION "E" PAGE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK ALTERNATES SECTION "E" All work associated with the construction of covered porch located at the Arnett -Benson senior center. D. Alternate No. 4: The Bidder shall state on the Proposal form the lump sum amount to be added to the Base Bid if; All work associated with the Bench seating located at the transition building addition. E. Alternate No. 5: The Bidder shall state on the Proposal form the lump sum amount to be added to the Base Bid if: All work associated with the Directors millwork work station and all associated drywall, lighting, power and finishes. F. Alternate No. 6: The Bidder shall state on the Proposal form the lump sum amount to be added to the Base Bid if: All work associated with the installation of a modified bitumen roofing system at all new roof construction, equal to TAMKO # 1 '14FR. PART'2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 5 EXECUTION Not Applicable End of Alternates SECTION "E" PAGE 2 I GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR AKCHITEGTURAL WORK �,.. CHANSE OR -PER PROCEPURES t t SECTION "F" PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1 ), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 PROPOSED CHANGES A. Upon discovery of circumstances or conditions leading to the conclusion that a construction change should be made, the Architect will issue a Proposal change Letter. B. The contractor will be instructed to submit his price proposal along with all required back-up information to the Architect. The submittal shall include separate breakdowns for general contract and subcontract work. C. The breakdowns shall show materials by quantities and unit prices, labor by crafts, hours and hourly rates with tax and insurance mark-ups shown separately. Equipment shall be shown by type, hours and rates. Overhead and profit shall be shown separately. D. The Contractor's proposed change quotations will be expeditiously reviewed by the Architect. conformance with the contract and the proposed change documents, as well as material, labor and equipment quantities and costs, and allowed mark-up percentages will be verified. Requests for additional time will also be evaluated. In case of differences, discrepancies, errors, etc., the Architect will Immediately take action to obtain necessary revisions or corrections to the quotation. E. When a price quotation has been Fonsidered acceptable, the Architect will forward his recommendations and all back-up information to the Owner. A recommendation either for or against the proposed change will accompany this submittal from the Architect. F. Any work done by Contractor not authorized by the Owner shall be subject to removal at the contractor's expense. 1.05. AUTHORIZATION FOR CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED A. Within a reasonable time, the Owner will notify the Architect, with a copy to the contractor, whether the change will be implemented. a SECTION "F" PASE 1 I. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR. ARCHITECTURAL YV©RK CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES SECTION "P" B. If the change is approved, with this letter will be authorization for the contractor to proceed and for the Architect to Issue a change Order. The change Order may be issued at the architect's discretion immediately or in con junction with several — other approved proposed changes if considered appropriate. End of Section — SECTION T" PAGE 2 r� GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL r4ORKSU15MiTTALS, SHOP DRAKN65, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES t SECTION "6" PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including 6eneral Conditions, Supplementary 6eneral Conditions, Special conditions and 6eneral Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 GENERAL A. The provisions of all paragraphs of Article 5 of the 6eneral Conditions specify the general responsibility of the Contractor of this section: S. coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of the work so that work will not be delayed by submittals. coordinate and sequence different categories of submittals for the same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed for coordination with another. No extension of time will be allowed because of failure to properly coordinate and sequence submittals. 1.05 SHOP DRAWIN65 A. In addition to the requirements of the 6eneral conditions the following applies: 1. Drawings shall be marked with the name of the project and numbered consecutively. Each detail and drawing shall give reference to appropriate sheet and detail number from contract drawings. Drawings shall be complete in every respect, bound in sets and accompanied by letter of transmittal listing numbers and dates of all drawings submitted. copies will be returned to the contractor after review. 2. Prior to Architects review, shop drawings shall be reviewed by the contractor and shall bear the contractor's stamp stating the drawings have been checked for conformance with the contract Documents, pending the Architect's review. Any drawings submitted without the contractor's stamp will not be considered. if shop drawings show variations from requirements of the Contract because of standard shop practice or other reason, the contractor shall make mention of such variation in the letter of transmittal. The contractor shali not. be relieved of responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even though such shop drawings have been reviewed. SECTION "6" PAGE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKSUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAlNINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES SECTION "G" 5. The shop drawings shall be prepared by skilled draftsmen and presented in a clear and thorough manner. Any shop drawings which are not complete or clearly delineated will be promptly rejected. 4. The contractor shall make corrections in the shop drawings as requested by the Architect and resubmit the requested number of corrected copies with reasonable promptness. S. Unless the corrections and changes requested by the Architect are deviations from the Architect's drawings and specifications, any time delay caused by correcting and resubmitting shop drawings shall be the responsibility of the contractor. 6. The Architect will retain 4 copies of all architectural shop drawings and 6 copies of all mechanical, electrical, structural and swimming pool shop drawings. The contractor shall submit as many additional copies of the shop drawings as required for the contractor's use. T. Maintain one set of approved shop drawings at the project site for reference by the Architect or others. 1.04 PROPUCT DATA A. Product date includes standard information on materials, products and systems; not specially prepared for this project, other than the designation of selections from among available choices printed therein. B. collect required data into one submittal for each unit of work or system; and mark each copy to show which choicesand options'are applicable to the protect. Include manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application and use; compliance with standards, application of labels and seals, notation of field measurements which have been checked, and special coordination requirements. Maintain one set of product data (for each submittal) at project site, available for reference by Architect or others. c. Do not submit product data, or allow its use on the project, until compliance with requirements of contract documents has been confirmed by contractor. submittal is for information and record, unless otherwise Indicated. D. Architect will retain 4 copies of product. Contractor shall submit as many additional copies of product data as required for the contractor's use. SECTION "G" PAGE 2 E GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR. ARCHITECTURAL 7NORKSUSMITTALS, SHOP VRA1NIN65, PRODUCT #BATA ANP SAMPLES SECTION 1.05 SAMPLES A. contractor shall submit samples requested by Specifications or by Architect in ample time for review prior to quantity fabrication, or in case of prefabricated items, prior to placing purchase order. B. Each sample shall have label indicating generic name of item, manufacturer's name and model number, brand name, supplier's name, subcontractor's name and project for which material is intended. G. contractor shall accompany each shipment of samples with transmittal referencing project for which intended, and list sample data enumerated above for each sample transmitted, and referencing samples to appropriate contract drawing sheet or to specification section. D. Approval of any sample will be only for characteristics or for uses named in such approval and for no other. Approval of a sample shall not be taken to change or modify any contract requirement. Men a material has been approved, no change in brand or make will be permitted. E. Architect, at his sole discretion, may return certain approved samples for use in the work. These shall be installed in good condition, suitably_ marked for identification. F. contractor shall submit two copies of color samples in same manner as for materiel samples. Architect will retain both copies of color samples. 6. Architect will retain one copy of each material sample submitted. H. Prepare samples to match the Architect's sample where so indicated. 1.06 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS LIST A. Orovide a complete list of names, addresses and telephone numbers of all subcontractors and suppliers employed on the project. 1.0'1 PROJECT RECORD VOCUMENTS (AS BUILTS) A. Provide to the Architect a complete set of blueline drawings on this project with all deviations from the plans noted. (Including all dimensions, service locations, etc.) '^ B. At completion of project, deliver record documents to Architect. C. Accompany each submittal with transmittal letter In duplicate, containing the following: date, project tile and number of each record doduments, certification in writing that each document, as submitted is complete and accurate and the signature SECTION "G" PA&E 5 1:. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL 1NORKSUSMITTALS, SHOP PRAWIN6S, PRODUCT DATA ANP SAMPLES SECTION "G" of Contractor or his authorized representative. 1.08 COMPLIANCE A. All equipment, materials, etc. used In the building shall fully comply and be in strict accordance with the released submittals on file in the Architect's office. PART 2 ` PRODUCTS (NOT: APPLICABLE) PARTS EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) End of Section SECTION "G" PAGE 4 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL NORM PROGRESS SCHEVULE i SECTION "H" PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including the General conditions, Supplementary General conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in the Section. . 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes. requirements for the preparation and submittal of construction progress schedules. 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Section "6" submittals 1.04 FORMAT A. Prepare schedules as a horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major portion of the work or operation, identifying first work day of each week. B. Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work. C. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions. D. sheet size: Minimum 22 X 1 *7 inches. 1.0$ CONTENT A. show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. 5. Identify work of separate phages and other logically grouped activities. C. if necessary for clarity, provide sub -schedules to define critical portions of entire schedule. D. show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of work completed, as of the first daV of each month. E. coordinate content with schedule of values as required in 5ect1oh "I". 1.06 REV151ON5 TO SCHEDULES A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion SECTION "H" PACGE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL Y40RK PROGRESS SCHEDULE SECTION "H" date of each activity. B. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. G. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on schedule Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect, including the effect of changes on schedules of separate contractors. 1.0? SUBMITTALS A. Submit initial schedules within 10 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. After review, resubmit required revised data within 1 O days. B. Submit revised Progress Schedule monthly with each Application for Payment. G. submit six copies to the Architect. 1.08 D15TRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to the job site, subcontractors, suppliers, and other concerned entities. S. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in Schedules. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 5 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) End of Section SECTION "H" PA67S 2 r." ` GENERAL. PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL JNORK 7 SCHEDULE OF VALUES SECTION "I" PART 1 GENERAL, 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, r" supplementary General Conditions, Special conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prior to the first application for payment contractor shall submit to the Architect, an expanded schedule of values which will define labor and material ,separately for each significant portion of the work to be performed. B. Upon request of the Architect, support the values with data which will substantiate their correctness. c. The schedule of Values, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.05 FORM ANO CONTENT OF 5CHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit schedule on AIA Document Gi05, Contractor's standard forms and automated printout will be considered for approval by Architect upon r contractors request. B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the Work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments r` during construction. c. Follow the table of contents of this Project Manual as the format for listing component items. .Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major section of the specifications. D. For each major line item list sub -values of major products or operations under the item. E. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down the value into: 1.The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. 2.The total installed value. F. Submit a subschedule for each separate stage of work specified. G. submit a subschedule of unit costs for Products specified under a unit cost SECTION NI" PASvE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL YYORK SCHEDULE OF VALUES SECTION "I" allowance. ' H. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total contract Sum. End of Section SECTION "I"GE 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS POR ARCHITECTURAL NORK QUALITY CONTROL SECTION "J° PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General conditions, supplementary General conditions, special conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. ouality assurance and control of installation. B. References. C. Field samples. D. Mock-up. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section V" - Reference standards B. section "G" - submittals, shop Drawings, Products Data and samples Co. section "L" - Testing Laboratory Services D. section "O° - Materials: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE - CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. B. comply fully with manufacturers instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. I D. comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the work ex4ept when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indlcate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. j" F. secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to ll withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. SECTION "J" PAGE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL Y40RK OUALITY CONTROL — SECTION "J" 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications sections for — review. B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the work. C. where field sample is specified in individual section to be removed, clear area after field sample has been accepted by the Architect. -' 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Assemble and erect specified items, with specifled attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. B. where mock-up is specified in individual sections to be removed, clear area after mock-up has been accepted by the Architect. 1.01 MANUFACTURERS, FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect s0 days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of the Architect. B. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified .staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructionsgiven to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' — written instructions. D. Submit report in triplicate within 50 days of observation to the Architect for review. PART 2. PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 5. EXECUTION — (Not Applicable) End of Section SECTION "J PAGE 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK COVES, SAFETY ANP INSPECTION SECTION "K" PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, Including General conditions, supplementary 6enerai conditions, special conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1 1.02 GORES E ORDINANCES E. A. Materials and construction shall conform with applicable requirements of the latest edition of the following documents: 1. The National Electric Code. 2. Uniform Plumbing code published by Texas Municipal League Plumbing Code. 8. The Rules and Regulations of the Board of Underwriters Laboratories. 4. Uniform Building Code 1 9 a 1 and Adopted City of Lubbock Amendments. S. Texas Department of Health and EPA on environmental hazards for asbestos and lead based paints for detection, removal and notification before removal (demolition). b. Occupational safety and Health Act. *7. All state, National Godes, Ordinances, Rules and Regulations not specifically mentioned above but which apply to the proposed construction. 8. City of Lubbock Health Department. q. In any case of conflict between any of the documents mentioned above, the highest requirements shall govern. No extras shall be allowed for any changes to make the work conform with the regulations of the above-mentioned documents; they shall be considered as completely included in the Contract Price. Nothing in these Plans and specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. 1.03 SAFETY PRtCAUTIONS A. Provide and maintain, until no longer required, all necessary safety measures to safeguard against personal injury and property damage. Give special attention to the following: Y r SECTION "K" PAGE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK CODES, SAFETY AND INSPECTION SECTION "K 1. Provide and maintain solid safety barriers around all openings and other hazardous areas with protective considerations to blind persons and paraplegics. 2. At all times, maintain pedestrian access and vehicular access, particularly for .- fire fighting vehicles. 5. Do not allow open flame operations. 4. Equip all power hand tools with ground fault interruption (G.F.L) protection. 5. store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. 6. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. -- I. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. 6. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti -pollution laws. 8. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site. 9. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains. 10. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways. 1.04 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy Of safety precautions during all hours of the construction duration. 1.05 FIRE PROTECTION A. Do not operate bitumen kettles inside the building. B. Provide metal canisters, with covers, for storage of paint oil or contaminated waste materials. C. Conduct welding or torch cutting operations only In incombustible areas. Take adequate precautions to prevent sparks from dropping on combustible materials. Keep a safety man with a fire extinguisher readily available at all times. D. Restrict storage of materials inside building to fireproof areas. SECTION "K" FA6E 2 it [ GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK r CODES, SAFETY AND INSPECTION x SECTION "K" E. Do not store gasoline, oil or other volatile liquids in the building. Bring small quantities into the building only as needed. F. in hazardous areas, post signs and enforce "no smoking" rules. 1.06 PERMITS ANP LAW5 A. The contractor shall arrange for the issuance of permits by the City of Lubbock, Texas. The contractor shall comply with all Federal, State and Municipal Laws, Codes and Ordinance$ applicable to the work of this contract and he shall also comply with all regulations of the National Board of Fire underwriters having jurisdiction, and he shall obtain and pay for' all permits required Jn connection with the execution of his work. The Architect shall be furnished with certified copies of ' I these permits if the Architect so requests. ~ B. If the above Laws, codes or Ordinances conflict with the contract Documents, then the laws, codes or ordinances shall govern instead of the Documents, except in such cases where the documents exceed them in quality of materials, or labor; then the C documents shall be followed. 1.09 INSPECTORS A. The Owner and the Owner's Representatives shall at all times have access to the work wherever It is in preparation or progress, and the contractor shall provide proper and safe facilities for such access and for inspection.. 1.06 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Materials and workmanship specified by reference to number, symbol or title of a specific standard such as commercial Standard, a Federal Specification, a trade association standard, or other similar standard, shall comply with requirements in latest revision thereof and with any amendment or supplement thereto In effect on the standard, except as modified herein, shall have full force and effect as though printed in the specifications. PART 2. PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART S. EXECUTION (Not Applicable) End of Section SECTION "K" PAGE 5 t GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK �.., TESTING LA 50RA►TORY SERVICES k SECTION "L" r, PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General conditions, Supplementary I General conditions, Special conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF r4ORK �,.., A. Testing shall be.conducted when the contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having Jurisdiction requires testing. . 7 1.05 TESTING COST A. The Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an Independent testing laboratory to perform specifieinspectionon and testing. B. Employment of a testing laboratory shall In no way relieve the Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of the contract Documents. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM E52a and ANSI/ASTM D5174. B. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the State of Texas. C. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. D. Testing Equipment: calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices for an accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards (N65) or accepted values of natural physical constants. 1.05 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Test samples of mixes submitted by tha Contractor. B. Provide qualified personnel at site. cooperate with Architect and contractor in performance of services. C. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards. SECTION "L" PAGE 1 .GENEKAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL Y40RK TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES .-- SECTION "L" D. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of contract Documents. E. Promptly notify Architect and contractor of observed irregularities or non conformance of Work or Products. F. Perform additional inspections and tests required by the Architect. 1.06 LABORATORY REPORTS A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit three copies of laboratory report the Architect, and to the contractor. B. Include: 1. Date Issued. 2. Project Title. 8. Name of Inspector. 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. S. Identification of product and specifications section. 6. Location of Project. "1. Type of Inspection. 6. Date of Test. _ 9. Results of tests and conformance with contract Documents. C,. When requested by the Architect; provide interpretation of test results. 1.01 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirement's of contract Documents. B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of the contractor. , D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.08 GONTRAGTOR NOTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall notify the approved testing laboratory when work. is ready for testing: B. The Contractor shall notify the Architect when testing is to be conducted. C. The Contractor shall notify the proper authorities when work is ready for testing, SECTION "L" PACvE 2 it CGENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL Y40RK TESTING LABORATORY SERVZES l SECTION "L" 1.0a FAILED TESTS A. In the event of a test reporting a failure for a speclfic portion of the work to meet specified requirements, the appropriate subcontractor for that portion of the work will bear the cost of the testing without reimbursement from the Owner. B. If any test sample fails to meet specification requirements: 1. Previous approval many be withdrawn and such material or equipment may be subject to removal and replacement by contractor at his expense with material or equipment meeting specification requirements. 2. architect may refuse consideration of further samples of same brand of make for testing. 5. at Owner's discretion, defective material and equipment may be permitted to remain in place subject to adjustment of contract price. 1.1 O CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. Neither the observations of the architect in the administration of the contract, nor inspections, tests or approvals by persons other than the contractor shall relieve the contractor from obligations to perform the Work in accordance with contract Documents. B. Deliver to laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. Co. cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. D. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage, and curing of test samples. E. Notify architect and laboratory,24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. 1.1 1 TEST REPORT COPIES A. The Testing Laboratory agency shall supply, as a part of the test costs, copies of all tests, reports and inspections to the following: 2 copies - owner 1 Copy - Architect SECTION "L"PRGE 3 f I: GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK TESTING LA50RATORY SERVICES -- SECTION "L" 5 copies - General Contractor 1- copy - consulting Structural Engineers S. The Contractor shall notify the Testing laboratory Agency of this requirement for all tests. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Foes not apply) PART 5 EXECUTION (noes not apply) End of Section SrECTION "L" PAOF- 4 i 6ENERA.L PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS G SECTION "M" PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing protection of the Work, and water control. r"' C. construction Facilities: access roads, parking, progress cleaning project signage, and temporary buildings. r► 1.05 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section "o"- Contract closeout: Final cleaning. 1.04 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Provide and pay for power service required from Utility source of contractors Choice. B. Power Service characteristics: 120/202 volt, three phase, four wire. C.. Provide power outlets for construction operations with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required s required. Provide flexible power chords as required. D. Provide main service disconnect and over current protection at convenient location in conformance with National Electrical Code. E. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. F. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools for every 2000 sq ft of active work area and at specific locations as required. SECTION "M° PAGE 9 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES ANP TEMPORARY CONTROLS -- SECTION "M" 2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.05 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft. 5. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. 0. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft H.I.P. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes P. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required _ E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.06 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Utilize permanent building heat plant, extend and supplement with temporary heat devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. 5. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and fliters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. 0. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction Is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications 1.01 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 1.06 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.09 TEMPORARY WATER VMKVICE SECTION "M" PA6E 2 100 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES ANP TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION "M" A. Provide, maintain and pay for suitable quality water service required for construction operations. S. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. 1.1 O . TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIE5 A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. S. Permanent building facilities shall not be used during construction operations. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition 1.11 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. B. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life. C. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.12 FENCING A. construction: contractor shall provide a commercial grade chain link fence for perimeter security of the facility. . S. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1..15 NiATER CONTROL. A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations .free of water Provide operate, and maintain pumping equipment. S. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion 1.14 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather -tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions end protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified .r- SECTION "M" PAGE 5 Fill I GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES ANP TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION °M" in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.1 5 PROTECTION OFINSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. _ B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity In immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas 1.16 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. ._ 1 .1'7 PROGRESS CLEANIN6 A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off-site at Intervals as required to maintain clean site 1.16 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Office: Weather -tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating cooling and ventilating SECTION "M" PAGE 4 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES ANP TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION "M" equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture drawing rack and drawing display table. 1.1 9 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities and materials as soon as permanent facilitles can be utilized. B. Remove underground Installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site.as indicated. G. Glean and repair damage caused by Installation or use of temporary work. V. Restore existing facilities used during constructlon to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to original condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 5 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) End of Section fi SECTION °M" PAGE 5 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL Y4ORK f� NOISE CONTROL F i. SECTION "N" PWT 1 GENERAL A. The general provisions of the Contract, Including the Uniform General Conditions, supplementary General Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specifled In this Section 1.02 NOISE CONTROL A. Because of the proximity of the Project to existing occupied outdoor spaces and neighboring businesses, the contractor Is required to follow and enforce construction procedures which will eliminate and avoid loud noises as much as possible. B. The contractor shall provide adequate muffling devices on all combustion engines and shall provide acoustic baffles for any noise -producing equipment or operations which prove to be objectionable or hazardous to the operation of the adjacent facilities. C,. The Architect shall be notified a minimum of ?2 hours prior to the start of any unusually noisy construction activity. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 8 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) End of section SECTION "N"PRGE 1 r GENERAL PROVISIONS'FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK a•- MATERIALS 4 SECTION "O" PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, 5peclal conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 UNAVAILABILITY OR LATE DELIVERIES A. contractor shall order and schedule delivery of materials in ample time to avoid delays in construction. If an item Is found to be unavailable, contractor shall notify Architect immediately to permit mutual selection of suitable substitute. If contractor fails to order materials in ample time to avoid delays in construction,, an approved material shall be substituted at no extra cost to the owner. Or. at the Architect's discretion, approval of a substitute will be given upon agreement by the Contractor to remove substituted material at later date agreeable to owner, and replace it at contractor's expense with material originally specified. Such approval shall be subject to the same terms as for "Substitutions". 1.05 MATERIAL TESTING A. Laboratory tests and Inspections, specified or required of material and finish articles incorporated in the work shall be made by bureaus, laboratories or agencies approved by the Architect. Reports will be submitted to the Architect or distributed as established at the preconstruction conference. cost of testing and inspections will be paid for by the contractor otherwise specified. 5. Contractor shall furnish promptly, without additional charge, all reasonable facilities, labor and materials necessary for safe, convenient inspection and tests required by the Architect. Inspection and tests will be performed In a manner not to delay work unnecessarily. Contractor will be charged with cost of extra. Inspection when material or work is not ready at time Inspection Is required. G. Test samples as Architect may deem necessary shall be procured from material or equipment delivered for use in the work. If any test sample fails to meet �- specification requirements: ` 1.10revious approval may be withdrawn and such material or equipment may be subject to removal and'replacement by contractor at'his expense with material or equipment meeting specification requirements. 2.Architect may refuse consideration of further samples of same brand of make i'- for testing. In any case, Contractor will pay cost of additional test of material for same usage; should second sample of same or like material also fail test, SECTION "O" PACSE 1 A GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL NORK MATERIALS SECTION "O" Contractor shall bear cost of all further testing until Architect's approval is granted. s.At owner's discretion, defective material and equipment may be permitted to remain in place subject to adjustment of contract price. 1.04 SPECIFIED ITEMS - SU55TITUTE5 A. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, the following applies: 1 x4henever catalog numbers and specified brands or trade names, followed.by the designation "or equal" are used in con junction with a designated material, product, thing or service mentioned In these specifications, they are used to establish the standards of quality and utility required. Substitutions which are' equal in quality _ and utility to those specified will be approved, subject to the following provisions: All substitutions must be approved by the Architect in writing. For this purpose the contractor shall submit to the Architect within s6 calendar days after _ recording of the Contract, a typewritten list containing a description of each proposed substitute item or material. Sufficient data, drawings, samples, literature or other detailed information which will demonstrate to the Architect that the proposed substitute is equal in quality and utility to the material specified _ shall be appended to this list. The Architect will approve, in writing, such proposed substitutions which are, in the Architect's opinion, equal In quality and utility to the Items specified. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications and the contractor shall be responsible at the contractor's own expense for any changes resulting from his proposed substitutions which affect other parts of the work. _ 2.Failure of the contractor to submit proposed substitutions for approval in the manner described and within the time prescribed shall be sufficient cause for disapproval' by the Architect of any substitutions otherwise proposed. S.Whenever catalog numbers and specified brands or trade names not followed by the designation "or equal" or used in con junction with a designated material, -` product, thing or service mentioned in these Specifications, no substitutions will be approved. 1.05 SU55TITUTIONS A. Substitutions of any materials other than those specifically called for shall be r submitted to the Architect for review. 1.06 ..ITEMS 5PEGIPIED-BY TRADE NAME A. Reference to items specified by trade name Is made as a basis of quality and r SEGTkON "O" PAC -M 2 F GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK ,., MATERIALS SECTION "O" Function. Equivalent items may be used in their stead, however, the right of '~ determining such quality shall remain with the Owner's Representative. The terms "similar to", "approved", or "or equal" or similar phrases shall be interpreted similarly. 1.01 LASE1.5 A. Manufacturer's or trade names together with model or serial designations, grade markings, fire ratings, etc. will be permitted and are required on certain components of the work. These items shall be placed in concealed, but accessible locations, and absolutely no labels advertising any manufacturer or trade name will be permitted on exposed portions of components without written authorization from the architect. 1.06 MANUFA 6TURER'5 DIRECTIONS A. All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, secured, used, cleaned and put in operation as recommended, directed or specified by the manufacturer. S. Where work is specified to be in accordance with product manufacturer's directions, the contractor shall procure such Information in sufficlent quantities to supply all involved parties. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Does not Apply) PART 5 EXECUTION (Does not ,apply) End of Section SECTION "O" PAGE g 4 i r GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK STARTING SYSTEMS SECTION "P„ PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, Including General Conditions, Supplementary General conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 5 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. r� B. Demonstration.and instructions. Co. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section ,,.1" - ouslity Control: Manufacturers field reports. B. section uo- - contract closeout Requirements: system operation and maintenance . data and extra materials. C. section 15 Testing, adjusting and Balancing. 1.04 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for startup of various equipment and systems. B. Notify the Architect seven days prior to start up of each item. C. verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. D. verity that tests, meter readings. and specified electrical characteristics agree with thoserequired by the equipment or system manufacturer. r, E. verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. r SECTION °P" PAGE 1 i° f GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL Y40KK STARTING SYSTEMS SECTION "P" F. Execute start up under supervision of responsible manufacturers'representative and Contractors, personnel in accordance with manufacturers instructions. G. When specified in individual specification sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system Installation prior to start up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400 that equipment or system has been properly installed and Is functioning correctly. 1.05 DEMON5TRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owners personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. 13. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other reasons. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed upon times, at equipment location. _ E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when needed for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. �. PART 2. PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 5. EXECUTION (Not Applicable) End of Section SECTION "P" PA0E- 2 is GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL. WORK CONTRACT CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS SECTION "0" PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special conditions and 6eneral Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 FINAL GLEANING A. In addition to the requirements of the 6eneral conditions, the following shall apply: 1. Final cleaning shall include all sweeping, dusting, vacuuming, dry and wet mopping, polishing, buffing and other operations necessary, including supplies and equipment required. Final cleaning includes the removal of all temporary tape, wrappings, coatings, labels and similar items. 2. Surfaces, recesses, enclosures, etc, shall be cleaned as necessary to leave the Work in a condition ready for immediate occupancy by the. Owner. S. Hose down and scrub all new and existing concrete and asphalt paving and walks affected by the work. 4. All debris shall become the property of the contractor and disposed of off-site unless otherwise specified. S. The contractor shall promptly remove from the building, lot, sidewalks and streets all rubbish and dirt resulting from the work performed under the Contract. At the completion of the work, the contractor shall completely clean the areas in which work has been done, including areas used for access to the construction area. The contractor shall clean all items, including glass, and leave the building room clean and ready for occupancy. construction debris shall be removed from the site. 1.02 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. The following related requirements are specified elsewhere: 1.6eneral conditions and supplementary 6eneral Conditions. 2. Shop Drawings, Product Data and samples. S. Operations and Maintenance Data. SECTION -0" PA 67E '1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL INORK CONTRACT CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS SECTION "Q" S. Maintenance of documents: 1. The Contractor shall maintain at the jobsite one copy of the following: Contract Drawings, Written Specifications, Addenda, Reviewed Shop Drawings, Change orders, Other Modifications to the Contract and Field Test Reports. 2. The Contractor shall store the documents in a temporary field office, apart from the other documents used for construction. S. The Contractor shall provide necessary files and racks for the storage of the documents. 4. The Contractor shall not use the record documents for construction purposes. S. The contractor shall make the record documents available at all times for inspection by the Architect and the Owner. C. Recording: 1. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD 2. Keep record documents current. Update record documents a minimum of once every two weeks. 5. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been _ recorded. 4. contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction: a. Location of internal utilities concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features of structures, If significantly different than that shown on the Drawings. b. Field changes of dimensions and details. c, changes made by change Order or Field Order. d. Details not on the original contract Drawings. - 5.5pecifications.and Addenda: Legibly mark each section to record: a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number of each product and item of equipment actually installed._ SECTION "Q" PAGE 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL kNORK CONTRACT CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS SECTION "0" b. Changes made by change Order or Field Order. c. other items or procedures not originally specified. D. As -Built Drawings: Poo 1. Upon completion of construction, the contractor shall provide the Architect with a clean, complete set of prints, showing all deviations from, additions to or F changes In the contract Drawings. The -contractor shall be responsible for the daily notation on this set showing all changes made each day. Architectural changes shall be noted as well as structural, mechanical and electrical changes. E. Equipment Manuals: 1. The Contractor shall provide the Architect with all directions, diagrams, operating manuals, parts lists, preventative maintenance schedules, etc. as specified in the various sections. 1.05 FINAL INSPECTION A. Prior to Final Payment: 1. The Contractor shall provide maintenance information and operation instructions for equipment and systems provided. B. Operation Manuals and Equipment Data: 1. Prepare operating and maintenance instructions for equipment particularly Mechanical and electrical, that will require adjustment, servicing or attention for Its proper operation. Provide following data bound in a neat brochure: a. Approved fixture brochures, wiring diagrams and control diagrams. b. Repair parts lists of major equipment items Including names, addresses and telephone numbers of local suppliers. c. Valve tag charts and diagrams. d. List of products incorporated in the Work, referenced to Specification Section, if other than the product speclfled. C. Approval: 1. Submit two copies of Instructions to Architect for review and approval, one copy SECTION "Q^ 1, PAGE S 1 f &ENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK CONTRACT CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS - SECTION "Q of which shall be returned to the contractor approved or with instructions for changes. After approval, submit two copies of instructions covering equipment to Architect, who will forward them to the Owner for the owner's information and use. P. Operation Manual Service Index: 1. As an Appendix to the manual, provide a listing of names, addresses and telephone numbers of companies servicing installed equipment on a 24 hour basis. E. Operation Instruction: 1. After submission of above mentioned written instructions, the contractor shall furnish competent operation engineer or engineers at such time or times as directed by the Architect to meet with the owner or the Owner's representatives, to fully explain the instructions and to demonstrate and fully familiarize the Owner with the installed equipment and phases of its operation and maintenance. The amount of time to be devoted to instructions shall be reasonable and consistent with the size of the installation and its complexity. instructions shall be adequate to the extent that the Owner's personnel may proceed with normal operations in a safe and efficient manner. F. submittal requirements for construction contract Final Payment (Three sets Required): 1. certificate of substantial completion (AIA Form G*704). 2. certifleate of Punch list completion (Architect's letterhead with an attached punch list). S. Request for Final Payment. 4. consent of surety company for Final Payment. S. change order if required (attach supporting material and change letters). G. In addition to the above submittal requirements, the following information is required for contract completion and closeout (Three sets Required): 1. copies of all Addenda and Negotiated changes. 2. Mechanical, Electrical and controls submittals literature. S. Mechanloal, Eleztrical and controls Maintenance, Operating and Parts Manuals. SECTION "0" PAGE 4 GENER-AL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK CONTRACT CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS SECTION "0" 4. All Narranties, Guarantees and Bonds. 1.04 A5BE5TO5 AND LEAD FREE MATERIAL STATEMENT A. The contractor shall provide a letter or certificate stating that all materials used In this construction project contain ,No,, asbestos or lead based materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 5 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) End of section SECTION "Q" PA67E 5 6ENERA<L PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK #,.. OPERATiN6 ACNP MAINTENANCE VA.TA SECTION "R" PART 1 GENERAL Flo E 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including 6enerai Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 GENERAL A. Compile Manufacturer's Directions and Manuals, Product Data and related k information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the contract. P' 1. Furnish operating and maintenance data as specified in other pertinent sections t of Specifications. T' S. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of , equipment and systems. •• 1.05FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. S. Provide indexed tabs,fiy-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment. Provide typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. C. Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION5". D. Bind in Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. E. when multiple binders are used, correlate the date into related consistent groupings. 1.04 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in a systematic order. 1.. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the . volume, i, SECTION "R° rk I PA►6E 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK OPERATING ANP MAINTENANCE VAtTA. SECTION "R„ S. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontractor or installer. b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. Cl. Identify the area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacements. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract documents. B. Product Data: Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. Annotate each sheet to: 1. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. 2. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. s. Delete references to inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data with drawings as'necessary to clearly illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, and control and flow diagrams. 1. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 2. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. _ D. iNritten text, as required to supplement product data for the particular Installation. -- 1.0rganize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. E. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: !.Proper procedures in the event of failure. 2. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. 1.05 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES SECTION "R" PAGE 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS F -OR ARCHITECTURAL rAORK OPERATING ANP MAINTENANCE VATA SECTION "R" R. submit two copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finisheg: i 1. Manufacturers data, giving full information on products. I*" 2. instructions for care and maintenance. 1.06 MANUAL FOR. EQUIPMENT AN17 SYSTEM A. Submit two copies of complete manual in final form. t B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. i7e5�riptlon of unit and component parts. 2. operating procedures. S. Maintenance Procedures. 4. Servicing and lubrication schedule S. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. ,.� 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. i "T. original manufacturer's parts list, Illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. 6. hs -installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. Each contractor's coordination drawings. F t 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 1 1. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. r 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. description of system and component parts. 2. Circuit directories of panelboards. E 5. As -installed color coded wiring diagrams. SECTION "R" PAGE S it GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORK OPERATING ANP MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION "R" 4. operating procedures. S. Maintenance procedures. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. D. Prepare and include additional date when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. E. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance date: The respective sections of Specifications. 1.07 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit one copy of completed data in final form fifteen days prior to final inspection or acceptance. 1. Copw will be returned after final inspection or acceptance, with aomment5. B. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form 10 days after final inspection or acceptance. 1.06 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fuliw instruct owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems. -- S. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. C. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. 1.09 ASBE5TO5 AND LEAD FREE MATERIAL 5TATEMENT A. The Contractor shall provide a letter or certificate stating that all materials used in this construction project contain "NO" asbestos or lead based materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) SECTION "R" PAGE 4 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ARCHITECTURAL ^ORK OPERATING ANP MAINTENANCE VA.TA SECTION "R" PART 5 EXECUTION (Not AppliC.able) End of Section SECTION "R" PAGE P BU11.171N6 17EMOLITION SECTION 02060 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, Including General Conditions, Supplementary 6enerai Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Demolition of designated structures and removal of materials from the site. B. Demolition and removal of foundations and Slabs on grade. C. Gap and identify exposed utilities to remain. D. Disconnecting, capping and removal of Identified utilities. E. Removal of underground piping. 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Section 02100 - Site Clearing: Clearing outside periphery of structures. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of the contract. 5. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust and erosion control and disposal 5. obtain required permits from authorities. G. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. D. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks or hydrants without permits and 5 day notlflcation to the Owner. E. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials. SECTION 02060 PA&E 1 BUILDING DEMOLITION SECTION 02060 1.06 SEOUENCING A. Sequence work with affected other trades and coordinate. 1.0'1 SCHEDULING A. schedule work with all affected trades. B. Schedule work to precede site excavation work. C. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) ' PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices as required. B. Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances and structures which are not to be demolished. 0. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring as required. D. Sprinkle work with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water connections for this purpose as required and maintain adherence to OSHA erosion, runoff and — dust control measures. 5.02 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures. B. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses. r Maintain protected egress and access at all times. G. Obtain written permission from adjacent property Owners when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. D. Sprinkle work with water to minimize dust. Provide necessary connections to achieve this purpose. SECTION 02060 1 1 PAGE 2 bUILDING DEMOLITION SECTION 02060 5.03 DEMOLITION , A. Disconnect, cap or remove designated utilities within demolition areas. B. Remove foundation walls and footings beyond area of new construction. G. Remove concrete slabs on grade. D. Rough grade and compacted areas affected by demolition to maintain site grades and contours. E. Remove demolished materials from site. F. Do not burn or bury materials on site.- Leave site in clean condition. G. Remove temporary work. H. Do not place demolished materials or debris in city of Lubbock garbage containers or receptacles. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. coordinate items to be retained by the Owner; deliver to location designated by the Owner. End of section SECTION 02060 PA6E 5 b ° MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 02012 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, l Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The extent of demolition work Is shown and noted on the Drawings and specified herein. 5. Coordinate work of trades and schedule elements of alterations and renovation �., work by procedures and methods herein specified to expedite completion of work. C. Gap and identify exposed utilities. D. Patch floors where walls or utilities have been removed. E. In addition to that specifically shown; cut, move or remove items necessary to T` provide access or to allow alterations and new work to proceed. Include such . items as: 1.Repair or removal of hazardous or unsanitary conditions. 2.Removal of unsuitable or extraneous materials not marked for salvage, such as ,.� rotted wood, rusted metals and deteriorated concrete. S.Cieaning of surfaces, and removal of surface finishes as needed to install new work and finishes. l F. Patch, repair and refinish existing items to remain, to the specified condition for each material.. Provide a workmanlike transition to adjacent new items of construction. r 1.03 Ri=LATED !^CORK A. Division 15: Mechanical E Plumbing. i,. 5. Division 16: Electrical. i 1.04 PROTECTION A. Do not interfere with use of adjac-ent areas. Maintain free and safe passage to area of work and In public corridors adjacent to area'of work. E k. SECTION 020'7 2 PAC -7E 1 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMOVELING SECTION 02012 5. Prevent movement or settlement of structure(s). Provide and place bracing or shoring and be responsible for safety and support of structure. Assume liability for such movement, settlement, damage or injury. G. Cease operations and notify the Architect immediately, if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to properly support structure. Do not resume operations until safety is restored. D. Provide, erect and maintain barricades, lighting, and guardrails as required by applicable regulatory advisory to protect occupants of building and workers. { E. Protect existing finishes, equipment, and adjacent work which is scheduled to remain. Protect existing and new work from weather and extremes of temperature. 1.Maintain existing interior work above 60 degrees F. 2.Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and humidity control as needed to prevent damage to remaining existing work and to new work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Assign the work of moving, removal, cutting and patching to trades qualified to perform the work in a manner to cause the least damage to each type of work, and provide a means of returning surfaces to the appearance of new work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Verify with the Architect before moving any debris or material from the site. B. Relics and antiques (i.e. Cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques, and tablets) and similar objects remain the property of the Owner. Notify Architect prior to removal and obtain acceptance regarding method of removal. C. carefully remove, store and protect for reinstallation of Items indicated to be reinstalled on the plans. D. Carefully remove the materials and equipment, indicated on the pians to be removed and be retained by the Owner. Deliver and store where directed by the Architect. E. Salvage sufficient quantities of cut or removed material to replace damaged work or existing construction when material Is not readily obtainable on current market. SECTION 020'7 2 PA67E 2 ` MINOR VEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 02012 F. Do not incorporate salvaged or used material in new construction without the permission of the Architect, except where it is indicated on the Drawings that salvaged or existing materials are to be reused. G. Floor patch materials shall be equal to Camps Latex Repair Kit to level floors or Pavecrete to patch holes. ' 2.02 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING A. Provide same products of types of construction as that in existing structure as needed to patch, extend or match existing work. Generally the contract Documents will not define products or standards of workmanship present' in existing construction. The contractor shall determine products by inspection and necessary testing. F^ B. The presence of a product, finish, or type of construction requires that patching, extending or matching shall be performed as necessary to make the work complete and consistent to Identical standards of quality. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. carry out demolition work to cause as little inconvenience to adjacent occupied I building areas as possible. B. when demolition work creates an excess amount of dust, provide protection r around the source to contain the dust and prevent it from entering spaces that the public uses or any other spaces that are used for any purpose other than this construction pro jest. rc. Notify the Architect at least 12 hours before concrete slab drilling or cutting. Schedule all construction activities that involve extreme vibration and noise with the Architect. IL 8.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner as required to accommodate new work. E Protect existing foundations, walls, supporting structural members, openings, and utilities that remain. B. Perform demolition in accordance with applicable authorities having jurisdiction. Co. Perform cutting and removal work to remove minimum materials necessary, and in a manner to avoid damage to adjacent work. cut surfaces such as masonry, tile, plaster or metal by methods designed to terminate surfaces in a straight line at a SECTION 02012 PAGE 5 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMOVELING SECTION 02072 natural point of division. D. Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of matching existing quality workmanship. ouality of patched or extended work shall not be less than that specified for new work. E. Patch and replace any portion of an existing finished surface which is found to be damaged, lifted, discolored, or shows other imperfections with matching material. 1.Provide adequate support of substrates prior to patching a finish. 2.Kefinish patched portions of painted or coated surfaces in a manner to produce a uniform color and texture over the entire surface. S.When existing surface finish conditions cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to the nearest Intersections. P. When new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make a smooth and workmanlike transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work In -- texture and appearance so that the patch or transition is invisible at a distance of five feet. When finished surfaces are cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface In a neat manner along a straight line as a natural line of division, and provide trim appropriate to finished surface. G. Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required, at no cost to the _ owner. H. Burning of materials on site is not permitted. I. Remove from site, contaminated, vermin -infested or dangerous materials encountered and -dispose of by safe means Boas not to endanger health of -- workers and public. J. Remove tools and equipment .from site upon completion of work. Leave site in a condition acceptable to the Architect. K. Remove debris daily from the site. L. Glean Owner occupied areas daily. M. Glean spillage, overspray, and heavy collections of dust in owner occupied areas Immediately. N. At completion of work of each trade, clean area and make surfaces ready for work of successive trades. SECTION 020'7 2 PAGE 4 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 02012 3.03 FLOOR PATCHING A. Repair all floors where walls, utilities or other items are removed. S. Fill all holes in concrete floor slab with fine sand/cement mixture with bonding agent, equal to pavecrete. G. All floor patching shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Architect and to the finish flooring contractors. End of Section SECTION 020072 PASvE 5 SITE CLEARINCG f: SECTION 02100 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. . The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specif led In this section. 1.02 NIORK INCLUDED A. Remove surface debris. B. Remove paving and sidewalks as shown on the Drawings and coordination of utility PART 2 PROPUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. verify that existing plant life designated to remain is tagged or Identified. r. SECTION 02100P,a. SE 1 I salvage or relocation. C. Gap and identify exposed utilities. D. Removal of site plant life, grass, shrubs and associated root systems. r E. Top soil excavation and removal of all demolished materials and surplus materials from the site. l 1.05 RELATED NIORK A. Section 02060 - Building Demolition. k B. Section 02200 - Earthwork 1.04 KE6ULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for disposal of debris. ! B. coordinate clearing rlork with utility companies. PART 2 PROPUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. verify that existing plant life designated to remain is tagged or Identified. r. SECTION 02100P,a. SE 1 I SITE CLEAKING SECTION 02100 3.02 PROTECTION A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain form damage. B. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain as final landscaping. C. Protect existing structures from damage or displacement. 3.03 CLEARING A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work. B. Remove all items within the marked area as indicated on the Drawings, and clear all undergrowth or deadwood from site excavations. 3.04 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re -landscaped, or re- graded. B. Stockpile in area designated by the owner on site to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Protect from erosion. Remove excess topsoil not being reused from site. C. Do not excavate wet topsoil. 3.05 REMOVAL A. Remove debris, rock and extracted plant life from the site. End of Section SECTION 02100 PAGE 2 i EARTHWORK SECTION 02200 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special_ Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A The extent of earthwork is shown on drawings. B. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs and walks Is included as part of this work. C. Backfilling of trenches within building lines is included as part of this work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. r 1. Owner will engage a soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations. The testing laboratory shall comply with the requirements of ASTM 03'740, Evaluation of k^ Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil or Rock Used In Engineering Design and Construction. ,.� 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Submit following reports directly to Architect from the testing services, with copies to Contractor and Engineer. 2. Test reports on existing or borrow material for each type of soil encountered. a. Atterberg Limits b. Linear Shrinkage c. Optimum moisture/maximum dry density curve S. Field density test reports of subgrades and compacted fills. Reports shall indicate soil type or change of soil if any other is used. �..SECTION 02200 r G PAGE 1 EARTHWORK SECTION 02200 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Site Information 1. A subsurface soils investigation at the site has not been performed. Test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by the contractor at no additional cost to the'Owner. B. Existing utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. cooperate with owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptabletemporary utility services have been provided. Co. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted. D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. 1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 245*7 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, GG, SG, CL, SM, SW and SP. SECTION 02200 PAGE 2 — MARTHWORK SECTION 02200 B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM V 246 soil classification groups CH, ML, MH, OL, OH, and PT. c. Topsoil shall be fertile, natural soil of loamy character, free of clay lumps, stones and debris. Z7. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter. Fill materials shall have a liquid limit between 4 and 55 and the plasticity index shall be between 4 and 12. PARTS EXECUTION 5.01 EXCAVATION A. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing required finish grade elevations. B. Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock excavation or unauthorized excavation. C. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. i, unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense. V. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized ` excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Architect. E. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. ,. SECTION 02200 PAGvE 5 EARTHWORK SECTION 02 200 .F. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect who will make an inspection of conditions. 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. G. Stability of Excavations 1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. H. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. i. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. SECTION 02 200 PAC -7E 4 7 EARTHWORK SECTION 02200 J. Excavation for Structures 1. conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 O foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection. 2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. K. Excavation for Trenches 1 . Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be Installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Garry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups. S. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required elevation and backfill with a 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. 4. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe. 5. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 15" of column or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footings. 6. concrete is specifled in Division 5. 17. Do not backfill trenches until tests and Inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. L. cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 55 degrees F. (1 degree G.) SECTION 02200 r PACSE 5 EARTH^ORK SECTION 02 200 8.02 COMPACTION A. General: control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classiflcation. B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM 0 6q8 (Standard Proctor); and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM 0 204q, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship. 1. Structures: compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at q5% maximum dry density or QOl/a relative dry density. 2. Building slabs and steps: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at q5% maximum dry density or q01110 relative dry' density. S. Lawn or unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or-fIll `material at q0% maximum dry density. 4. Walkways: compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill materials at 415% maximum dry density or q0% relative dry density. C. Moisture control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. 2. soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by dicing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. SECTION 02200 PAGE 6 EARTH104ORK SECTION 02200 3.03 SRCKFILL AND FILL A. General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below. 1. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 2. under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. s. Under walks and steps use satisfactoryexe avated or borrow material, or combination of both. 4. Under building slabs, use satisfactory borrow material. 8. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities. S. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of trash and debris. G. Ground Surface Preparation 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 2. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified i-* under "Compaction" for particular area classification,break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. i,. SECTION 02200 G , PAGE i EARTHkNORK SECTION 02200 D. Placement and compaction Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" In loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. 2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. S. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. 8.04 GRADING A. General: 'Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain —' away from structures and to prevent ponding. Co. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations. ! 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.1 O foot above or below required subgrade elevation. V. Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specifled, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of Ys" when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. E. compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification. SECTION 02200 PAGE 5 6 -- I EARTHWORK SECTION 02200 5.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control Testing During Construction 1. Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed. 2. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand Gone Method) or ASTM D 2 161 (Rubber Balloon Method), or ASTM D 2 Q 22, (Nuclear Gauge Method) as applicable. r.., B. Building slab subgrade 1. Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. of building slab, but in no case less than S tests. to each compacted j' fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab, but in no case less than 5 tests. Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the previous compacted layer has been tested and approved by the testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer. G. If, in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, I subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide k additional compaction and testing at no additional expense. 5.06 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of Graded Areas 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re -shape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. r., SECTION 02200 PAGE a EARTHNtORK SECTION 02200 3.01 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND YVASTE MATERIALS A. Removal from Owner's Property 1. Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash and debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property. End of Section This Section Prepared by RTR Engineers, -Inc.. SECTION 02200 PIkGE 10 EXCAVATION, TRENCH AND BACKFILL SECTION 02222 PAGE 1 PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Trench and backfill for' underground utilities. S. Excavate for foundations, slabs and incidentals. C. Remove debris and surplus excavated material from site. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 02 200: Earthwork . S. Section 0351 O: Concrete C. Section 15: Mechanical and Plumbing Systems D. Division 16: Electrical Systems PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sand for under concrete walks, slabs, foundations and utilities. Clean natural river or bank sand; free from silt, clay, loam friable or soluble materials, and organ4c matter; with grading requirements the same as specified for the fine aggregate used for concrete. see Section 0531 O. S. Backfill: sub -soil free from alkali, salt, petroleum products, roots, rocks larger than 5 inches in diameter and building debris. PART 5. EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. Protect lawns from damage, rake clean after work Is complete. S. Protect existing structures, roads, sidewalks and paving against damage from equipment and vehicular or foot traffic. SECTION 02222 PAGE 1 EXCAVATION, TRENCH ANP BACKFILL SECTION 02222 PAGE 2 G. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, or other methods as required to prevent loose dirt from falling into excavations. D. Maintain existing utility lines which pass through work area. Sleeve lines that pass through the foundation. E. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines rerouted or extend. F. Notify the Architect of unexpected sub -surface conditions and discontinue work in area until the proper authority provides notification to resume work. 6. &rade around excavations to prevent surface water runoff into excavated areas. 5.02 TRENCHING FOR UTILITIES A. Trench for electrical service. Ensure trenching does not Interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundations. _ S. Trenches shall be excavated so as to provide a minimum depth of cover of 5o Inches, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Architect or Engineer. 5.05 EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATIONS, SLA55 AND INCIDENTALS A. Excavate subsoil in accordance with lines and levels required for construction of the work, including space for forms, bracing and shoring. B. Do additional excavations only by written authorization of the Architect. Unauthorized excavation shall be corrected as directed by the Architect or Owner at no cost to the Owner. G. Hand trim excavations and leave free from loose or organic matter. D. Excavations are not to interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundation. 5.04 BACKFILLIN& A. Do not start backfilling until services have been inspected. B. Ensure areas to be backfilled, including trenches, are free of building debris and water. SECTION 02222 PAGE 2 EXCAVATION, TRENCH ANV BACKFILL SECTION 02 2 2 2 PAGE 5 G. Piave and compact fill materials In continuous Iayers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth. Use a method so as not to disturb or damage services. D. Backfill with sub -soil areas at walks to receive concrete slabs to sand bed level and compact. Fill with sand to concrete slab level. Smooth and level top surface of sand fill. E. Backfill electric utility line trenches with sand to cover conduit. Fill remainder of trenches with sub -soil and compact. 5.05 SURPLUS MATERIALS A. Remove surplus backfill materials from site. B. Remove all broken concrete, trash and construction debris from the site. End of Section SECTION 02222 PAGE 5 wooer FeKces SECTION 02446 PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fence framework, pickets and accessories. t B. Excavation for post bases and concrete foundation for posts. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 0331 O - concrete Work: Concrete anchorage for posts. 1.04 REFERENCES A. AN51/A5TM A 125 -Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) coatings on Iron and Steel Products. S. ASTM A 1 20 -Pipe, steel, Slack and Hot -Dipped zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. C. A5TM A 153 -Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. D. A5TM A56a-5teel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot -Roiled Sheet and strip commercial Quality. E. chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLEW -Product Manual. F. F5 RR -F-1 &11 -Fenalng, Wire and Post Metal (and Gates, Chain Link fence Fabric, and Accessories). 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 1. Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, and schedule of components. 2. Provide data on pickets, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware. S. Manufacturer's Installation Instruction: Indicate installation requirements. SECTION 02446 PAGE 1 HOOP FENCES SECTION 02446 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer 1. Company specializing in manufacturing ache products specified In this Section �. with a minimum of five years experience. 5 . Installer 1 Perform work in accordance with RN51/A5TM F569. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. verify that field measurements are as indicated on the shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTA5LE MANUFACTURERS A. United States Steel 5. C F 4 1 Steel Corporation C. Anchor Fence, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. beneral: Conform to CLFMI Product Manual. 5. wood Fencing: r 1. Pickets Shall be western Red Cedar 1 x4 clear, square cut top edge. 2., wood rails shall be 2x5 Western Red Cedar. C. Posts — 1. beneral: HOt-dip galvanized, complying with ASTM A 120. 2. Line Posts: 1-9/8 inch outside diameter pipe weighing at least 2.8 pounds per linear foot. S. End and Corner Posts: 5- inch O. V. pipe weighing 5.9 Q pounds per linear foot. D. Braces and Truss Rods: Braces at end and corner posts shall be the same material as the top rail with suitable connections. Tru55bars 5/8 -inch round rod, galvanized. E. Nails Shall be galvanized, ring shank type. SF,CTION 02446 PAGE 2 N1OOP FENCES SECTION 02446 PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 I145TALLATION A. Install framework, pickets and accessories in accordance with ANSI/ASTM F56*7 and manufacturers recommendations. 5. ` set intermediate and terminal posts plumb, in concrete footings as shown on the plans. slope top of concrete for water runoff. G, 5race each corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail, one bay,from gate posts . -0. Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 6 -inch -long rail sleeves. E. Position bottom of pickets one ( 1) Inch above finished grade. F. Fasten pickets to top rail, line posts and braces as recommended by manufacturer. C,. Post spacing not to exceed &-0" on center. 5.02 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 Inch. B.- Maximum Offset from True Position: one inch. End of Section SECTION 02446 PAGE 5 CONCRETE N ALKS SECTION 02514 PART 6ENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, supplementary General Conditions, Speclal Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of concrete walks is shown on the Drawings. B. comply with applicable requirement of section oss 1 O, Concrete Work, for materials, testing, mixing, placing and curing, except as herein specified otherwise. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Grade control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Forms 1. Either steel or wood, of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use forms that are straight and free of distortion and defects. Bent, twisted, split or defective form materials are not permitted. 2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. S. Coat forms with anon -staining, clear, paraffin base form oil that will not discolor or otherwise deface the surface of the concrete. B. Concrete: comply with applicable requirement of section 0551 O, concrete Work, for concrete materials. concrete mix shall not be the same as used for building slabs and foundations. Exterior concrete shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 5000 psi at 28 days and shall contain six (6) sacks (564 lbs.) of cement per cubic yard of concrete, 6 percent plus or minus 1 �,. SECTION 02514 PA&E 1 CONCRETE WALKS SECTION 02514 percent of entrained air, coarse aggregate 1 " or smaller and shall be poured with a slump of 5" plus or minus 1 ". G. Expansion .joints: Premolded cane f liver saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, Ys thickness by depth of slab. At curbs and gutters, _ furnish special section to meet local curb and gutter specifications. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove all loose material from the uniformly compacted subbase surface Immediately before placing concrete. 5.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Set forms to the required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient lengths of forms to allow continuous progress of the work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Tops of walks shall slope at least 1 /8" per foot. 5. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerances: 1. Top of form units: Not more than 1 /8" in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face: Longitudinal axis, not more than 1 /4" in 1 O feet. C. Clean forms after each use, and coat with form oil as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 5.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General 1 Comply with the requirements of Section 055 10, Concrete Work, for ^ mixing and placing concrete, and as herein specified. SECTION 02514 PACGE 2 7 C i CONCRETE NALKS SECTION 02514 2. Do not place aoncrete until subgrade and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subgrade as required to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete Is placed. 00 not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they have been brought to the required grade and alignment. 5. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of the mix, and with as little rehandling as possible. consolidate concrete along the face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies or side forms. use only square -faced shovels for hand -spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. Do not over vibrate. 4. ceposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than A hour, plane a construction joint. sections less than 15 feet in length between transverse joints will not be permitted. Remove such seations if directed by the Architect. 5.04 JOINTS A. General: construct expansion, weakened -plane (contraction), and construction joints true -to -line with face perpendicular to surface of the concrete, unless otherwise shown. construct transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise shown. B. Weakened -Plane (contraction) Joints: Provide weakened -plane (eontreation) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on the drawings. construct weakened -plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1 /4 concrete thickness as follows: c. Tooled Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. ±^ V. construation Joints: Place construction joints at the end of all pours and at locations where placement operations are stopped for a period of more than Yz hour, except where such pour terminates at expansion joints. 1. construct joints as shown, or if not shown, use standard metal keyway l section forms. �., SECTION 02514 PAGE 5 1. CONCRETE kNALKS SECTION 02514 E. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, Inlets, structures, walks and other fixed objects. 1. Expansion joints shall be at 20 feet o.c., unless otherwise shown. 2. Extend joint fillers full -width and depth of joint, and not less than Y:" or more than 1 " below finished surface. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for the full width being placed, wherever possible. Mere more than one length is required, face or clip joint filler sections together. Form top edge of filler to conform to top profile of concrete. _ 8. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after both sides of joint are placed. 8.05 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Finishes: unless indicated otherwise, items of concrete to be finished as follows: 1. All sidewalks, concrete aprons and porches shall have float finish, + brushed as directed to provide non -slip finish. B. The following finishing procedures shall be observed: �- 1. After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth the surface by screeding and floating. Do not use "jitterbugs". use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust the floating to compact the surface and produce a uniform mixture. 2. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 foot straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous, smooth finish. s. Work edges of slabs and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to Ys" radius, unless otherwise shown. Eliminate any tool marks on concrete surface. SECTION 02514 PAGE 4 — i""' i CONCRETE NAl.KS n SECTION 02514 4. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared complete surface finishing as follows: a. Broom Finish: Broom finish, by drawing a fine broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to the Architect. b. On inclining slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with a stiff -bristled broom. End of Section This section Prepared by RTF?. Engineers, Inc. ,., SECTION 02514 PAGE 5 5.06 CURING A. Protect and cure finished concrete walks, complying with the applicable requirements of section 055 10, concrete Work. Use moist -curing methods whenever possible for first 24 hours then apply curing compound. t' - f 5.01 REPAIRS ANO PROTECTIONS A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect. J B. Grill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory with cement concrete bonded to pavement with pavement areas portland polysulphide-epoxy binder, or with polysulphide resin grout, complying with FS MMM -G-6505 GANG. c. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. O. sweep concrete walks free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material just prior to final Inspection. End of Section This section Prepared by RTF?. Engineers, Inc. ,., SECTION 02514 PAGE 5 r f EXPANSION ANP CONTRACTION JOINTS SECTION 05251' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, 5peclel conditions and General Re4ulrement5 (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 NtORK INCLUDED A. Forming integral contraction and control joints in concrete. B. Visually concealing expansion joints in concrete. 1.05 RELATED NIORK A. Section 0551 O - Concrete Yiork. B. Section 05505 -Expansion Joint Assemblies G. Section 017 a00 - Caulking and Sealants. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM 0a94 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete !Bituminous Type). 1.05 5U5MITTAL5 A. shop Drawings 1. Submit manufacturer's installation Instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INTEGRAL JOINT MATERIALS A. Formed Construction Joints: Galvanized steel, tongue and groove type, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough; knockout holes spaced at & inches O.G., ribbed steel spikes with tongue to -fit top screed edge. B. Joint Filler: ANSI/ASTM D9 a4, bituminous impregnated fiberboard; of sizes det4iled. SECTION 05251 PA&Z 1 EXPANSION ANP CONTRACTION JOINTS - SECTION 05251 2.02 SEALANTS A. Sealant and Primer: Specified in section 0'7 aoo. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Locate and form expansion control and contraction joints. B. Place formed construction j Dints in floor slab checkered board pattern placement sequence. set top screed to required elevations. Secure to resist movement of wet concrete. C. Install joint cover anchorage in accordance with manufacturers instructions. D. Install joint fillers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use primers of tWpe recommended by joint filler and sealant manufacturer. E. Apply sealants in accordance with Section o*7 400. END OF SECTION SECTION 05251 PAGE 2 — CONCRETE WORK SECTION 05 5 10 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings. 1,05 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Concrete Walks -section 025 14 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. AGI 501 "Specifications for structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. AGI 504 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 5. AGI 5 1 1 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". 4. AGI 5 15 "Building code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". S. AGI 549 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 6. MSP - I -RO concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice". B. Workmanship: The contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirement s, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the Architect. .,, SECTION 035 10 PAGE 1 CONCRETE NORK SECTION 083 10 C. Design and Testing 1. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the Architect. A proven, established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix. _ 2. .lob site cylinders shall be taken when the Architect so directs. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory when test cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care and handling including breaking of same at laboratory. s. The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory designated by the Architect and the Owner. 4. All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be borne by the Owner. S. Test results shall be furnished to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor. 6. Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further tested. If further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never meet strength requirements, the under strength concrete will be replaced with new as directed by Architect. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the AGI s 15 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. SECTION 05 5 10 PAGE 2 r a rR GONGRETE WORK ... SECTION 03 5 10 PART 2 : PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish concrete: unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Prawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or "good -as -new". B. use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS -1 "B -B (concrete Form) Plywood" class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edge sealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood,lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. V. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square spot footings are shown on the drawings. 2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM :A 6 15, Grade 60, except No. 5 ties and stirrups may be Grade 40. B. Supports for Reinforcement 1. Provide supports for reinforcementincludingbolsters, chairs, spaoers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. 2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. SECTION 055 10 i r PAGE 5 CONCRETE WORK SECTION 055 10 s. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot/dip '- galvanized, or plastic protected or stainless steel protected. 2.05 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Gement 1. ASTM G 150, Type I, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. — 2. use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise aaaeptable to Architect. B. Fine Aggregate 1: Glean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. 2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM G 5 s. Glean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. use of pit or bank -run — gravel is not permitted. s. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size a. Not larger than one-fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles or bars. b. These limitations may be waived If, in the judgment of the Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids. — D. Fly Ash: ASTM G 6 15, Type G or Type F. SECTION 033 10 PAGE 4 _ CONCRETE kNORK SECTION 05 5 10 E. Water: Glean, fresh, drinkable. F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM G 260. G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM G 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1 % chloride ions. H. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows: 1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 8. Type rP, Water -reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water -reducing and Acaelerating. 1. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in conarete, unless otherwise authorized In writing by Architect. J. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM G 494, Type F or G containing not more than 0.1 % chloride ions. 2.04 RELATED MATERIALS A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, Yz" thickness by depth of slab. B. Joint Sealing Compound: See ;pivision "1 sections. C. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made -from jute or , kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq,. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. P. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 1 -11. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 8. Polyethylene -coated burlap. E. Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 809, Type 1, Glass A unless other type acceptable to the Architect. SECTION 05S 10 PAGE 5 CONCRETE WORK SECTION 05 5 10 F. Concrete Sealer: Acrylic co -polymer sealer equal to SealTite Tiah as manufactured by IN.R. Meadows, Ina. The sealer shall not after -yellow or change the natural color of the concrete and shall provide a highly weatherproof, stain -resistant and dustproof sealer. 2.05 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance With applicable provisions of ASTM G 94. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. 5. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with AV 21 1.1. C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect. D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules: 1. 5000 psi 25 -day compressive strength; Nt/C ratio, 0.46 maximum (air -entrained). All concrete shall be air -entrained. 2. See Section 025 14 for additional requirements for concrete mix design for sitework concrete. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristias of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Arahiteat. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using in the work. 2.06 ADMIXTURES A. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. SECTION 055 10 1 PAGE & C i CONCRETE NIORK f- SECTION 033 10 5. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 5o degrees F. G. Use air -entrained admixture in all types of concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits: 1. 5.5% with 1 Y2" maximum aggregate 2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate s. S.o% with s/4 maximum aggregate 4. -%o% with Y2" maximum aggregate L�. Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. E. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 2.0? SLUMP LIMITS A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than s". 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1 " and not more than S �� S. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 5" after addition of HRWR to verified 2"-S" slump concrete. 4. All Other concrete: Not more than 4". 2.08 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM c c 4, and as herein specified. ., SECTION 055 10 PAGE i CONCRETE WORK SECTION 055 10 5. Control of Mixing Water: When concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, water may be added only if neither the maximum permissible water -cement ratio nor the maximum permissible slump is exceeded. The drum shall be turned an additional 50 revolutions, or more if necessary, until the added water is uniformly mixed Into the concrete. C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required. D. When the air temperature is between 55 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1 Y2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above QO degrees F. reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.0 1 FORMS A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. 5. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. Co. Forms shall not leak cement paste D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for Inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. I- SECTION 055 10 PAS rz 5 _ i CONCRETE WORK r - SECTION 05 5 10 4 F. chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or ., rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. CG. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. r H. cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood,.sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. 8.02 PLACING REINFORCING A. comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing steel institute's recommended practice for ,Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete a protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete ' surfaces. *- E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. �.., SECTION 05 5 10 T' a PACGE q CONCRETE YVORK 5ECTION 05 5 10 3.05 JOINTS A. Construction Joints 1. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the Drawings, .so as not to Impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect. 2. Provide keyways at least 1 Ys" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs and between walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. 5. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. continue all reinforcement across construction joints. B. control Joints in slabs -on -Ground 1. Construct control joints In slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. use screed type joints equal to those — manufactured by Superior Concrete accessories, Inc. Screed Key joints are of 24 gauge galvanized steel with 1 1 /8" dowel knockouts at 6" on centers. Install with a minimum of five special 16 gauge by 1 - stakes "stakes per ten feet of length of material. If saw cut control joints are used, they shall be made with a power saw fitted with an abrasive or diamond blade. saw cuts must be one-fourth the slab thickness. Sawing shall begin as soon as the concrete surface is firm enough so that it will not be torn or damaged by the blade. This will be within 4 to 12 hours after the concrete hardens. G. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct Isolation joints In slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. 5.04 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that Is attached to, or supported by, cast -in-place concrete. use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. SECTION 055 10 FACvE 10 F t pow CONCRETE WORK SECTION 035 10 B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: set edge forms or bulkheads and Intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement Is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. S. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in the forms or to comeIntocontact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General 1. Comply with AGI 304, and as herein specified. 2. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. S. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and Items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades In setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms Immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. SECTION OSS 10 PAGE > > r d CONCRETE WORK SECTION 033 10 C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 16" and In a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. D. Placing Concrete slabs 1., Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, -- within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. s. Maintain reinforcing In the proper position during concrete placement operations. E. Cold Weather Placing 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with AV 506 and as herein specified. 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of placement. SECTION 055 10 PAGvE 12 CONCRETE WORK i, ,.. BECTION OSS 10 S. no not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. F. Hot Weather Placing 1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 505 and as herein specified. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below a0 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing. S. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if It becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 5.01 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with def ective.areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1 /4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks. B. Standard smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed -to -view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is the SECTION 05 5 10 PAGE 15 t CONCRETE WORK SECTION 055 10 as -cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and smoothed. G. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than the day after form removal. 1 . Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown. 3.08 MONOLITHIC, SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile or other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as shown on the Drawings. 1. After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding Ys" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as -hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic roofing, and as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or Inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Gut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to SECTION 03 8 10 PAGE 14 CONCRETE INORK ,.. SECTION 053 10 drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish 1 Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed -to -view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin film finish coating system. 2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin f inai troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1 /8 in 1 O feet when .tested with a 1 o foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. 17. Non -slip Broom Finish 1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as shown on the Vrawings or in schedules. 2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the Architect before application. 8.09 CONCRETE CURING ANi7 PROTECTION A. General 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start Initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than '12 hours. S. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 SECTION OBB 10 PAGE 15 F r. a CONCRETE WORK SECTION 055 10 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above so degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. 5. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture _ retaining cover curing or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by following methods: -- a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water -fog spray. _ b.Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover' to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: a. cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least s" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. S. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows: a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during curing period. c. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproof Ing, membrane roofing, flooring, _ painting, and other'aoatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. SECTION 055 10 PACE 1 6 t CONCRETE WORK r SECTION OS 5 10 G. curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. D. curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other fiat surfaces by moist curing. 1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by methods specified above, as applicable. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to recelve liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. E. Applying concrete Sealer: Apply on all concrete slab floors scheduled to be left exposed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. concrete shall have cured for a least '1 days. 2. concrete shall be clean and dry prior to application, with oil stains, grease, etc. removed. 5. Apply by spray, brush, or Iamb's wool applicator to approximate coverage of soo square feet per gallon. 4. no no apply if the temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 5.1 O REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than s0 degrees F. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. 8. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. SECTION 055 10 4 l C 1 PAGE 1 "1 CONCRETE WORK SECTION 055 10 3. 1 1 RE -USE OF FORMS A. Glean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to ,architect. 8. 12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. _ B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded. G. Reinforced Masonry: Provide grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where indicated on the Drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during grout placement. 5.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas 1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to Architect. 2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1 /4" in any dimension, .and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of less than 1 ". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent. SECTION 055 10 PACSE _15 r, CONCRETE NtORK ,•• SECTION 035 10 5. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface. s. Repair of Formed surfaces 1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. G. Repair of unformed surfaces 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. 2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of concrete. surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01 " wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 5. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas SECTION 055 10 PAGE 1 cl r CONCRETE WORK SECTION 033 10 and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used When acceptable to Architects. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 " diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 5/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding °agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 " in diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 Y2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than '12 hours. D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by Architect. E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. S.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and to submit test reports. S. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM G 1 *7 2, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C c14. SECTION 055 10 PAGE 20 a CONCRETE NORK SECTION 055 10 SECTION 055 10 I. PACSS 21 2. Slump: ASTM C 145; One test for each set of compressive strength test specimens taken at point of discharge. 5. Air Content: ASTM G 25 1 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each .. time a set of compression test specimens made. S. compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 5 1; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise PM directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 5 9; one set for each 100 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in anyone day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 26 days, and 1 �., specimen retained In reserve for later testing if required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 26 days. a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. " c. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 65% of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. C,. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive r strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date SECTION 055 10 I. PACSS 21 CONCRETE WORK SECTION 08 3 10 of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch In the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 'i -day tests and 28 -day tests. D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of In-place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained In the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ,OSTM G 42, or by other methods as directed. contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. End of Section This Section Prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. SECTION 03 3 10 1 PAGE 2 2 IPM, UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM t SECTION 04200 .. 1 PART 1. GENERAL AN51/A5TM A52 - cold -Drawn steel Aire for concrete Reinforcement. i` 8. AN51/ASTM C21 6 - Facing Brick. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A5TM A 125 -zinc. (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. A. The Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, supplementary ASTM A 161 - stainless and Heat -Resisting chromium -Nickel Steel Plate. General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this section. A5TM A525 -Steel Sheet, zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by *the Hot -Dip Process. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES i A. concrete Masonry Units. ASTM A& 15 - Deformed and Plain Billet steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. { G. ASTM C90 - Hollow Load Bearing concrete Masonry Units. B. Face Brick Units for exterior wall construction to match existing Arnett -Benson ASTM C 12a - Non -Load Searing concrete Masonry Units. Senior Center. I C. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. A5TM C 145 - Solid Load Bearing concrete Masonry Units. 1.05 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04250 - Reinforced Unit Masonry B. Section 01115 - Water Repellant coating. C. Section OR a00 - caulking and Sealants: Rod and sealant at control joints. 1.04 REFERENCES .. 1 A. AN51/A5TM A52 - cold -Drawn steel Aire for concrete Reinforcement. i` 8. AN51/ASTM C21 6 - Facing Brick. r B. A5TM A 125 -zinc. (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. C. ASTM A 161 - stainless and Heat -Resisting chromium -Nickel Steel Plate. D. A5TM A525 -Steel Sheet, zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by *the Hot -Dip Process. ►— E. ASTM A580 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Wire. F. ASTM A& 15 - Deformed and Plain Billet steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. { G. ASTM C90 - Hollow Load Bearing concrete Masonry Units. H. ASTM C 12a - Non -Load Searing concrete Masonry Units. I. A5TM C 145 - Solid Load Bearing concrete Masonry Units. 1 SECTION 04200 PA6F. 1 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 J. UL - underwriters' Laboratorles. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Manufacturer's standard printed Installation instructions. B. Certificates; Submit manufactwer's certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. samples -- 1. Submit samples of concrete masonry units to illustrate color, texture and Color ranges. _ 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. installer 1. Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. _ S. Mock up 1. Provide mock up of masonry wall construction. 2. Erect units to s feet X 4 feet panel size; Include specified mortar, and — accessories. S.. When accepted, mock up will demonstrate minimum standard for the work. -- Mock up may not remain as part of the Work. 1.0'1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials off ground and protected from wetting by capillary action, rain or snow and protected from mud, dust or other material likely to cause staining or defects. B. Handle materials carefully to avoid chipping and breaking. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements _ 1. Hot Weather Requirements SECTION 04200 PAGE 2 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM r SECTION 04 200 a. Protect all masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun for 46 hours after erection when ambient air temperature exceeds 99° F. and when shaded with relative humidity less than 50%. b. Provide suitable coverings or barriers to deflect direct sunlight and wind. B. Gold r4eather Requirements 1. Keep masonry units and substrate to receive masonry construction free of frost, ice and snow at all times;. 2. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between i0° F. and 1 100 F. Do not exceed 1 boo F. for temperature of water or sand introduced to cement. S. Maintain mesonry units at a minimum temperature of 50° F. when laying. 4. Maintain air temperature on both sides of masonry above 400 F. for 92 hours, 45 hours If high -early -strength cement is used in lieu of portiand or masonry cement. S. Po not lay masonry at temperatures below 50° F. PART 2. PROVUGTS 2.01 AGGEPTABLE MANUFAGTUKERS A. concrete Masonry Units (C -MU) 1. Featherlite Building Products corp., Lubbock, Texas B. Face Brick Units 1. Equal to Acme Brick -to match existing face brick at the Arnett -Benson Senior center ' 2.02 MATERIALS A. concrete Masonry Units 1. General POO a. Nominal modular size of 6 inch, width x b inch, height x'1 inch, length, also units 6" X 6" X 16" and 4" X $" X 16". b. Units exposed to view shall be free of Chipped corners, edges and field voids. f . SECTION 04 200 PAGE S r UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 2. Hollow Load Searing Block Units: ASTM C90, Grade N. Type I - Moisture Controlled; normal weight. B. Reinforcement and Anchorage _ 1. .joint Reinforcement: Truss type; hot dip galvanized after fabrication from cold -drawn deformed steel conforming to ANSI/ASTM A62, 5/1 Inch cross ties. Equal to AA Vilre Products #AA6 10. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Sectlon 0581 O. Co. Accessories 1. Preformed Control .joints: Rubber Neoprene material. Provide with corner — and tee accessories, cement fused joints. 2. .joint Filler: Closed cell polyurethane; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self -expanding; width required by maximum lengths. 5. Building Paper: X50 asphalt saturated felt. 4. Nailing Strips: Softwood, preservative treated for moisture resistance, dovetail shape, sized to masonry joints. S. Cleaning Solutions: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 6. weep Holes: Preformed plastic tubes; 1 /4 inch diameter minimum. D. Face Brick Units 1. General a. Nominal modular size of 2 - 1/4 Inch x 8 inch x 5 5/6 inch thickness. Provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams and lintels. ^' b. Units exposed to view shall be free of chipped corners, edges and field voids. — E. Flashings 1 Plastic Flashings: Sheet polyvinyl chloride; 20 mil thick. 2.05 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Proportions SECTION 04200 1 PAGE 4 r' p UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 1. Mortar mixes: Conform to ASTM C210, and the following:' a. Type "5" Mortar for all masonry. One part Portland Gement, +i4 to 1h parts damp, loose sand or 7/2 part Portland Gement, 1 part masonry cement, 5- 5/6 to 41h parts damp, loose sand. 2. Masonry &rout Mix: Conform to ASTM C4?6 and the following for coarse grout: a. One part Portland Cement, 0 to 1 / 10 part hydrated lime, 21/4 to s parts damp, loose sand, 1 to 2 parts coarse aggregate. b. Meet physical requirements for grout as specifled In ASTM C4'T b. c. &rout for filling of reinforced cells in concrete block walls shall have a strength of 2500 pounds per square inch in 26 days. B. Measuring 1. Accurately measure ingredients. Including water, using measuring devices of known volume. 2. Do not use shovel as measuring device. c. Mixing 1. use mechanical mixing equipment designed for purpose Intended. 2. Use minimum amount of water required to produce workable consistency. s. Mix materials for a minimum of three minutes or until mix presents a uniform color. 0. Masonry Mortar Color: To match existing. PART S. EXECUTION 5.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located. C. verify that built-in items are In proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. V. Beginning of installation means Installer accepts existing conditions. 1 SECTION 04200 PAGE 5 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 5.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied by other Sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain In place until building 'structure provides permanent bracing. 5.05 INSTALLAT16N A. Senerai 1. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from dispiocement. 2. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. S. Lay concrete masonry units and face brick units in.running bond or to match existing. Course one unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. Form cohcave mortar joints. 4. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. S. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 6. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses. '1. Interlock intersections and external corners. 6. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. 9. Perform jobsite cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unshipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 10. Gut mortar joints flush where resilient base is scheduled or bitumen dampproofing i5 applied. 1 1. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as Indicated. 12. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. StaTION 04200 PACK & UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 1 s. install weep holes in veneer at 52 inches on.. center horizontally above through -wall flashing, above shelf angles, and at bottom of walls. 8. Reinforcement and Anchorages 1. Install horizontal Joint reinforcement 16 inches o.c. 2. Piave masonry joint reinforcement in first horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. s. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum b inches. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of openings. G. brouted Components 1. Reinforce bond beam as indicated on the drawings. 2. support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within ,h inch of dimensioned position. S. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. �- 4. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum a inches either side of opening. ,.. S. Lay masonry units with core cells vertically aligned and cavities between i. wythes clear of mortar and unobstructed. 6. Place mortar in masonry unit bed joints back 1/4 inch from edge of unit grout spaces, bevel back and upward. Permit mortar to cure 't days before placing grout. 'T. Reinforce masonry unit cores and cavities with reinforcement bars and grout as Indicated. 6. Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at Intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters. splice reinforcement in accordance with section 05 10. 9. Wet masonry unit surfaces in contact with grout just prior to grout Placement. s SECTION 04200 PAGE 7 r UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 10. Grout spaces less than 2 inches in width with fine grout using low lift grouting techniques. Grout spaces 2 inches or greater in width with course grout' using high or low lift grouting techniques. 1 1. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 11h inch below top of upper masonry unit to form a positive key for subsequent grout placement. 12. Low Lift Grouting: Place first lift of grout to a height of 16 inches and rod for grout consolidation. Place subsequent lifts in 6 inch increments and rod for grout consolidation. 15. High Lift Grouting: Provide cleanout opening no less than 4 inches high at the bottom of each cell to be grouted by cutting one face shell of masonry unit. 14. Glean out masonry cells and cavities with high pressure water spray. Permit complete water drainage. 15. Request the Architect to inspect the cells and cavities. Allow 5 days advance notice of Inspection. 16. After cleaning and cell inspection, seal openings with masonry units. 11. Pump grout into spaces. Maintain water content in grout to intended slump without aggregate segregation. 16. Limit grout lift to 46 inches and rod for grout consolidation. Wait 50 to 60 minutes before placing next lift. D. control and Expansion Joints 1. Do not continue horizontal Joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. 2. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths, Beal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. s. Size control joint in accordance with Section 0'7c[00 for ` sealant performance. 4. Form expansion joint as detailed. E. Built-in Work SECTION 04200 PAGE 5 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM r 1 . SECTION 04200 1. As work progresses, build in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal frames, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates and other items furnished by other Sections. 2. Build in items plumb and level. S. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 8 inches from framed openings. 4. Do not build In organic materials subject to deterioration. F. Tolerances 1. Maximum variation From Alignment of Columns: Pilasters: 1/4 inch. 7 2. Maximum variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/52 inch. 5. Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1h inch in 20 feet or more. 4. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non -cumulative. S. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1 /8 inch in s feet and 1/4 Inch in 10 feet; 1A inch in so feet. 6. Maximum Variation of .joint Thickness: 1 /8 inch In s feet. I. Maximum variation From Cross Sectional Thickness of Wails: 1/4 inch. G. Cutting and Fitting 1. Cut and fit for pipes, conduit, sleeves, grounds, and other appurtenances. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. 2. Obtain contractor or Owner approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry �- work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be Impaired. 5.04 ADJUSTING AND GLEANING A. clean work as required to remove excessmortar and mortar smears. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. SECTION 04200 PRCGE Q UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM SECTION 04200 G. Glean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. E. Remove and replace all masonry units which are chipped broken or cracked beyond _ repair. 5.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. End of Section SECTION 04200 PA67F. 10 t REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04250 PART 1 GENERAL 1.0 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, Including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Requirements of Section 04200, Unit Masonry, apply to work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing bars. Comply with the AV 5 15 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced concrete Structures". show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Refer to section 04200, Unit Masonry, for masonry materials and accessories not included in this section. B. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A 6 15 and as follows: 1. Provide Grade 60, except that No. 5 ties and stirrups may be Grade 40. 2. Where No. 2 bars are shown, provide plain, round, carbon steel bars, ASTM A 6-75, Grade 60. s. shop -fabricate reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. �,., SECTION 04250 FACGE 1 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04250 PARTS E=XECUTION 5.01 PLACING REINFORCING A. General: Glean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar. or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on the.Drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. 5. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1 " (whichever is greater). C. For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as shown, but not less than 1 Yz times the nominal bar diameter or 1 A", whichever is greater. Provide lateral ties as shown. D. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the Architect. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise shown. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie. E. Provide not less than minimum lap shown, or if not shown, as required by governing code. F. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimum mortar cover of 5/5" on exterior face of walls and A" at other locations. 0. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcing as the work progresses, with a minimum cover of 5/6" on exterior face of walls and Y2" at other locations. Lap units not less than 6", at ends. use prefabricated "L" and "T units to provide continuity at corners and intersections. Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. H. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structures as Indicated. SECTION 04250 FACvF- 2 r REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04250 8.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Refer to Section 04200, Unit Masonry, for general installation requirements of unit masonry. B. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork. G. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. D. no not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during construction. E. Allow not less than the following minimum time to elapse after completion of the member before removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period. 1. 10 days for girders and beams. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. General 1. Do not wet concrete masonry units (cMU). 2. Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or If not shown, provide 3/6" joints. 3. Where solid CMU units are shown, lay with full mortar head and bed joints. SECTION 04250 PA67M 3 REINFORCED UNIT MA5ONRY SECTION 04250 -- B. walls 1. Pattern Bond: Lay CMU Wall Units in Y2 running bond with vertical joints In each course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each course at corners and intersections. Use special -shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. 2. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical _ reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. s. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or modify units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcing bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non -reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms. C. Grouting 1. Use "Fine Grout" for filling spaces less than 4" in both horizontal directions. 2. Use "Coarse Grout" for filling 4" spaces or larger in both horizontal directions. V. Grouting Technique: Use low -lift grouting techniques subject to the requirements which follow. E. Low -Lift Grouting 1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in. in vertical cores to be grouted. 2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 1 a 2 bar diameters nor 10 feet. SECTION 04250 PA&E 4 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04250 S. Lay aw to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5 feet height, or if bond beam occurs ,below 5 feet height, stop pour at course below bond beam. 4. Pour grout using container with spout or by chute. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1 Yz" below top course of pour. S. Bond Beams: stop grout in vertical cells 1 Y2" below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. F. Preparation of Grout spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. clean reinforcing and adjust to proper position. clean top surfaces of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures to resist grout pressures. G. Grout Placing 1. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations. 2. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are acceptable to the Architect. S. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 5 feet. Allow not less than 50 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation. 4. Mere bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam course to within 1 " of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry. E± �., SECTION 04250 PA&F. 5 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04230 S. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1 Ya" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required. End of Section This Section Prepared by FP -TK Engineers, Inc. SECTION 04250 PAGE 6 r GLASS UNiT MASONRY SECTION 04 2'i 0 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions 'of the contract, including Creneral conditions, Supplementary General conditions, special conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified In this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of glass unit masonry Is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. r, B. The work includes the furnishing and installing of all glass blocks, expansion strips panel reinforcing, panel anchors, sealant, asphalt emulsion and other labor and materials to provide a complete and satisfactory installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. submit manufacturer's literature for each required material showing compliance with the requirements of these spealfications. S. submit one sample of each type of glass block required for approval. C.. submit manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storage, installation and protection. Transmit a copy of each instruction to the Installer aril General contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Glass Blocks: shall be partially evacuated, hollow masonry units made of clear, colorless glass equal to 3 1/8" x 1 3/4" x "7'5/4" Standard series "PEGORA or WE" glass block, non edge -coated as manufactured' by Pittsburgh corning corporation. Pattern as seleceted by the Architect. B. Mortar: Mortar shall be 1 part Portland cement, 1/4 part lime, and sand equal to 3 times the amount of cementitious material (cement plus lime), all measured by volume, plus an integral type waterproofer. If a waterproof Portland cement is used, the integral type waterproofer shall be omitted. For interior panels the waterproofer shall be omitted. Admixtures in the form of setting accelerators and anti -freeze compounds shall not be used. 1.A mortar prepared from masonry cement meeting requirements of ASTM c 91, SECTION 042170 PAGE 1 7 GLASS UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 2't O Type 11, incorporating a metallic -stearate -type waterproofer anti mixed to the manufacturer's recommendation is an acceptable alternative. 2.Mixing: The mortar shall be mixed to a consistency as stiff as will permit good working and shall be drier than mortar for ordinary masonry. Retempering the mortar after it has taken its initial set shall not be permitted. s.Portland Gement: shall be Type 1 conforming to the Standard Specifications for. Portland Gement, ASTM Designation G 150. If desired, a waterproof, high early -strength Portland Gement may be used. 4.Lime: Shall be a high -calcium lime, or a pressurehydrated dolomitic lime, provided that not less than a 29'0 of all the active ingredients are completely hydrated, conforming to ASTM G 20.7, Type S. 5.5and: Shall conform with the Standard Specifications for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar, ASTM Designation G 144 for thin Joints. &.Integral Type Waterproofer: a.Metallic-stearate type; Hydracide Powder by Sonneborn contech, Omicron Mortarproofing by Master Builders company, or equal. b.Latex type: Laticrete 651 O Admix by Laticrete International, Inc., or equal. G. Expansion strips: Where shown or required, shall be either glass fiber or polyethylene (black) as furnished by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. D. Panel Reinforcing: shall be Panel Reinforcing as furnished by Pittsburgh corning Corporation and shall be of Pittsburgh Corning Corporation and shall be of galvanized steel double -wire mesh formed of two parallel 9 -gage wires either 1 5/6" or 2" on center with electricaliy welded cross wires at regular Intervals. E. Panel Anchors: Where shown on Drawings or where required, shall be Panel Anchors - as furnished by Pittsburgh corning Corporation and shall be No. 20 -gauge perforated steel strips 2.4" long by 1 5/4" wide galvanized after perforating. Embed on approximately 24" center in standard Pc Vass Block panels. F. Asphalt Emulsion: Where shown or required, shall be a water-based asphalt emulsion (Karnak 100 by Karnak chemical corporation, Clark, N.1 or equal). G. Packing (Backer Rods): Where indicated on drawings or required as a lateral cushloning for PG Glass Block panels at Jams, heads, and intermediate supports, ,shall be polyethylene foam, neoprene or equal fillar approved by the sealant SECTION 042'70 PA&F. 2 1 &L -ASS UNIT MASONRY SECTION 042070 k manufacturer. H. sealant: Equal to sealant specified in section Oi a00 or as recommended by the manufacturer. (. PART 3 EXECUTION ff 5.01 PRECAUTIONS A. Do not lay masonry in freezing weather unless suitable means are provided to heat materials, protect work from cold and frost and ensure that mortar will harden r i without freezing. No anti -freeze ingredient shall be used. S. Protect masonry materials during storage and construction from wetting by rain, snow or ground water and from soilage or intermixture with earth or other materials. C. .Do not use metal ties having loose rust or other coatings. Including ice, which will reduce or destroy bond. D. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. F 5.02 PREPARATION A. Examine conditions of adjacent materials and construction before beginning glass unit masonry work. Notify Architect If conditions will not allow a satisfactory Installation. S. clean all substrates prior to beginning work. 8.03 INSTALLATION A. All installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for the conditions encountered. S. Pattern shall be stacked bond and as shown on the Drawings. C,. Joints shall be 1 /4" �o 3/8" or as required tofit existing openings as detailed. D. sill area to be covered by mortar shall have a heavy coat of Asphalt Emulsion. Allow emulsion to dry before placing mortar. E. Adhere Expansion Strips to Jambs and head with gobs of asphalt emulsion. Make certain expansion strip extends to sill. SECTION 042070 PACSE 5 GLASS UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04210 F. Set a full mortar bed joint, applied to sill. 0- 1 set lower course of block. All mortar joints must be full and not furrowed. steel tools must not be used to tap blocks into position. H. Install Panel Reinforcing in horizontal joints. Reinforcing shall be installed on 24" centers and in joints immediately above and below all openings within panels. Reinforcing shall run continuously from end to end of panels and shall be lapped not less than 6" whenever it is necessary to use more than one length. Do not bridge expansion joints with reinforcing. Install relnforcing as follows: 1.Place lower half. of mortar In bed joint. do not furrow. 2.Press panel reinforcinf into place. S.Cover panel reinforcing with upper half of mortar bed and trowel smooth. Do not furrow. I. Place full mortar bed for joints not requiring panel reinforcing. Do not furrow. J. set succeeding course of blocks. K. strike joints smooth while mortar is still plastic and before final seta At this time rake out all spaces requiring sealant to a depth equal to the width of the spaces. Remove surplus mortar from faces of glass blocks and wipe dry. Tool joints .smooth and`concave, before mortar takes final set. L. After final mortar set install packing tightly between glass block panel and jamb and head construction. Leave space for sealing. M. Apply sealant evenly to the full depth of recesses as indicated on the Drawings and In accordance with the manufacturer's application manual and instructions. 8.04 CLEANINCG AND PROTECTION A. Surplus mortar shall be removed and the paces of the blocks wiped dry at the time joints are tooled. S. Clean by using an ordinary household scrub brush having stiff bristles. C. Final cleaning shall be done after mortar has attained final set but before becoming dry on the block surfaces. Do.not use abrasive Gleaners (steel wool, wire brush) In conjunction with removing mortar or dirt from the faces of glass block. Remove mortar with damp cloth before final set occurs. SECTION 042 -10 FA6E 4. GLASS UNIT MASONRY SECTION 042010 D. Protect completed glass unit masonry installation by covering with plywood or similar protective measures. End Of Section SECTION 042'70 PAGE 5 i STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05 120 PART GENERAL 1 .O 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: t A. The extent of structural steel work is shown on the Drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required. B. Structural steel is that work defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on the Drawings. 1.05 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Reinforcing Steel - Section 055 10 B. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications - Section 05500 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following except as otherwise indicated: 1. RISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modif led by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings." 2. RISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design", Ninth Edition, and including the "Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued. P 5. RISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 525 or A } 4 cio Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Pok Bolted Structural .joints of the Engineering Foundation. �.. SECTION 05 120 PAGE 1 r 4 , I STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05 120 4. AW5 D 1.1 "Structural Welding Code". 5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Roiled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use". B. Oualifications for Welding Work: 1. Oualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard oualification Procedure". 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. S. if recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the contractor's responsibility. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures are sub jest to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 2. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply. D. Design of Members and Connections: -- 1. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. verify dimensions at the site _ whenever possible without causing delay in the work. 2. Promptly notify the Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated. SECTION 05 120 PAGE 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL r" SECTION 05 120 1.05 SUBMITTALS: 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. 5. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded In cast -in-place concrete or masonry, In ample time to not delay that work. C,. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. D. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supportingstructures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. r. SECTION 05 120 7 PACGE 5 A. Shop Drawings, Structural Steel• 1. Submit shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a registered professional engineer including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, and details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. 2. Architect's review of shop drawings will be for general considerations only. Compliance with requirements for materials fabrication and erection of structural steel Is the contractor's responsibility. C 5. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AV45 symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the " installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. 5. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded In cast -in-place concrete or masonry, In ample time to not delay that work. C,. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. D. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supportingstructures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. r. SECTION 05 120 7 PACGE 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05 120 PART 2 PROOPUCT5 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Rolled steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 56, except where other type steel is shown. B. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, Fy - 46 ksi G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 55, Type E or 5, Grade B or ASTM A 501 P. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 501, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated. E. Headed Stud Type Shear connectors: ASTM A 106, Grade 10 15 or 1020, cold finished carbon steel; with dimensions complying with AISc Specifications. F. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 501, Grade A, regular low -carbon steel bolts and nuts. G. Provide either hexagonal, or square, heads and nuts, except use only hexagonal units for exposed connections. 2 J. K High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: 1. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A 525. concrete Expansion Anchors: Wedge type anchors meeting Federal Specification FF -5-525 INT AMP 5, Group II, Type 4, class 1. Electrodes for Welding: comply with AWS code. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; complying with performance requirements for F5 TT -P-645. SECTION 05 120 PAGE 4 -- STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05 120 L. Non -Metallic Non -Shrink Grout: Pre -mixed, non-metallic, non -corrosive, non -staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CE CRV-C 62 1. 2.02 FABRICATION: A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with RISC Specifications and as indicated on the final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown. 2. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 5. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces on members exposed in the final structure free of markings,'burrs, and other defects. B. Connections: .� 1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. 2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. t s. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are shown. r l C. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only the bolted connections of secondary framing members to primary members (including purlins, girts and other framing members taking only nominal stress) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection. D. High -Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "specifications for Structural .joints l using ASTM A 525 or A 4cIO Bolts". r SECTION 05 120 PAGE 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05 120 E. Welded Construction: 1. Comply with AkNS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2. ,assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. F. Stud Connectors: -- 1. Prepare steel surfaces as `recommended by the manufacturer of the -stud connectors. :Shop weld stud connectors, as shown, to bearing or embedded plates. Use automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's printed Instructions. G. Holes for Other Work: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other speclalty items as shown to receive other work. 2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. H. Splicing: _ 1. 'Splicing of beams shall be as shown on the Drawings. All other splicing shall be made only with the written consent of the Architect and/or Engineer. When approved, copies of weld tests shall be furnished to the Architect and Engineer. 2.08 SHOP PAINTINCG: A. General: 1. Shop paint all structural steel work, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint - embedded steel which is partially exposed on the exposed portions and the initial 2" of embedded areas only. " SECTION 05 120 PAGE 6 f l STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05 120 2. ao mot paint surfaces which are to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction -type connections. S. Do not paint surfaces, which are scheduled to receive sprayed -on fireproofing. 4. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and splatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with steel Structures Painting council (SSPW as follows: 1. SP -2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or 2. SP -5 "Power Tool cleaning", or 5. SP -*T "Brush-off Blast Cleaning". C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and all exposed surfaces. PART 5 EXECUTION fro 5.01 INSPECTION: A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Vo not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. 5.02 ERECTION: r A. General: comply with the RISC Specifications and code of Standard Practice, and as herein specifled. S. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing ,.. SECTION 05 120 PAGvE i r 4 t STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05120 members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. G. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete the work. D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. 1. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. 2. Refer to Division 5 of these specifications for anchor bolt Installation requirements in concrete, and Division 4 for masonry installation. E. setting Bases and Bearing Plates: 1. Glean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Glean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. "- 5. Tighten the anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if -- protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect Installed materials, and allow to cure in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions, oras otherwise required. — F. Field Assembly: 1. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations Indicated. Align and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Glean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent SECTION 05 120 PAGE 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05 120 ., SECTION 05 120 PAG7E Q contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies In elevations and alignment. 2. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified AISG tolerances. I~ s. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on the mean operating temperature of the structure. Make allowances for the difference between temperature at time of erection and the mean temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in service. ;~ 4. Splice members only where shown or specified. G. Erection Bolts: on exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. H. comply with AISG Specifications: For bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. i. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be IL enlarged to admit bolts. j. Gas -Gutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to the Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. K. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. L. Shear connectors: All areas to which studs are to be attached must be free of all foreign material, such as rust, oil, grease, paint, etc. Men the mill scale is sufficiently thick to cause difficulty in obtaining proper welds, it must be removed by grinding or blasting. ., SECTION 05 120 PAG7E Q STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05 120 M. Stud connectors shall be installed on all bearing or embedded plates. Number of shear connectors required is shown on the plans. Use automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in accordance with the manufaaturer's.printed instructions. END OF SECTION 05 120 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. SECTION 05 120 PAGE 10 COLLI-FORMEP METAL 1 . r■ SECTION 05400 PART 1 GENERAL j 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 5 A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, . Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified In this section. j" 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of lightgage framing is shown on the Drawings. B. The types of lightgage metal framing units for the project include the following: 1•` 1. Load-bearing punched channel "C" shaped steel studs �+ 2. Load-bearing punched channel "C" shaped steel joists I 1.08 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: f A. structural Steel - Section 05 120 B. Nonload-bearing steel studs - Plaster and Drywall sections in Division 9 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. codes and Standards: comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: B. ASTM A 446 steel sheet, Zinc -coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process structural (Physical) Ouality. 1. ASTM A 525 Steel sheet, zinc -coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -alp Process, General Requirements. 2. AWS "code for Welding in Building construction, D 1.0". S. ANSI 249.1 "Safety in Welding and Cutting". 4. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members", latest edition. 1.. SECTION 05 400 PACSS 1 COLn-FORMED METAL SECTION 05400 G. Component Design: Compute structural properties of studs and joists in accordance with AI51 "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed steel Structural Members". D. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for a fire -resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing regulations, provide units which have been -approved by governing authorities having jurisdiction. E. Manufacturer: Provide lightgage metal framing components of the type(s) indicated, produced by one of the following: 1. Punched "C" -Shaped Load-bearing Studs, 1 5/8" flange: a. Dietrich Industries Inc. - 5 5/5" cosi - 20 gage at 12" o.c. b. Delta Metal Products. Inc. - PGs358 - 20 gage at 12" ox.. 2. Punched "C" -Shaped steel .foists, 1 5/5" flange: a. Dietrich Industries Inc. - 6" CSJ c 1 6 gage 12" o.c. max. b. Delta Metal Products, Inc. - Pcs600-1 6 gage o 12" o.c. max. r. 1.05 SU5MITTALS: A. For information only, submit copies of manufacturer's product information and installation instructions for each item of lightgage framing and accessories. Distribute one additional copy of installation Instructions to,the Installer. S. shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and installations not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations, number, type, location and spacing. Indicate supplemental bracing, splices, accessories, and details as may be required for proper installation. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to the pro jest site in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. store off the ground in a dry ventilated space SECTION 05400 PftiGE 2 p , f COLD -FORMED METAL SECTION 05400 or protect with suitable waterproof coverings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL FRAMING: A. System components: With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard steel runners (tracks), blocking„ lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories as recommended by the manufacturer for the applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. B. Materials and Finishes: 1. For 16 gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 40,000 psi; ASTM A446,A5'70,orA&1 1. 2. For 18 gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of S 5,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 510, or A 6 1 1. 5. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A 525 for a minimum 0 60 coating. c. "C" -Shape Studs and .foists: Manufacturer's standard factory punched load-bearing steel studs of size, shape, and gage indicated, with 1 5/8" flange and flange return lip. 2.02 FABRICATION: 6 A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated Into panels prior to erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated panels In a manner to prevent damage or distortion in any members in the assembly. B. Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with the r manufacturer. Co. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted. PART 5 EXECUTION ,.. SECTION 05400 PAGE 5 i GOLD -FORMED METAL SECTION 05400 5.01 GENERAL: A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. B. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to the layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by the stud manufacturer for the type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o.c. spacing for nail or power -driven fasteners, nor 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks. G. set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non -plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure. ` V E. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in the metal framing system wherever wall or partitions are Indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with the stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering the weight or loading resulting from the Item supported. - -" 5.02 INSTALLATION OF WALL STUD SYSTEM: A. secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. B. Frame wall openings larger than 2'-0" square with double studs at each jamb of frame except where more than 2 are either 'shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full -height studs of the wall. Secure stud system all around to wall opening frame in the manner indicated. G. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints, as shown for the wall system, with a separate stud and do not bridge the joint with components of the stud system. SECTION 05 400 PAGE 4 i r GOLD-1FORMEL7 METAL SECTION 05400 D. Splices in studs will not be permitted. 1 E. Studs shall have a minimum of 10" unpunched steel at both ends of each member. 5.05 INSTALLATION OF JOISTS: A. Install level and plumb, complete with bracing and reinforcing as indicated on the Drawings. Provide not less than 1 1/2" end bearing. 5. Reinforce ends with end clips, steels hangers, steel angle clips, steel stud section, and grain wood block, or as otherwise recommended by joist manufacturer. C. vihere required, reinforce joists at interior supports with single short length of joist section located directly over interior support, snap -on shoe, 50% side -piece lapped reinforcement, or other method recommended by joist manufacturer. D. Secure joists to interior support systems to prevent lateral movement of the bottom flange. END OF SECTION 05400 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. .. SECTION 05400 PAGE 5 r METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specifled in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of miscellaneous metal work is shown on the Drawings and includes items fabricated from metal shapes, plates, angles and pipe which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems in other sections of these specifications. 1.08 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Concrete Work - Sectlon .035 1 O 5. Structural Steel - Section 05 120 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. 5. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete for installation of miscellaneous metal work. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. C. See Section 053 10, Concrete Work, for installation of Inserts and anchorage devices. D. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items In shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. SOW SECTION 05500 i a w PA67M 1 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data, Miscellaneous Metal: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and installation instructions for products to be used In the fabrication of miscellaneous metal work. Including paint products. Indicate by transmittal that copy of instructions has been distributed to Installer. S. Shop Drawings, Miscellaneous Metal: Submit 5 copies of shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal assemblies. Include plans, elevations, details, sections and connections. Show anchorages and accessory items. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metalwork which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. B. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. Co. Steel Tubing: Hot -formed, welded or seamless, ASTM A 501 D. All galvanizing shall be hot dipped galvanizing, ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 386. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; type as selected; Grade A; black finish unless galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise shown or' specified. F. Concrete inserts: Threaded or wedge type, galvanized ferrous casting, either malleable iron ASTM A 41 or cast steel ASTM A 2'1; provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot -dip galvanized ASTM A 15 S. G. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; complying with performance requirements for FS TT -P-645. SECTION 05500 PAGE 2 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05 500 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL: I�r c A. Workmanship: use materials of size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished .,product. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. use type of materials shown or specified for various components of work. B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/52" unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. G. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS Code. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. use exposed fasteners of type shown, or if not shown, philiips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. E. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide adequate support for intended use. F. Gut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as required to receive finish hardware and similar items. G. shop Painting: 1. shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise specified. 2. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. Glean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPG SP -2 "Hand Tool Gleaning: or SSPG SP -5 "Power Tool Gleaning:, or SSPG SP -1 "Brush -Off Blast Gleaning". 5. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPG SP -1 "Solvent Gleaning". F SECTION 05500 _ PAaE 5 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05 500 Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS:' A.. Carpenter's Iron Work: Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware are required under other sections. B. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. C. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates and minimum joints for field connection. Gut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar Items. V. stair Handrails: Furnish and install 1 1/2" I.I. standard steel pipe handrails as detailed on the Drawings. All welds shall be ground smooth. Railings supported from walls shall be fastened to brackets equal to Julius Blum No. 506 wall brackets. SECTION 05500 1 PAGE 4 r METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500 PART 5 EXECUTION 5.04 INSTALLATION: A. Anchorages: Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete construction. coordinate delivery of such items to project site. B. Fastening to In -Place construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal items to in-place constructions; including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. C,. Gutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal items. Set work accurately in location alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing of anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: comply with AW5 Code for procedures of manual shielded metal are, welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used In correcting welding work. F. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. END OF SECTION 05500 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. ,., SECTION 05500 PAGE 5 A 1 i ',low I r f r EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES SECTION 05805 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, Including 6eneral Conditions, supplementary 6eneral Condition$, Special Conditions and 6eneral Requirements (Division 1), .apply to the work specified In this section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Expansion joint assemblies for floor and wall surfaces. B. Refer to Schedule of items at end of Section. 1.05 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 0551 O - Concrete Work and Formwork. B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Wallboard Systems. C. Section 09 51 O - Acoustical Ceilings. D. Section 09650 -Vinyl Composition Tile. 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05510 - Concrete Work: Expansion and contraction joints and junction of concrete slab -on -grade and perimeter walls. B. Section 015 20 - Built Up Roofing and Sheet Metal: Roof expansion and control joints. Co. Section 01 a00 - Joint scalers: Expansion and control joint finishing utilizing a sealant and bond breaker. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ANSI/AS 1 • B221 - Aluminum AIloy, Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. B. ANSI/ASTM 8506 - Aluminum -Alloy, Standard Structural shapes, Rolled or Extruded. C. ANSI/ASTM 5445 - Copper -Zinc -Lead Alloy (Leaded -Brass) Extruded Shapes. SECTION 05805 PAd?E 1 EXPANSION JOINT A.SSEMPLIES SECTION 05805 1.06 5UBMITTAL5 A. Submit under provisions of the Contract. B. Product Data: Provide assembly profiles, dimensions, locations in the work, affected 4d jacent construction, anchorage devices, available colors and finish, and locations of splices. C. Submit two samples in size, illustrating profile, dimension, color, and finish selected. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate rough -in sizes. Provide templates for cast -in or placed frames or anchors, and indicate tolerances for item placement. 1.01 FIELD MEA5UREMENT5 A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS ~ 2.01 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM 8221. B. Resilient Filler: Extruded vinyl; exhibiting 5hore'A' hardness of 40 - 5o Durometer. C. Threaded Fasteners: Aluminum. D. Backing Paint: Asphaltic type. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Joint Covers: Aluminum cover plate, aluminum frame construction, retainers ... with resilient vinyl filler strip, designed to permit plus or minus so percent joint movement with full recovery Joint to be flush with finish floor surfaces; refer to drawings. B. Back paint components in contact with cementitiou5 materials. C. Galvanize embedded ferrous metal anchors and fastening -devices. SECTION 05805 PACIM 2 k r EXPANSION .JOINT ,ASSEMBLIES SECTION 05 505 D. shop assemble components and package with anchors and fittings, E. Provide Joint components in single length wherever practical. Minimize site splicing. 2.03 FINISHES A. Floors: Mill finish surfacing. B. ceilings: Paint to match ceiling grid color. G. Resilient Filler Exposed to View: Gray Black vinyl. PART 5 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions. B. Verify that preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable. 5.02 PREPARATION A. Provide anchoring devices for installation and embedment. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements. 3.05 INSTALLATION A Install components and accessories In accordance with manufacturer's instructions . . B. Align work plumb and level, flush with adjacent surfaces. G. Rigidly anchor components to substrate to prevent misalignment. 5.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished work. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surfaces. C. Provide removable strippable coating to protect finish surface. SECTION 05805 PAGE 5 EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES SECTION 05805 5.05 SCHEDULES A. Floor to Floor Joints: Manufa4turer construction Specialties - Equal to OF5T - 100 - 5. Floor to riall Joints (A5 REQUIRED IF JOINT 15 ONLY SEEN): Manufacturer Construction Specialties - Equal to GFSTW - 100 C.. ceiling Joints at suspended ceiling: 1/6 - aluminum plate painted to match ceiling the grid. D. Soffit expansions joints: Modified Keene #40 expansion clear anodized finish. E. Roof to INall/Fascia Equal to a bellowed e. j. joint by: Manufacturer Model Manville Expand - o - Gard style F-5.052" aluminum flange F. Substitutions in accordance with the contract. END OF SECTION SECTION 05805 PA&E 4 n CARPENTRY V40RK • SECTION 06 100 r PART 1 &ENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS k A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and general Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. carpentry work includes carpentry not specified as a part of other. sections of Pak these specifications and which generally is not exposed to view unless otherwise ! detailed or scheduled. Work under this section includes: P 1. Wood Grounds, Nailers and Blocking 2. Blocking at metal stud wall framing and roof framing members, and fascia framing. 3. Plywood roof decking. 4. Gypsum Sheathing Board. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber standards: comply with PS 20 and with the applicable rules of the respective grading and inspecting agencies for species and products indicated. B. Identification: Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency, except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate that materials have been inspected and graded in accordance with grading standards if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. Co. Product Handling: Keep materials dry during delivery, storage and handling. store lumber and plywood in stacks with provision for air circulation. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp surfaces. Protect exposed materials from weather. D. coordination: Coordinate location of furring, nallers, blocking, grounds and similar supports so that attached work will comply with design requirements. E. Plywood standard: comply with PS 1, except as otherwise indicated. F. Provide plywood of any PS 1 species classification group, except where particular species is shown or specified or where PS 1 limits groups for a particular grade specified. SECTION 06100 . PA0E 1 CARPENTRY WORK SECTION 06100 G. Factory -mark each piece of lumber and plywood to identify the type, grade, agency providing the inspection service, the producing mill and other qualities as specified herein. H. Marking may be omitted if certificate of inspection is provide for each shipment. Omit markings and provide certificate of inspection for material shown or scheduled to receive transparent or natural finish if markings would be visible after finishing. I. Shop -fabricate carpentry work to the extent feasible and where shop fabrication will result in better workmanship than feasible for on-site fabrication. J. Fit carpentry work to other work. Scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. K. Time delivery and installation of carpentry work to avoid delaying other trades whose work is dependent on or affected by the carpentry work and to comply with protection and storage requirements. L. Keep carpentry materials dry during delivery. Store lumber and plywood in stacks with provision for air circulation within stacks. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp or wet surfaces. Protect exposed materials against weather. M. Do not store dressed or treated lumber or plywood outdoors. N. Store materials for which a maximum moisture content is specified, only in areas where relative humidity has been reduced to a level where specified moisture content can be maintained with a tolerance of plus or minus 1 %: O. Advise Contractor of heating or cooling requirements for installation areas and for maintaining required temperature until Owner's acceptance of the work. P. Deliver, store and handle ext erlor gypsum sheathing in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. -- 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Western Wood Products Association, "Grading Rules for western Lumber,I S. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber". C. Product Standard of NSB, "Product `Standard Ps -166 for Softwood Plywood/Construction and Industrial". D. Architectural vioodwork institute (AN) "Quality Standards". 1.05 SUBMITTALS SECTION 06 100 FACIE 2 CARPENTRY WORK SECTION 06100 A. For information only, submit 2 copies of chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for proper use of each type of treated material. Indicate by transmittal T form that copy of each instruction has bee distributed to the installer. 4 1.06 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Stack framing lumber and plywood to insure ventilation and insure against damage from moisture and the elements. Protect millwork and flooring against dampness during and after delivery. store under cover in a well ventilated building -and where not exposed to changes of temperature and humidity. Do not store or install any framing until masonry work is dry. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY, FRAMING MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Lumber: Graded in accordance with established Grading rules: Maximum moisture content of 12 per cent; of following species and grades: 1. Non-structural light framing: Stress group A; standard grade. 2. Structural framing: Stress group A; superlor grade. a. Structural framing shall be wood species Douglas Fir Large or southern Pine No. 2 or Better. - B. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood: plain finish for other interior locations; size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, nuts, washers, lags, pins and screws: Medium carbon steel; sized to suit application galvanized for exterior locations high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations. D. Fasteners: 1. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel. 2. Nails and Staples: FS FF -N-105. 5. Tacks: F5 FF -N-105. 4. Wood Screws: Fs FF -S -ill. 5. Bolts and studs: F5 FF -B-5'75. 6. Nuts: F5 FF -N-656. r* t SECTION 06100 PAGE 5 CARPENTRY AORK SECTION 06100 1. Washers: F5 FF -W-92. 8. Lag Screws or Lag Bolts: F5 FF -B-561. a. Expansion Shields, Expansion Nails and Drive Screw Devices: F5 FF -5-525. 10. Toggle Bolts: FS FF -8-588 1 1. Bar or Strap Anchors: ASTM A 515 carbon steel bars. F. Plywood Exposed or not exposed Faces in the following places (i.e. roof decking). 1. &rade equal to CDX. G. &rounds and Nailers: No. 1, KD, Southern Yellow Pine, or No. 1, Douglas Fir -Larch, 1 Q% maximum M.G. — H. Gypsum Board Sheathing 1. Gypsum Sheathing Board: AN51/A5TM Ci Q; moisture resistant and fire resistant type; 1/2 inch thick nominal, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tongue and grooved edges; water repellent paper faces. _ PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. Installer must examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the carpentry work 15 to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in - a manner acceptable to the installer, 5.02 GUTTING AND PATCHING A. Contractor shall perform such work in his line as I5 usually required for plumbing; heating, electrical or other mechanics. He shall also furnish, of required sizes and forms, all furring at otherwise shown or specified, rough brackets, forms, etc., as required to properly carry out the intent of the work as shown by drawings and specifications. 5.05 GUARDS, RUNWAYS AND LADDERS A. Furnish, set and maintain substantial hoist ways, runways, or ladders leading from lowest level of building to roof, and serving conveniently for general use of all workmen. Provide all temporary work necessary for proper execution of this work. SECTION 06 100 PROM 4 f CARPENTRY WORK SECTION 06 100 5.04 TEMPORARY CLOSURES A. Protect all door openings, and other openings except windows when so required, with temporary batten doors, in plastered portions where weather conditions require. 5.05 INSTALLATION OF CABINET WORK A. Set and secure dabinet work in place rigid, plumb and square. B. Use purpose designed fixture attachments for mounted components. C. Counter -sink semi -concealed anchorage devices used to wall mount components and conceal with solid plugs of species to match surrounding wood. Place flush with surrounding surfaces. f"' D. Carefully scribe cabinet work which Is against other building materials; leaving gaps ', of 1/52 inch maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Install and adjust cabinet hardware to correct operation. F. Install hardware and accessories supplied under other sections for installation. install Items in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Ensure that mechanical and electrical items affecting this Section of work are properly placed, complete, and have been Inspected by the Architect prior to commencement of installation. 5.06 IN5TALLAYION OF FRAMING, FURRING AND STRIPPING A. Erect .wood framing, furring stripping and nailing members true to lines and levels. Do not deviate from true alignment more than 1 /4 inch. S. space members at 16" on center or as indicated. G. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths. D. Provide wood grounds and blocking of size and shape required for securing toilet accessories, finish hardware, door stops and trim for chalkboards, tackboards, etc. Install true to line, level, plumb, and well secured in place. Wood blacking or mailers on drywall metal framing systems shall be bolted In place. roll E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards using products equal to Simpson Strong Tie: 1. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts in contact with wood. r - SECTION 06100 PAC -7E 5 r r' CARPENTRY NORK SECTION 06100 2. Nail plywood to comply with the recommendations of the Amerlcan Plywood Association. S. countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. F. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with the recommendations of the "Manual for House Framing" of the National Forest Products Association. Gut, Join and tightly fit framing around other work. Vo not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise detailed. 6. Anchor and nail as shown, or If not shown, to comply with the "Recommended Nailing Schedule - Table 1 of the "Manual for House Framing" and other recommendations of the National Forest Products Association. S.01 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 216. B. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. C,. use screws when fastening gypsum board wherever possible. P. Treat cut edges and holes In moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. Treat or tape all jointing. 8.08 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall do all work necessary to cover and protect all masonry window sills and metal and wood door jambs and protect all new carpentry work or material -' from damage of any character. B. Any work damaged through neglect of above causes or by any other means shall be replaced by contractor without additional cost to the Owner. End of Section SECTION 06 100 PACGE 6 ARCHITECTURAL NOOP1NORK SECTION 06 400 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions ` of the contract, Including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Speclal. Conditions and r7eneral Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DE5CRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of each type of architectural woodwork is shown on the Drawings and In schedules. B. "Architectural rloodwork" is defined to include (in addition to items so designated on the drawings) all miscellaneous exposed wood members commonly known as Finish Carpentry or Millwork, unless such items are specified under another section of these specifications. G. The types of architectural woodwork include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1.Casework for Plastic Laminate and paint finish. 2.Transparent Finish for casework (Alternate). $.Standing and running trim for paint finish. 4.Wood Shelving for paint finish. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE t-. A. . Exaept as otherwise shown or speclf led, comply with specified provisions of the l Architectural Woodwork Institute (AK) "Quality Standards." B. The approved woodwork manufacturer must have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work. The Architect reserves the right to approve the woodwork manufacturer selected to furnish all of the woodwork. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned pians and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. B. submit samples of each specie which is to receive transparent finish at job site, as requested by the Architect. i PAGE 1 SECTION 06400 l ARCHITECTURAL kX00 WORK SECTION 06400 G. Submit full range of samples of each type of laminated plastic specified for color and/or pattern selection. 1.05 FIELD DIMENSIONS A. The woodwork manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by Job conditions and shall show on his shop drawings all required field measurements beyond his control. The general contractor and the woodwork manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field -dimensions. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. -- B. Do not deliver woodwork, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed In installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas which meet the requirements specifled for installation areas. 1.01 JOB CONDITIONS A. Examination of Substrate and Conditions: The Installer must examine the _ substrate and the conditions under which the work under this section is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work under this section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. B. Advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for woodwork Installation areas. Do not install woodwork until the required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized In installation areas. G. Maintain temperature and relative humidity as required for a tolerance of plus or minus 1 % of the specified optimum moisture content until woodwork receives specified finishes. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions until acceptance of the work by the Owner. D. Protect installed woodwork from damage by other trades until Owner's acceptance of the work. Advise Contractor of required protection procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS SECTION 06 400PAGE 2 ` ARCHITECTURAL INOOPY40RK SECTION 06400 A. casework and shelving for paint finish. 1.AWI Section 400 2.AWI quality - custom grade S.Paint Grade birch veneer plywood and birch hardwood trim 5. casework and shelving for transparent finish. 1.A.WI quality - custom grade 2.Maple veneer plywood and maple hardwood trim C. Plastic laminate for counter tops, casework and trim: 1.comp1y with the requirements of "Publicption No. L.DI" by the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) for the following: a. Horizontal Surfaces: NEMA General -Purpose Type, nominal 0.050" thickness. b. Post -Formed Surfaces: NEMA Post -Forming Type, nominal 0.042" thickness. c. Vertical Surfaces: NEMA Vertical -Surface Type, nominal 0.050" thickness. d. Sacking:.026" thick, Backer type (high pressure). 2.5urface finish: a. Provide plastic laminate equal to Wilson Art solid colors, velvet finish as selected by the Architect from standard patterns. D. Synthetic composite Boards: 1. in addition to AWI requirements, NO WAFER OR CHIP ,SOARD5 will be allowed in any architectural woodwork items. E. Cabinet Hardware: 1. Hinges: Grass # 1200 with a 1000 Base Plates 2. Pulls: Doors and Drawers, Stanley 4454 U5261P 5. cabinet Locks: #1654- 1" U526D by Sargent (12regd.) 4. Shelf Standards: KV #255 Nickel Finish S. Shelf Supports: KV #256 Nickel Finish 6. Drawer Guides: KV 1500, full extension, '15 pound rated PART 5 EXECUTION 4 5.01 PREPARATION A. condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas SECTION 06400 PAGE 5 ARCHITECTURAL AOOVbNORK - SECTION 06400 prior to installing. B. Backprime woodwork on all surfaces which will be concealed with one coat of wood primer. Schedule delivery to allow time for application and drying of backprime coat before installation of woodwork. 5.02 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Install, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. B. Gut to fit unless specified to be shop -cut to exact size. Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners: — G. Distribute defects allowed in the quality grade specified to the best overall advantage, when installing job assembled woodwork items. _ 5.03 INSTALLATION OF CASEWORK A.. install casework in a manner consistent with the specified Ouality Grade to be plumb level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as using concealed shims. B. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, conceal end fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work. 8.04 INSTALLATION OF PLASTIC LAMINATE TRIM A. Install in proper sequence in accordance with Shop Drawings. Attach to supports — with concealed mechanical fasteners or approved adhesive. Do not nail or fasten through exposed face. B. Plastic laminates shall be bonded to a core material, 'such as plywood, using adhesives and techniques as recommended by reliable adhesive manufacturers, and National Association of Plastic Fabricators Specification osl-1008. Provide backing sheet. C. Where plastic laminate finished elements are Integral part of wood casework, provide same Gtuallty Grade specifled for other portions of casework. V. Fabricate with plastic laminate matching other exposed surfaces, unless otherwise shown at all exposed edges. E. Cut openings in plastic laminate finished tops for equipment which Is to be installed SECTION 06400 #'AGE 4 r ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 06400 under other sections of these specifications. Verify sizes of opening with actual size of equipment to be used, prior to making openings. Form inside corners to a radius of not less than 116". After sawing, rout and file cutouts to ensure smooth, crack -free edges. seal exposed edges after cutting with a waterproofing material recommended by the plastic laminate manufacturer. 5.05 ADJUST AND GLEAN. A. Repair damaged or defective work as directed by Architect. B. Glean exposed Interior and exterior surfaces. G. clean shop finished woodwork, touch-up finish as required and remove and refinish damaged or soiled areas of finish. End of Section SECTION 06400 PACPE 5 YVATER REPELLENT COATING SECTION 0 7 1 7 5 PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including OeneralCondltions,Supplementary General Conditions, 5peclal Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. r" 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The extent of all water repellent coatings shall be to all exposed to the exterior C- decorative concrete masonry units. r B. The following type of water repellent is included under this section: 1.5pray applied masonry water repellent for face brick masonry units. C. Roofing, sealants, vapor barriers, base and metal flashings and other moisture protection Items are specified under other headings. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. 5eution 04200 Unit Masonry (Face Brick) 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for application of product and over spray protection. B. Protect all In place work from over spray. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Architect for approval 5 copies of specifications for all types of water repellents before any materials are ordered for the same; installation instructions are to be included in this submittal B. Each type of water repellant shall be guaranteed against leakage of water, excessive deterioration or otherwise, failing to perform as required within the guarantee period, due to failure of materials or workmanship. The period of guarantee is for a term of 5 years after acceptance of the building by the Owner and Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Masonry water repellant shall be equal to PRIME-A-PELL 200, that is manufactured SECTION 0 7 1 7 5 c PAGE T ViATER REPELLENT COATING SECTION 01115 by Chemprobe Corporation. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. Proceed with water repellant coating only after substrate construction and. penetration work has been completed. Installer shall not commence his operations until all substrate and other conditions are acceptable to him for a satisfactory installation., 5.02 PROTECTION A. Protect all items and surfaces not to receive this repellant coating. 5.05 IN5TALLATION A. Proceed with work under this heading only when weather conditions comply with manufacturers recommendations. S. All water repellant products shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. all surfaces shall be dry and compatible in every other way to provide a complete and satisfactory, water repellant installation. C. All exterior surfaces of masonry shall be given one brush or spray coat of Clearwater repellent coating applied in accordance with manufacturers specific written directions. Care shall be taken to not over spray or 'over -run other adjacent materials. Special care should be taken to protect the exposed steel and metal wall panels. 5.05 CLEAN UP A. As recommended by the manufacturer for applied surfaces. End of Section SECTION 01 1 Z 5 PAGE 2 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 012 10 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide full batt type insulation at all exterior wails and over ceiling areas as indicated on the Drawings. B. Ridge cavity wall insulation at face brick/cmu exterior walls as indicated on the Drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's speclfications and installation instructions for each type of Insulation required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Do not allow insulation materials to become wet, soiled or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. FART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Wall insulation shall be equal to Owens/Corning Fiberglass "Light Density Thermal Insulation, 6 " thickness, "R" value of 1 a, unfaced'and a" thickness, "R" value of 30, unfaced. B. Cavity wall insulation - equal to Certain Teed WP225 , 3 inch thickness, plain faced, "R" value of 13. PART 3. EXECUTION s.01 INSTALLATION A. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the insulation SECTION O'7 21 O PAGE 1 5UILPING INSULATION _ SECTION 0121 O work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. po not proceed with the insulation work until substrate is satisfactory. -- S. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case; including method of support or anchorage to the substrate, as appropriate for each application indicated. if printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the.work. C. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire surface to be insulated. Out and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. V. ,apply a single layer of insulation of the thickness indicated or the reguired thickness for the thermal value indicated, unless otherwise shown or re#uired to make up the total thickness. E. Apply insulation units of the type shown to the substrate by the method indicated. if not otherwise indicated and except for units resting on horizontal surfaces, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. F. Ridge wall cavity insulation shall be installed according to manufacturers recommendations between face brick and cmu back up wall. G. The General contractor shall provide a letter, certification or M5p5 sheet stating that all Insulations installed are fabricated of Asbestos Free Material. End of Section SECTION 01210 PA&S 2 r EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM PART GENERAL SECTION 0'7241 i 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Composite wall cladding of rigid insulation and applied coating. B. Coating applied directly to rigid insulation board substrate. 1.05 RELATED SECTIONS �- A. Section 0121 O - Building Insulation G B. Section OT 520 - Built Up Roofing and Sheet Metal: Perimeter flashings. C. Section 0'1900 - Caulking and Sealants: Perimeter sealant seal. D. Section 09250 - Gypsum ^allboard Systems. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section approved by manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for system fire resistance ratings flame/smoke ratings of finish to 25 /450 for finish system. 1.06 REFERENCES A. AN51/A5TM 02 642 - Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics. B. A5TM 65,78.- Preformed Cellular Polystyrene thermal Insulation. 1.0? 5UBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: SECTION 0'1241 i PAGE 1 EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM SECTION 0"? 2 41 1. Indicate wall and soffit joint pattern and joint details. 2. Provide data on system materials, product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. s. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions, Indicate preparation, required, installation techniques and jointing requirements. B. Samples: 1. submit four, 12 x 12 inch size samples illustrating coating color and texture range for selection. c. Mock-up 1. construct one field sample panel, 2 x 2 foot, Of system materials illustrating method of attachment, surface finish, color, and texture . 2. Locate where directed. 5. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the Work. 1.06 AELIYERY, STORAGE, ANP HANDLING A. Protect adhesives and finish materials from freezing by storing in an environment recommended by manufacturer. 1.09 PRO.IECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install finish when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. B. Maintain this temperature during and 24 hours after installation of finish. PART 2 PRODUGT5 2.01 MATERIALS A. Polystyrene Board Insulation: conformance Type Fire Rating Thickness Board Size Board Tolerances: Squareness SECTION 01241 ASTM c5 i 8, Type I Molded Flame spread 25, smoke developed 450 Thickness indicated on the plans 24 X 46 inch 1/52 inch -from square PAGE 2 EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM SECTION 0'724 1 Length 1/ 16 inch Width 1 / 16 inch Thickness 1/52 inch Flatness 1/52 inch in 4 feet Compressive Strength Minimum 10 psi Water Absorption In accordance with ANSI/ASTM V2842, 8 percent by volume maximum Edges Square edges B. Insulation Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer - AGM FREE. G. Primer/Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer - AGM FREE. V. Coating Reinforcement: Standard and heavy duty glass fiber mesh, woven, treated for improved bond with coating. E. Coating: Synthetic vinyl composition Modified polymer, air curing, containing chopped glass fibers, color and texture to simulate Architectural Pre -cast Concrete Panels. F. Portland cement: Type I conforming to ASTM G 1 So. G. Water: Potable, free of all foreign matter. H. Accessories 1.sealant Materials: Recommended by coating manufacturer. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. synergy B. Dryvit G. R -Wall V. Sto-Wall 2.08 MIXING A. Mix finishing materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's written Instructions. PART 8 EXECUTION 8.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry. SECTION 0'7 241 PAGE 3 r EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM SECTION 0-7 241 B. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of fins or irregularities. _ 3..02 INSTALLATION A. Insulation 1. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Place boards in a method to maximiie tight joints. Stagger vertical joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions. s. Gut control and expansion joints through insulation to align with corresponding joints in substrate. 4. Secure boards to substrate by adhesive attachment and mechanical attachment to achieve a continuous flush insulation surface. 5. Apply score joints as indicated on the drawings by'use of router. B. coating 1. Install primer/adhesive, coating and reinforcement in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. use Heavy duty "Panzer" type mesh below 6' above ground. — 2. Lap reinforcement edges and ends 2 inches minimum. 5. Apply finish to a thickness of 1 / 16 inch minimum and 1 /4 inch maximum. 4. Apply sealant at finish perimeter and control joints in accordance with Section Oi 0100. 8.03 PROTECTION A. Po not permit finish surface to become soiled or damaged. 5.04 ASBESTOS FREE MATERIALS A. The General contractor shall provide a letter, certification or MSPS sheet stating that all insulations installed are fabricated of Asbestos Free Material. _ ENP OF SECTION PAGE 4 SECTION 01241 BUILT UP ROOMNG AND SHEETMETAL SECTION 01520 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This contract shall include all roofing materials and sheetmetal flashings required to complete the work as specified herein and called for on the drawings. B. For the purpose of establishing a standard, the products specifled herein shall be equal to the Shuller Company. Alternate products of equal quality will be considered subject to the final approval of the Architect. C. This contract shall provide a warranty as hereinafter called for to cover the entire roofing system. 1.08 RELATED WORK A. Section Ob 100 Carpentry Work: Roof Framing Decking Systems B. Section 15 'and 16: Mechanical and electrical penetrations - Provided by the Owner. 1.04 JOB SITE STORAGE OF FELTS A. Roofing felts shall be delivered to the JOB SITE in a dry condition from the contractor's warehouse and shall be stockpiled on pallets in a vertical position. Felts shall then be covered with plastic sheets securely tied In place to protect felt rolls from rain or other moisture penetration. f_ B. where felts are temporarily stockpiled on the roof wood pallets shall be used to elevate rolls from the deck. Felts shall be kept covered until incorporated into the roofing systems. C. Care shall be maintained throughout the work to prevent overloading of the existing structure with concentrated piles of roofing materials. Such materials shall be distributed over the roof such that excessive loading of the structures does not occur. SECTION O? 520 PAC -7E 1 BUILT UP ROOFING ANP SHEETMETAL SECTION 015 20 1.05 NOTIFICATION A. The Architect shall be notified 45 hours in advance of the starting of any roofing _ operations. B. Roofing materials shall be inspected and approved by the Architect at the job site _ before the application is begun. 1.06 SUBMITTALS _. A. submit manufacturer's published data or brochures detailing exact system proposed for this pro jest. _ B. When requested by the Architect, submit samples of the roofing system to be used. 1.01 QUALITY CONTROL AND WARRANTY A. Roofing contractor shall be approved by the Manville Corporation prior to commencement of the roofing installation. B. contractor shall arrange for such inspections as may be required by the Manville Corporation as the work Is in progress. G.Upon completion, furnish to the Owner a five (5) year warranty. The contractor shall include in his bid the cost of such a warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Roofing materials shall be equal to 5huller #4&N& - Four Pig gravel surfaced fiberglass built up roofing system. _ B. Base sheet shall be 6lasbase weighing not less than sb pounds per square. Apply glass base over plywood decking. _ C. cap sheet shall be &lasPly IV with flooded gravel surfacing. D. Asphalt shall be Type III of first quality and shall have flow point not exceeding 155 _ degrees F. It shall be shipped to the JOB 51TE in heavy paper barrels and each container shall be labeled. Asphalt shall 'conform.to the requirements of the SECTION 0'15 20 PAC70 2 PM i' BUILT UP ROOFING ANP SHEETMETAL P" SECTION 01520 Roofing Systems Technical Committee, a joint committee of the ARMA and the NBCA. ! PME. Plastic cement shall be an elastic waterproof material that will not stain stone, corrode copper, or be affected by long exposure to extreme outside temperature. It shall form a thin, tough skin on exposed surfaces, but remain soft ,roll and plastic underneath. Cement shall adhere to metal and masonry and be mixed to proper consistency. i.. F. where metal counterflas hinge are indicated, use 24 gauge galvanized sheetmetal. Use similar material for miscellaneous metal flashings required throughout the project. r G. Sheetmetal for fascia and gravel guard shall be 24 gauge Zinc Grip and 26 gauge standing seams, all of prefinished metals, equal to MBG -Signature 200 series colors„, (to match existing profile of addition at the Arnett -Benson side). Backing plates shall be 24 gauge galvanized sheets. Finish to match existing paint in appearance. H. Gant strips shall be 2 Inches thick of 45 degree type and of asphalt impregnated cane fiber, 4 Inches high. Base flashing material for curbs shall be GlasPly IY. 2.02 ROOFING A. The contractor shall inspect all surfaces scheduled to receive roofing or related waterproofing, and shall report to the Architect any conditions deemed unsuitable to receive the particular application called for herein. B. All roof areas shall be covered with the Shuller Four Ply gravel surfaced fiberglass built up roofing system applied in strict accordance with manufacturers specification #40NG. C. where sloping roof decks are shown start both roofing sheets at low side and work upslope lapping each sheet 5 Inches over the previous sheet. Run roils parallel to incline. where laps occur show a small amount of asphalt to Insure complete adhesion of cap sheet. I . D. Asphalt pots shall be equipped with accurate temperature gauges and asphalt shall not be heated beyond 415 degrees. r SECTION 0 i 5 20 PAGE 5 s BUILT UP ROOFING ANP SHEETMETAL SECTION 0"15 20 PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION OF FLASHINC76 A. This contract shall include the installation of vent flashings, pitch pans, expansion joints, reglets, flashings, heater vents, fresh air intake vents and related items as called for on the Prawings or herein. S. Flashings shall be installed after glass base underlayment sheet is laid and prior to installation of the weathering sheet.: C. set flashings in a mopping of hot asphalt and strip in with one ply of glass base, 56 X 56 inches, mopped solid to underlayment sheet. D. Set cant strips by mopping to insulation boards prior to placement of underlayment sheet. Extend glass base sheet up cant and onto wall or fascia construction. ' E. Mere curbed openings occur, furnish a fiber cant, neatly mitered at corners, mopped into place over roofing felts and covered with one layer of glass base, -- mopped on. F. Extend cap Sheet up cant boards and cut at top of cant. G. Cap sheet for cants, curbs and wall flashings shall be one layer of 61asPIy IV mopped into place over previously described roofing layers. H. install all flashings systems in strict accordance with manufacturers specifications as they may be applicable. 5.02 GRAVEL &UARa A. Fascia and gravel guards shall be neatly broken to the details shown and installed straight and level with the lines of the building. Fabricate In lengths required and install with butt joints set in plastic cement. Lay out work so that pieces smaller than 5 foot in length do not occur. Fascia and gravel guards at the Arnett - Benson senior Center to match existing profile. B. Back prime all zinc grip metal prior to placement with a good grade of oil base metal primer. co. Provide a 15# felt behind the gravel guard. Felt shall be mopped over roofing felts, lapped b inches thereon, and turned down over wood backing behind the gravel guard. Nail felt to wood backing with roofing nails and tin caps. Apply SECTION 01520 PASPE 4 r ift M BUILT UP ROOFING AND SHEETMETAL r 3 SECTION O'T520 backing plates at joints over the felt. D. Gravel guard shall be straight and true, set to a line and secured by nailing to rough wood fascias. Nails shall be galvanized 4d box, evenly spaced, and Installed without denting metal. If required, make pilot holes in metal to prevent dimpling of exposed surfaces. 5.08 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHINGS AND DETAILS A. Miscellaneous roofing details not specifically mentioned in these specifications such as pitch pans, expansion joints, flashings at projections through roofs, etc., shall be in strict compliance with recommended procedures outlined by the roofing manufacturer and subject to the Architects approval. 5.04 INSTALLATION OF SHEET METAL A. Conform to drawing details Included in AISI, GDA, NAAMM, SMACNA and NBCA manual. B. All sheet metal shall be fabricated and installed to provide water and weathertight construction, set plumb, square an true in every respect. Sheet metal shall be set with lines and align sharp and true; plain surfaces shall be free of waves and buckles. Joints and seams in plain surfaces shall be avoided where possible. 5.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust all surfaces for complete and proper fit. B. Remove excess plastic cement, sealant materials and smears from adjacent surfaces and working surfaces as work progresses. C. On completion of work, recheck for spillage or droppings of plastic cement or asphalt products. Remove with a cleaning agent approved by the Architect. D. Remove all debris resulting from these operations from the site. 5.06 PROTECTION A. After Installation, the Contractor shall adequately protect the exposed surfaces of the flashings and edge guards from damage by subsequent trades or from contaminants End of section F SECTION Owl 5 20 I PAGE 5 CAULKINCG ANP SEALANTS SECTION 07 q 00 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide caulking in conjunction with Interior painting operations and as otherwise indicated on Drawings for•interior caulking. 5. Provide sealant where indicated on the Drawings in conjunction with sound seals, and as otherwise noted. C. Perform all work required to complete the joint preparation, joint packing or filler, priming, caulking and sealing indicated by the Drawings and specifled herein. Furnish all supplementary items necessary. 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Section 04200 Unit Masonry 5. section oi52o Built up Roofing and sheet Metal C. Section OaQOo Painting 1.04 QUALITY A5SURANCE A. Sealant material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable provided it complies with the requirements of this section. 1. Pecors chemical corporation 2. 5onneborn Building Products, Inc. 5. Products Research and chemical corporation 4. Tremco Manufacturing company S. W. R. &race and company b. General Electric company -T. Mamgco International, Inc. SECTION O Z q 00 FACE 1 CAULKING AND SEALANTS SECTION 07 900 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in unopened containers as packaged by the manufacturer. Store In a manner to protect materials from the weather. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's published data for sealants. show each color available. Color selection will be by the Architect. B. When requested by the Architect, submit samples of cured sealants and a 6" long sample of each type of joint backup if required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. sealant: Equal to Vulkem 1 16 polyurethane sealant as manufactured by Mameco International, Inc. of Cleveland, Ohio. B. Sealant Primer: As recommended by the manufacturer for each type of surface application. Co. Caulking Compound: One part acrylic latex caulk for general purpose interior caulking capable of being painted with latex or oil base paints. PART 5. EXECUTION 8.01 PREPARATION A. Examine all surfaces to receive sealant and'report all conditions not acceptable. Installation shall be deemed as acceptance of the surface. B. Glean all surfaces and joints thoroughly, removing all foreign matter, dust, oil, grease, water surface, dirt, frost, old caulking material and previously applied paint or primer. C. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with sealant or caulk manufacturer's written Instructions and recommendations. D. Remove loose mill scale from steel surfaces. Remove dirt, olL or grease by solvent cleaning and wipe surfaces. All surfaces must be clean and dry. Any protective coating on building materials that will impair sealant bond shall be removed. E. Report unsatisfactory surfaces to the Architect. SECTION 0'7 900 . PAC7E 2 7 . CAULKING AND SEALANTS 7 SECTION 01 9 00 5.02 APPLICATION OF SEALANTS A. Follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding preparation, priming, application life and application procedure. 5. Apply masking tape where required in continuous strips In alignment with joint edge. Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed. G. Apply sealant under pressure with gun having nozzle of proper size, or other appropriate means. Provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints. D. Neatly point or tool sealant to provide proper contour. Use clean water -wet tool or tooling solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored sealant. 5.05 JOINT SIZES A. sealant and caulking: Depth equal to 5 times joint width. 5.04 APPLICATION OF CAUj..KING A. caulking: Caulk joints before final coat of paint Is applied to adjacent surface. Apply caulking with a pressure. gun having a nozzle of proper size to fit joint. Completely fill joint and firmly tool against backing to make a smooth, convex bed, and assure good adhesion. caulking shall develop a firm skin before paint is allowed. 5.05 GLEANING A. Remove excess caulking or sealant materials and smears from adjacent surfaces as work progresses. B. On non -porous surfaces excess uncured sealant shall be removed with a solvent moistened cloth immediately. On porous surfaces excess sealant should be allowed to cure overnight, then removed by lightly wire brushing or sanding. All adjacent surfaces shall be clean and free from stains. C. Remove all debris resulting from these operations from the site. End of Section P SECTION O? 900 PAGE 5 HOLLON METAL POORS 4 FRAMES 7 SECTION 48150 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division '1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of hollow metal doors and frames Is shown on the drawings and schedules; all shall be custom hollow metal work. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry S. Section 06104 - Carpentry Work Co. Section 06 100 - Finish Hardware D. Section 08800 - Vass and Vazing 1.04 OUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide hollow metal doors and frames manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work.. B. The Contractor shall not submit any hollow metal manufacturer for the Architect's approval without first verifying that the proposed manufacturer, facilities are adequate to perform the work in accordance With the contract Documents. The manufacturer shall have been in the business for at least five years and he shall have a record for financial responsibility and for doing work of the quality required by the contract Documents. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. SDI -100 - Recommended Specifications -Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel Door Institute. B. Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. (UL), and Factory Mutual (FM), as applicable to fire rated hollow metal door frames. Co. ASTM A525 Steel Sheet, Zinc coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, General Requirements. SECTION 05 154 PAIGE 1 HOLLOW METAL POOKS 4 FRAMES SECTION 08150 D. ASTM A56Q = Steel, Carbon, Hot -Roiled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. E. ASTM A59 1 - Steel Sheet, Cold Rolled, Electrolyte Zinc Coated. F. ASTM AS66 - Steel, Carbon, COld-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1.Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and erection of hollow metal doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, conditions at openings, details of construction, locations and Installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements and details of Joints and connections. Show anchorages and necessary items. B. samples 1.Submit 12" x 12" sample corner section of typical frame showing details of construction and finish. 2.Submit samples of all accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable provided it complies with the Contract Documents. " 1.HOLLOW METAL Steelcraft Deansteel Republic Steel Corporation Hol -O -Met, Inc.. Tex-5teel Corporation 2.02 MATERIALS A. Doors I . Exterior and Interior: 16 gage stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A52S. G60. B. Frames SECTION 05150 PAC7E 2 a HOLL OV4 METAL DOORS 4 FRAMES L SECTION 08150 1. Interior: 16 gage steel conforming to ASTM A566. 2. Exterior: 14 gage steel conforming to ASTM AS25, 660. G. Protective coatings 1. Bituminous coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion. 2. Primer: Manufacturer's, standard primer for baked primer, Fed. Spec. TT -P-6 4 D. P. Accessories 1. Jamb Anchors a. Masonry constructlon: 'T' strap type, corrugated and galvanized and expansion anchors at existing masonry wall construction. b. Stud Construction:'ZI type, same gage and material as frame. 2. silencers: Resilient Rubber 5. &lazing Bars: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style screws. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Frames 1. Form metal frames to size and shapes Indicated from cold rolled, pickled, and oiled steel sheets with clean smooth surfaces. Fabricate all frames from 14 gauge steel unless otherwise indicated. All frames fabricated and assemble as complete welded unit. &rind all welds smooth. 2. construct frames strong, rigid, neat and free from defects, true and fully welded unit type construction at joints. Miter joints and continuously arc -weld full depth and width of frames. Dress smooth and Invisible, welds of joints on exposed surfaces. S. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap with templates, frames to receive mortised Pow hardware. Provide reinforcing plates for surface applied hardware. Reinforce for hinges with'* gauge steel; for locks and other hardware cutouts with 12 gauge steel; for surface applied hardware with 12 gauge steel. r4. Provide 26 gauge galvanized cover boxes In back of all hardware cutouts. Punch frames for rubber or vinyl silencers; three on lock side of single doors and one for 4 SECTION OS 150 PAGE 5 HOLLOW METAL MOORS 4 FRAMES SECTION 08150 each leaf in heads of double door frames. S. Provide jamb anchors for frames set in stud partitions, welded to back of frames-, not less than 14 gauge, of design required for type of stud, 4 anchors for openings up to *7'-6" and one additional anchor for each additional SO" height or part thereof. locate anchors immediately above each hinge reinforcing plate and one below the top hinge reinforcing on both sides. 6. Provide 14 gauge steel fixed floor clips fastened to bottom of each jamb member and drill for 5/8" anchor bolts for floor connection. 'i. Provide temporary steel spreaders fastened across bottom 'of frames. Label each frame before shipping with metal or plastic tags to show their location, size door swing and other pertinent information. 8. Rubber Door Silencers: Drill stops to receive 8 silencers on single -door frames and 4 silencers on double -door frames. Install plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. Furnish and install rubber door silencers. Q. Plaster Guards: Provide 22 gauge plaster guards for mortar boxes, welded to the frame, at the back of all finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. B. Doors 1. Fabricate in conformance with SDI -100 and to meet Grade 11, Model 4 2. Gore Construction (new exterior door at Arnett -Benson Classroom ONLY): For 1-5/4 inch doors with Polystyrene core shall have a uu„ factor of 0.24, a •R" factor of 4.1 7 and a STC rating of 82. The rigid core of polystyrene foam board shall be bonded to face sheets with an adhesive. Compressive strength of the core shall be not less than 1500 psf and a shear strength of not less than 18 psi. The strength of the bond between the polystyrene and the steel face sheets shall exceed the strength of the polystyrene, so that delamination does not occur under any operating condition. S. Vertical edges shall be reinforced by a 16 gage minimum continuous steel channel extending full height of the door. The top and bottom edges shall be reinforced with 16 gage inverted channels spot welded to the face sheets. 4. All doors shall be mortised and reinforced to allow fleld application of hinges and locks in accordance with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware contractor. Fringe reinforcement - 7 gage, Lock - 12 gage, Closure - 14 gage, Lock Support - 20 gage, all surface mounted hardware 16 gage. 2.04 SHOP PAINTING SECTION 08150 PAGE 4 r HOLLOW METAL DOORS a FRAMES SECTION 08159 A. Glean ferrous metal and treat chemically to prepare for maximum paint adhesion. Apply coat of rust -inhibitive metal primer by spraying or dipping. Bake oven -dry prime coat to secure hard, abrasion -resistant finish. Finish surfaces smooth and free from irregularities and rough spots. PART 5 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer's data, and as herein specifled. B. Leave shipping spreaders on frames until complete wadi system surrounding the frame is rigidly secured to frame, floors and ceilings. set Bottom anchors of frame to floor with power -driven fasteners or expansion bolts (not lead shields). C. At stud gypsum walls, install frames to double stud bucks with bolts and screws, welded. set frame with jambs plumb, head level and frame in true plane. V. Hang doors in frames as scheduled. Welding of hinges to doors or frames will not be permitted. Follow recommendations of the manufacturer for installation of the hardware. Install hardware In location as provided by door manufacturer. E. coat contact surfaces of any dissimilar, metals with bituminous, base paint and let dry before installation. F. Install all surface mounted hardware taking care that all attachment devices are anchored in their reinforcement materials Inside the door frames. 6. After installation, adjust all hardware items for correct, easy and efficient operation. H. Install hollow metal frames plumb and square, incorrect location indicated on drawings and with a maximum diagonal distortion of 1 / 16 inch. Ensure frames are securely and rigidly anchored to adjacent construction. . i. Final Adjustments: check and readjust all operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective -work, Including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. J. Aluminum sliding Window unit: verify that the area to receive this unit is constructed to a cased opening prof lie and that all dissimilar material items have been protected. Fabricator to coordinate all aspects of these units with the sliding door supplier to provide for a complete and proper installation. installers to coordinate all flashings. 8.02 CLEANING SECTION 05150 PA09 5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS 4 FRAMES SECTION 081 50 A. Remove all smudge, dirt, oil, grease or adhered materials which might affect painting. Remove all excess materials and debris from site. End of Section SECTION 08150 PAC7E 6 NO= VOOKS SECTION 08210 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the -contract, including -General Conditions, supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent and location of each type of wood door is shown on the drawings and in schedules. 5. The type of doors required include the following: 1.5olid core flush wood doors. 1.05 GENERAL A. Protection of Wood Doors: Protect wood doors during transit, handling and storage to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Store In a dry location and stack in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The Installer shall advise the Contractor of proper procedures required for protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of the work. 5. Openings: cut and trim openings through doors and panels as ehown. Comply with the applicable requirements of NSMA 1.5.1 for the kind and quality of doors shown and specified. Except as otherwise Indicated, trim openings with solid wood moldings of the profile shown. 1.04 RELATED WORK A. Section 06'700 Finish Hardware S. Section 08800 Glass and Glazing C'. Section 09 a00 Painting 1.05 SU5MITTALS A. Shop Drawings, Wood Doors: Submit shop drawings indicating the location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door. details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and pertinent data. SECTION 06210 PA&M 1 woos DOORS SECTION 0521 O 8. Manufacturer's Data, wood Doors: For information only, submit 2 copies of door m,anufarturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of wood door required, including other data as may be required to show compliance with the specified requirements. Indicate by transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been transmitted to the Installer. 1.Inciude details of core and edge construction, trim for openings, and similar components. C. Guarantees, wood Doors: submit 2 copies of written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by the Manufacturer, Installer and _ Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show photographing of construction below in fere veneers, as defined in NWMA Standard Door Guarantee, except the NwMA provision for refunding the price received by the door manufacturer for any defective door shall not apply. The guarantee shall also include finishing and reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. Guarantee shall be in effect during the following period of time after the date of acceptance. 1.For solid Core Flush Interior Rated Doors: Five Years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS r A. Paine Door Company B. weyerhauser Roddis Plywood Corporation C. Curtis Companies Inc. D. substitutions: Items of same function and performance are acceptable. 2.02 INTERIOR FLUSH DOORS A. where interior flush doors are shown or scheduled, provide doors complying with the applicable requirements of NWMA l.S.l and as herein specified. 13. Gtuality Grade: All interior doors shall be ' 1 3/4" thick, Awl; custom grade. Doors shall be manufactured to comply with the requirements of UL 20 minute fire rating as required. SECTION 08210 PALM 2 t NtOOP POOR -5 SECTION 05210 PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging. B. Fit doors to frames and machine for hardware, to whatever extent not previously worked at the factory. c, install wood door in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as shown. Adjust for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge. p. Install wood doors plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1 / 16 inch. E. Install hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08'700. F. See painting sections of these specifications for requirements for finishing wood doors. coordinate delivery and storage to comply with the requirements for sealing tops and bottoms of wood doors immediately upon delivery to project site. 6. Fit wood doors accurately in their respective frames within the following clearances: SECTION 06210 7 PA6E 3 G. poor veneers shall be Birch with matching Birch edges for transparent finish. 1 Gore type: solid wood particle board, or mineral with wood lock blocks, as required by manufacturer to comply with fire rating and guarantee period. roll t a. Vertical Edges: Birch for transparent finish. E. Vx55 stop$: Anemostat 5FL.-12 5 stop. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with requirements of AWI Gzuality standards. k B. Fabricate fire rated doors to UL labeling requirements. { C. Prepare doors to receive hardware. a. Bevel strike edge of single acting doors 1 /8 inch in 2 inches. l,! I E. Make cut-outs and provide stops for glass. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging. B. Fit doors to frames and machine for hardware, to whatever extent not previously worked at the factory. c, install wood door in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as shown. Adjust for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge. p. Install wood doors plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1 / 16 inch. E. Install hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08'700. F. See painting sections of these specifications for requirements for finishing wood doors. coordinate delivery and storage to comply with the requirements for sealing tops and bottoms of wood doors immediately upon delivery to project site. 6. Fit wood doors accurately in their respective frames within the following clearances: SECTION 06210 7 PA6E 3 INOOD DOORS SECTION 08210 .lambs and Head: 5/52" Bottom at Threshold or Carpet: 1/611 Bottom where no Threshold or Carpet: s/8" 5.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely as directed by the ,architect. B. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation as directed by the Architect. C. ,advise the contractor of proper procedures required for protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of work. End of Section SECTION 082 10 PAC7E 4 FINISH HAROYVARE SECTION 052700 PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and C6enerai Requirements (Divislon 1 ), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of finish hardware is scheduled at the end of this section. The required types of finish hardware include (but are not necessarily limited tot the following: 1.Butts and hinges, lock and latch sets, closers, trim units, kick plates, silencers, and exit devices. 5. certain manufactured items which have hardware furnished as an integral part of their assembly are not required under this heading. G. Note that hardware for this project must be lever style to meet with compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1 990 (ADA). t" 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Section 06150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A 1 15.1 - Door and Frame Preparation for Mortise Door Locks for 1-5/4 inch floors. B. AN5I A 1 15.2 - Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-5/4 inch Poore. ANSI A 1 15.4 - Door and Frame Preparation for Lever Extension Flush Bolts. I D. ANSI A 1 15.5 - Frame Preparation for 151 t 190 Series Deodlock Strikes. r E. ANSI A 1 15.9 - Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single Acting. l F. ANSI A 156.1 - Butts and Hinges. 6. ANSI A 156.2 - Locks and Lock Trim H. ANSI A 156.5 - Exit Devices. SF.CTION 08'700 C�' PASPE 1 FINISH HARV?XARE SECTION 08 0100 I. ANSI A 156.4 - Door Controls (closers). J. ANSI A 156.6 - Architectural Door Trim. -' K. ANSI A 15 &."1 - Template Hinges. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. As soon as practicable and not later than 20 days after award of General — Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval, six copies of the finish hardware schedule complete with all details and a sample of each Individual item as may be requested. The General Contractor shall not award contract for finish hardware until samples and schedules have been approved by ~ the Architect. B. Finish Hardware Schedule shall be a complete detailed list of hardware required to meet requirements of the drawings and specifications. Co. Provide Architect with manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for ` each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for proper maintenance of hardware. D. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The furnishing of finish hardware shall be sub -contracted only to recognized and experienced supplier and who has in his employment an experienced hardware consultant who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work, for project hardware consultation to the Owner, Architect and Contractor. 1.0? UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES REQUIREMENTS A.' All hardware for openings requiring a UL label shall be furnished and installed in strict accordance with the requirements of underwriter's Laboratories. 1.06 TEMPLATES _ A. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames, and other work _ to be factory -prepared for the installation of hardware. Check the shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for the proper, installation of hardware. 1.09 COORDINATION SECTION 08'100 PADS 2 FINISH HARVY4ARE SECTION 05 07 00 A. coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each Item or package separately, with Identification related to the final hardware schedule, and inalude basic installation instructions In the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use of doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or aonfliats in the Information in the contract documents. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the times and to the locations (shop or field) for installation, as directed by the contractor. 1.10 SECURITY A. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet r installed. control the handling and installation of hardware items which are not I immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. t € ' 1.1 1 QUANTITIES A. Contractor shall verify the number of doors and other parts requiring hardware listed under an item and make his own quantities in making his quotation, as he will . be required to furnish hardware in accordance with the actual requirements of the drawings. In case of any omission or error In the hardware a5 scheduled, furnish hardware identical to that required for similar openings, as approved by the Architect. 1.1 2 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The Hardware Schedule is not complete with respect to the thickness of doors, hand and backset of hardware items, method of fastening and other detail requirements. Thoroughly check the drawings and door schedules and provide all required hardware for all openings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER5 A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable, provided it complies with the contraat Documents. r~ 1. LOCKSET5 AND LATCH5ETS Sargent 5000 Series SECTION 05100 PAGE 5 FINISH HAfZ17 NAKE SECTION 08'100 HINGES McKinney _ 5tanely . S. CLOSERS" . Sargent 1 230 Series _ 4. WALL STOPS Rockwood 5. PULLS, PLATE5, 5TOPS, BOLT5 AND MISCELLANEOU5 ITEMS, Triangle Brass, Checkmark, Trimco, Ives - 2.02 HARDWARE A. Provide items as listed in schedule at end of this section, complete to function as Intended. PART 5 EXECUTION _ 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting Is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, _ Install each item completely and then remove and store In a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each Item. Do not Install surface mounted Items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. B. Adjust and check each operating items of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended ' by manufacturer (graphite -type if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate _ freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. C. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and re -lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. SECTION 06'1 00 pGE 4, " FINISH HAP -VV AKE l7 SECTION 05 07 00 1 v. If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 'r0 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds 1 to move to a point s inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. E. The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall comply with this paragraph. For hinged doors, the force shall be applied perpendicular to the door at the door opener or so inches from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. 1.Exterior hinged doors shall not exceed 6.5 lbs. slight Increases in opening force shall be allowed where 8.5 lbs is Insufficient to compensate for air pressure differentials. 2.Interior hinged doors shall not require a force exceeding 5 Ib6. s.Fire doors shall be adjusted to meet the minimum opening force permitted by governing fire safety standards. F. Spoor closers shall be mounted parallel arm. G. Unless directed otherwise, all hardware shall be mounted at heights as recommended by the hardware industry. The hardware schedule submitted to the tl Architect shall show proposed mounting heights or locations of each hardware Item. 6.02 GENERAL, REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all required hardware although not speciflcally mentioned; trim such openings with hardware of equal quality and design to that specified for similar openings. No claims for extras will be allowed for any services or materials which, In the ,architect's opinion, should have been foreseen by the contractor and Included in his Proposal. B. r4here the exact types of hardware specifled are not adaptable to the finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having as nearly as practicable the same operation and quality as the types specified. C,.' Hardware supplier shall make an inspection of each Items, and after completion, notify the contractor, in writing, with a copy to the architect, of any hardware that has been improperly installed, it being understood that the contractor is entirely responsible for satisfactory performance of the completed work. 5.05 FASTENINGS A. Furnish hardware complete with all necessary screws, through -bolts and other i SECTION 08A700 PACSE 5 FINISH HARVINAKE SECTION 06 6100 fastenings of suitable type and size to assure a permanent concealed attachment and of finish to harmonize with the hardware. B. Provide concealed fastenings wherever possible. Where exposed, use countersunk Phillips oval -head type screws, (flat head for hinges) and match finish of hardware being attached. Do not attach hardware to metal frames with self -tapping or sheet metal screws. 8.04 INSTALLATION OF WEATHERSTRIPPING A. All weatherstripping shall be installed by experienced mechanics in accordance with methods recommended by manufacturer. S. All weatherstripping shall be continuous and not pieced in any run. Fasten all materials under this heading with screws or other fasteners to match adjacent background finish. G. Adjust weatherstripping so that installation will be permanently weathertight, permitting no infiltration of air or dust when doors are in a closed position Leave all weatherstripping in perfect working order upon completion. Set threshold units level and accurately aligned with the frames and .doors, and at the proper elevations for door operation. Shim, if necessary, for full continuous support of threshold at each edge and intermediate legs, if any. use non -corrosive shims of metal or plastic, set in adhesive or otherwise anchored against dislocation from impact forces of traffic upon the threshold. �. Notch thresholds and saddles at all jambs to ensure full width opening in one piece. Set in a bed of either butyl rubber sealant or polyisobutylene mastic sealant to completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture from every source. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant. 3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW - 1 Doors Marked 1, 5, 6, 8 Each to Have: 5 Butts TA2'7 14 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 US 10 McKinney 1 Lock 9 SK -i -D -15 -C -Ss Us 10 Best 1 Stop 40Q US 10 Rockwood 1 Kick Plate 10" X 2" LDW US 10 Rockwood 5 Silencers 1229A Trimco SECTION 0817'00 PAGE 6 _ FINISH HARVViARE SECTION 06'700 HW -2 Door Marked 2 To Have: 5 Butts TA21 14 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 U51 O 1 Exit 12-6515 ETI. U51 O 1 Closer E8 550 Us 10 1 Kickplate 10" X 2" Lata Us 10 1 stop 404 US 10 1 Gasket 568 HW -5 Doors Marked 5, 4 Each To Have: 5 Butts TA21 14 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 Us 10 1 Push 170c, Us 10 1 Pull 12 2 X 1 Or., US 10 1 closer EB 5 50 Us 10 1 Kick Plate 10" X 2" LVA U510 1 stop 404 5 silencers 122ciA HW -4 Doors Marked 1 To Have: 5 Butts TA21 14 4-1/2 X 4-1 /2 NRP USP 1 Exit 681 O ETL US 10 1 closure EB 550 - PSH Us 10 1 Kickplate 10" X 2" LDW Us 10 1 Threshold 1115 1 Door bottom 18061 DP 1 Weatherstripping 45062 DP HW -5 Poore Marked a Each Door Leaf To Have: 5 Butts T4A.5166 5 X 4-1 /2 NRP US 10 1 Exit 6615 ETL US 1 O 1 Cylinder 1 E14 US 10 1 Mullion 160 (one required) 1 closure EB 550 - PSH Us 10 1 Kick Plate 1 O" X 2" LDW Us 1 O 1 Threshold 1115 1 Door bottom 15061 DP McKinney Sargent Sargent Rockwood Rockwood Pemko McKinney Rockwood Rockwood Sargent Rockwood Rockwood Trimco McKinney Sargent Sargent Rockwood Pemko Pemko Pemko MaKinney Sargent Best Sargent Sargent Rockwood Pemko Pemko SECTION 05'100 FACM 9 FINISH HARVkXARE SECTION 08100 1 weatherstripping 45062 OP Pemko Hw-6 Doors Marked 1 1, 15, 14 (Existing doors to modify existing hardware) Each to Have: 1 Lock Q5K-`1-AB-15-G-55 U5 10 Best Hw - 9 Door Marked 12 (Existing doors to New Classroom) Each Door Leaf to Have: 2 Flush'Sol£s 55'1 U5 10 Rockwood 1 D.P. Strike 57 1 U510 Rockwood 1 Dead Bolt 85T-?-5-STK U51 O Best Hw-8 Door Marked 10 (Existing Front Entrance Door) Each to Have: 2 Trim 98-K- PTS U51 OB Sargent Note: Owners option to have thumb latch de -activated and leave hardware plate as is. All keyed locks shall be keyed to the existing key way system. End of Section SECTION 08'100 PAC -7E 8 &L -ASS AND 6LAZIN6 SECTION 08800 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General conditions, Special Conditions and &eneral Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. &lass and glazing for hollow metal frames and door vision panels. 1.03 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY A. Provide a written ten year warranty, unless noted otherwise, on new materials and installation. Provide documentation that glass meets these specifications. 1.04 SUSMITTALv A. Manufacturer's Data, bias: For Information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and Installation instructions for each type of glass required. Include test data substantiating that glass complies with specified requirements. Indicate that blazier has received copy of handling and glazing instructions. 8. Manufacturer's Data, blazing Materials: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, and installation instructions for each type of glazing sealant and compound, gasket and associated miscellaneous material required. Include manufacturer's published data, or letter of certification, or certified test laboratory report indicating that each material complies with the requirements and is intended generally for the applications shown. show by transmittal that one copy of each recommendation and instruction has been distributed to the Glazier. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - A. Manufacturer: The following manufacturers produce glass complying with the requirements of this project: 1. AS& Industries, Inc. 2. cE Mass Division of combustion Engineering, Inc. 3. PPG Industries, Inc. 4. Libbey Owens Ford .� j SECTION 08800 PAGE 1 .IA &LASS AND 6LAZIN6 SECTION 08800 2.02 &LASS A. Type I: Shall be Clear, 114" tempered glass. S. Type II: Wire &lass - , shall be 1/4 inch thick clear polished plate wire glass with ,h inch square wire mesh meeting u.B.G, Standard No. 45-4 and ASTM 1056. 2.03 &LAZING MATERIALS A. Provide type and hardness of'materiais as recommended by the manufacturer for the required application and condition of installation in each case. Provide only compounds which are known (proven) to be fully compatible with surfaces contacted. S. Butyl Rubber Sealant: Polymerized butyl rubber compound with inert fillers and pigments, solvent -based with 'T 5% solids, non -gag, taakfree with 24 hours, paintable, nonstaining. G. Oil-based Face Glazing Compound: FS TT -6-41 O, type and 'consistency recommended by manufacturer for application shown. V. Molded Neoprene blazing &asketg:, Molded or extruded neoprene gaskets of the profile and hardness required for watertight construction; comply with AISTM 0 2000, Type and Glass B.G.. E. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, "To -40 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. F. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. 6. Gleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. PART 5 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - A. Watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass Is required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, -- wind loading, impact loading (for operating doors) without failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects In the work. B. Protect glass from edge damage at all times during handling, installation and SECTION 08500 PACGE 2 GLASS ANP GLAZiNCG + SECTION 08800 r operation of the building. G. blazing channels are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on the -glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable tolerances. The Vazier is responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and necessary dimensions established. D. The 61azier must examine the framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing removable stop design, and the conditions under which the glazing is to be performed, and notify the contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. ao not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfaatory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Glazier. E. Weather conditions: Vo not proceed with Installation of liquid sealants �under � adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above manufnaturer's recommended limitations for installation. F. comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or speaifled, and except where manufacturer's technical representatives direct otherwise. 6. comply with "blazing Manual' by Fiat Vass Marketing A5506iation, except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by manufacturer of the glass and glazing materials. H. clean the glazing channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. I. apply primer or seal& to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer. J. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before Installation, and eliminate any which have observable edge damage or face imperfeations. K. Install setting block or proper size at quarter points of .kill rabbet. Set blocks in thin course of the head -bead compound, If any. L. Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper slze and spacing, for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, except where gaskets are used for glazing. Provide 1/61, minimum bit of spacers of glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thlakness slightly Fess than final compound thiakness of tape. M. unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others '~ SECTION 08800 °AGE 5 GLASS AND GLAZING SECTION 08800 as nearly as possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other pieces. N. Prevent sealant exudation from channel by leaving void at heel, or where shown, by Installing compressible filler rod at jambs and head. O. Do not leave void (or install filler rod) at sill. P. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to insure complete ,wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. Q. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from the glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of the channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. R. Glean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. S. where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of the channel to pressurize the sealant or gasket on the opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" " out when subjected to dynamic movement. Anchor _ gasket to stop with matching ribs, or by proven adhesives, including embedment of gasket tail in cured heel bead. T. Miter cut and bond ends together at corners where gaskets are used for channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or leaks In the glazing system. U. Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal. cohesive strength and surface durability. _ V. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged In any other way during construction period, Including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. K Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during# construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action and will not contribute (by wash -off) to the deterioration of glazing materials and other surfaces. 8.02 CLEANINC .� A. After installation, mark Ocar glass with x by using tape or removable' paste. S. Immediately remove droppings from finished surfaces. Remove labels after work Is completed. SECTION 05800 PAGE 4 GLASS ACNP GLAZING SECTION 08800 G. wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to Owner's acceptance of the Work in each area. comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Plastic blazing shall be cleaned with manufacturer's approved cleaning products. End of Section SECTION 08800 PAGE 5 0 GYPSUM N ALL50ARP SYSTEMS SECTION 09 260 (1 r� PART 1 GENERAL 1, 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS �` A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply tip the work specified in this section. r1' 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Perform gypsum wallboard systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C154 unless otherwise specified In this section. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASTM 0154: Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water -Resistance Backing Board. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Partitions: Listed by UL. 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Submit certification and test results that clearly states and indicates that each and every individual element or component of 'fire rated drywall system partitions is approved and appropriately rated for the specific required rated assembly in which it is to be used, and that the use of such individual element or component would in no way jeopardize the required rating of the entire assembly. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE SECTION 09260 PAGE 1 C j A. Metal Framing required for gypsum board. B. Gypsum board. C. Taped and sanded joint treatment. 1.08 RELATED WORK A. Section 05400 Gold -Formed Steel B. Section 06100 Carpentry Work G. Section OQci00 Painting and Finishing: Textured finish. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform gypsum wallboard systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C154 unless otherwise specified In this section. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASTM 0154: Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water -Resistance Backing Board. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Partitions: Listed by UL. 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Submit certification and test results that clearly states and indicates that each and every individual element or component of 'fire rated drywall system partitions is approved and appropriately rated for the specific required rated assembly in which it is to be used, and that the use of such individual element or component would in no way jeopardize the required rating of the entire assembly. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE SECTION 09260 PAGE 1 C j GYPSUM:NALLBOARfl SYSTEMS SECTION Og26O A. Deliver materials to the Job site in their original unopened packages, containers, and bundles bearing the manufacturer's name and brand name. B. Store material in an enclosed space protected from damage and exposure to the elements. Remove damaged material from the premises: PART 2 PRODUCTS 2,01 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS -NON LOAD BEARING ViALL5 A. Provide metal framing materials in accordance with ASTM G 645-61, hot dipped galvanized. B. studs: Screw-type Gee -shaped standard 2t gauge, or as required for wall heights shown. G. Runners: Galvanized, channel type, screw type, width as required by stud width, same gauge as stud. D. Fasteners and Anchorages: Self -tapping, self -drilling, as recommended by drywall manufacturer. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable, provided it compiles with the Contract Documents. 1.ORYWALL SYSTEMS The Celotex Corporation The Flintkote Company Georgia-Pacific Corporation Kaiser Gypsum National Gypsum company United states Gypsum company B. Drywall systems for fire rated partitions shall be constructed using either, all .component parts of one manufacturer or, Individually approved and rated components which are totally compatible with the entire required rated assembly and which would in no way jeopardize the rating of the .entire assembly. Drywall System shall meet test requirements approved by the Local Building offlcials. C. Fire -Rated Gypsum wallboard: ASTM C56, Type "X", UL labeled, tapered edge, 5/6 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. D. Fire -Rated, water Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: Type "X", UL labeled, tapered edge, 5/6" thick at all areas within the pool area. SECTION O g 2 6O PAGE ; GYPSUM )NALLSOARD SYSTEMS r- SECTION Og260 2.03 5AFIN& INSULATION MATERIAL A. 68f Ing Insulation: USG 5afing Insulation. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL -5 A. Lathing Channels: 16 gauge cold rolled steel, black asphaltum painted, 5/4" and 1 1/211. PART 3 EXECUTION 5.01 CEILING PREPARATION A. Examine spaces and correct defects that could interfere with proper installation. Installed ceiling system shall meet requirements of ASTM C 656. B. Installation of products in this section shall occur after all components in the ceiling plenum are installed. The building shall be in proper condition to receive the suspension system before any of the material shall be installed. C. Layout spaces and arrange suspension system in a regular pattern parallel or rSECTION Oq 260 P,�GE 3 G i� i B. Screws: Self -drilling, self -tapping, type as recommended by the Drywall Manufacturer. C. Nails: ASTM 0560, annular ring type. a. Corner Bead: &alvanized steel, perforated flange, US& Tour -A -Bead. E. Edging and Casing: Galvanized steel for painting. U56 2005, size as required for gypsum wallboard thickness. 1 F. Control .joint Casing: USG #095. 6. Adhesive: As recommended by wallboard manufacturer. ASTM C4'7 5. H. Sealant: US& Acoustical Sealant. I. Wire: &alvanized, 9 -Gauge hanger wire, 16 -gauge tie wire .,I: Reinforcing tape, .Joint Compound, Water, Fasteners: As recommended by 7 Manufacturer. K. Li � Batt type insulation shall be equal to Owens/Corning Fiberglass Light Density 17 Thermal Insulation, as specified in Section 012 10. L. Hat Channels - -r/8 inch furring style. PART 3 EXECUTION 5.01 CEILING PREPARATION A. Examine spaces and correct defects that could interfere with proper installation. Installed ceiling system shall meet requirements of ASTM C 656. B. Installation of products in this section shall occur after all components in the ceiling plenum are installed. The building shall be in proper condition to receive the suspension system before any of the material shall be installed. C. Layout spaces and arrange suspension system in a regular pattern parallel or rSECTION Oq 260 P,�GE 3 G i� i 6YPSUM AAL.L$0ARV SYSTEMS SECTION 09260 perpendicular to surrounding walls. Arrange system symmetrically about room centerlines in both directions. 5.02 DRYWALL PREPARATION A. Examine spaces and correct defects that could interfere with proper installation. Starting work shall be construed as acceptance of spaces. S. Maintain in cold weather uniform controlled range temperature between 55 deg. to "TO deg. F. during the Installation. Provide adequate ventilation toeliminateexcessive moisture. G. Install gypsum drywall systems in accordance with the 6yp5um Drywall contractors international, Underwriters Laboratory and the manufacturer of the Drywall material 5.05 GEILIN6INSTALLATION A. Furnish and Install the suspension system per the recommendation Of ASTM 0656. Deflection of any component must not exceed 1 /860 of the span. S. 'Suspend main beams spaced 4'-0" on center from structure with wire hangers Spaced 4'-0" on center. Install main beams level within 1 /6 inch in 12 feet with hanger wire taut and tightly wrapped to preventvertical movement or rotation. Do not make local kinks or bends in hanger wires as a means Of leveling. 0. Install cross tees at right angles to main beams, space at 2'-0" on center and join to main beams with positive interlock. Install cross tees to within 1 /52 Inch of their required location and within O.O 15 inch of the same horizontal plane as main beam, and never below continuous member. D. Lay ends of main beams and cross tees On angle moldings at vertical surfaces. — Provide additional hanger wires at each corner of recessed light troffers and other concentrated load conditions to prevent deflection. E. Install cross tees at right angles to beams and cross tees to support ends of recessed light fixtures, diffusers or grilles. 5.04 METAL STUD FRAMING* INSTALLATION A. Erect metal framing In accordance with A5TM G754. e. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1 /8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. c. Floor and ceiling Runner Tracks: Align runner tracks to the partition layout at SECTION 09260 PAGE 4 CGYPSUM ALLBOARP SYSTEMS PM SECTION 09260 both floor and ceiling. Secure runner tracks as recommended by the stud manufacturer for the floor and telling construction involved, except do not exceed 24" ox, spacing for nail or power -driven fasteners, nor 16" o.c. for other l types of attachment. Provide at all corners and ends of runner tracks. D. use full length studs between runner tracks wherever possible. If necessary, splice 7studs by nesting with a minimum lap or 6" and fasten laps with 2 screws through each flange. Friction fit studs to runner tracks by positioning and rotating into place. Provide positive attachment to runner tracks for studs located at 7 partition corners and intersections, and adjacent to openings, using 5/8" self -tapping screws or stud clinching tool on both flanges of studs. E. Size and Spacing: Use studs of the sizes shown and install at the spacing shown. Do not exceed 24" o.e. Provide 16" ox. spacineyhere shown on the Drawings. F. Provide additional studs to support inside corners at partition intersections and corners, and to support outside corners, terminations of partitions and both sides of control joints (if any). Provide studs behind each shelf bracket support. coordinate with General Contractor. G. Provide rough framing at openings consisting of double full-length studs adjacent to Jambs and horizontal header and sill tracks. cut horizontal tracks to length and split flanges and bend webs at ends for flange overlap and screw to jamb studs. Install cut -to -length, intermediate studs between jamb studs at head and sill sections, at same spacing as full-length studs. H. At door frames, provide rough framing as required for door frame dimensions and tolerances. Tops of all partitions shall be solidly braced to overhead or adjacent construction by means of steel channels (1 1/21, minimum) or other means approved by Architect. Wood construction shall not be used. 5.05 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A. comply with the requirements recommended by the manufacturer. The term "Manufacturer" defines the gypsum wallboard manufacturer unless otherwise noted. comply with all requirements for specified fire -resistance ratings. B. Provide drywall of the thickness shown on the drawings. C. Provide additional framing and blocking as required to support gypsum board at openings and cutouts, and to support built-in anchorage and attachment devices for other work. D. Form control joints in drywall construction where shown. All 1 /2" continuous opening between edges of adjacent drywall board to all for insertion of control SECTION 0 9 2 60 PAGE S r GYPSUM YNALLBOARV SYSTEMS SECTION 09260 joint trim accessory. E. Partition/walls: apply gypsum board vertically or horizontally at Contractor's option, with vertical joints located over supports, but offset at least one stud on opposite faces of partition/walls. Stagger joints of adjacent sheets of gypsum boards if applied horizontally. F. Fasten gypsum wallboard with screws. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for fastening, but do not exceed 12". O.C. spacing. G. Caulk sides and backs of electrical boxes to completely seal openings and joints. H. Apply wallboard to ceilings before applying to vertical surfaces. Install wallboard — to ceilings with long edge perpendicular to supports using longest pieces practicable. Stagger end joints and provide support for all edges. Apply sealant at joint between edge of wallboard at floor and at ceiling. I. Fit wallboard snugly into steel doorframes. Gut wallboard neatly to fit around all outlets and switch boxes. Install metal edge trim along top edge of all wallboard at ceiling and wherever wallboard edge is exposed, or abuts another material. Install corner bead at all exterior corners. J. Use moisture resistant gypsum wallboard in all areas in or adjacent to the swimming pool. Install with long edge perpendicular to supports with end joints staggered. 5.06 5AFING INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install safing insulation above gypsum drywall partitions which extend to underside _ of uneven floor decks and around penetrations of fire -rated walls - all AGM free. S. Completely fill openings with insulation to fully seal the partition. 5.09 CONTROL JOINTS A. Locate control joints as indicated by not to exceed 50-0" in either direction for ceilings and not to exceed 50-0" on center for partitions. Locate control joints where wallboard abuts any dissimilar wall or ceiling assembly and where wallboard 6onstruction changes within the same plane. _ B. Install control joint casing where control joint occurs in continuous wall surface. Make joint 1/4" wide with supports noncontinuous over joint. Install metal edging _ where wallboard abuts any structural,element or dissimilar material. Make joint 1 /6" wide and fill with sealant. 5.09 VKYINALL FINISHING A. Do not install joint treatment compounds unless installation areas comply with SECTION 0 9 2 6 Q PAGE 6 GYPSUM N ALL150AKV SYSTEMS t SECTION 09260 8.06 GLEANING AND PATCHING A. clean exposed surfaces of wallboard of all soil and stains that would affect finish. Repair or remove and replace defective work. Remove excess materials and debris from the Site. 5.0Q ASBESTOS FREE MATERIALS A. The General contractor shall provide a letter, certification or M5D5 sheet stating that all materials installed are fabricated of Asbestos Free Material. End of Section SECTION 09260 PAGE ? minimum temperature and ventilation requirements recommended by the manufacturer and conditions are acceptable to the Installer. f B. Finish exposed drywall surfaces with joints, corners and exposed edges reinforced or trimmed as specified, and with all joints, fastener heads, trim necessary flanges and surface defects filled with joint compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for a smooth, flush surface. Drywall finishing work will not be considered acceptable if corners or edges do not form true, level or plumb lines, or if joints fastener heads, flanges of trim accessories or defects are visible after applibatlon of field -applied decoration. c. Use joint tape to reinforce joints formed by tapered edges or butt ends of drywall units and at interior corners and angles. Set tape in joint compound then apply skim coat over tape in one application. jrl^ D. Nhere open spaces of more than 1 / 16" width occur between abutting drywall units, (except at control joints), pref ill joints with joint compound and allow pref ill to dry before application of joint tape. 7 E. Reinforce external corners of drywall work with specified type of corner bead. F. Se'curely fasten metal corner beads as recommended by the manufacturer. Do not use fastens which cannot be fully concealed by joint compound fill applied over 17 flanges. G. Provide specified type of metal casing bead trim. Install in single un jointed lengths 7 unless run exceeds longest available stock length. Miter corners of semi -finishing type trim. H. Use only compatible compounds from one manufacturer, After mixing, do not use joint compounds if recommended pot -life time has expired. 8.06 GLEANING AND PATCHING A. clean exposed surfaces of wallboard of all soil and stains that would affect finish. Repair or remove and replace defective work. Remove excess materials and debris from the Site. 5.0Q ASBESTOS FREE MATERIALS A. The General contractor shall provide a letter, certification or M5D5 sheet stating that all materials installed are fabricated of Asbestos Free Material. End of Section SECTION 09260 PAGE ? i ACOUSTICAL CEILING5 SECTION O 9 51 O PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish materials, labor and equipment, as required by the contract Documents, to provide and install acoustical ceilings. 1.05 APPLICA5LE STANDARDS A. Acoustical Materials Association: 1.115pecifications for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceiling Suspension Systems." 1.04 5U5MITTAL5 A. Samples: 1.12 inch x 12 inch sample of each type of acoustical unit. 2.12 inch samples of suspension system including: a. Main beam b. cross tee connection c. Angle molding 5. Product Data: 1.Manufacturer's data showing compliance with the Contract Documents. C. Maintenance Instructions: 1.Mahufacturer's recommendations for cleaning and refinishing each type acoustical unit. 2.Include precautions against materials and methods detrimental to finishes and aaousticai efficlency. . SECTION 0 9 510 PAC7E 1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING5 SECTION O 1015 1 O D. Yuarranty 1.This Contractor shall furnish a written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two'(2) years from the date of final acceptance of his work, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the warranty. 2.The following shall be adjudged as defective work: Loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping, cracking, settling, chipping, spotting and loss of acoustical properties of materials. E. Extra Material -- 1.At time of completing the Installation, deliver stock of maintenance material to the Owner. Furnish full size units matching the units installed, packaged with — protective covering for storage, and identified with appropriate labels. Provide one unopened carton of ceiling tile specified on this project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontract the acoustic ceiling and related work to an .Installer acceptable to the manufacturer of primary acoustic materials. 5. Subcontract the installing of suspended acoustic telling materials to the Installer of the ceiling suspension systems for single responsibility. C. The Installer must examine the condition under which acoustic ceiling work Is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the acoustic ceiling work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. D. Deliver acoustic ceiling materials to the job site in original, unopened packages, bearing manufacturer's name and label identifying each type of acoustic unit. E. Coordinate layout with other work which penetrated or is supported by ceiling suspension system. F. Comply with acoustic material manufacturer's recommendations for storage of units to be used In the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTA5LE MANUFACTURERS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable provided it complies with the Contract documents. SECTION 09510 PAGE 2 ACOUSTICAL CEILIN65 ! ► SECTION O g 510 1.SU5PENSION SYSTEMS Roper Eastern Products Corporation Donn Products, Inc. Chicago Metallic U5G ceiling systems 2.ACOU5TICAL UNITS United states Gypsum 2.02 MATERIALS A. Exposed suspension grid system for acoustical panel - MATCH EXISTING: 1.Eq,ual to single web TAB -LOCK, by U56 ceiling products or Roper Eastern Products corporation, chemically cleansed, electro -galvanized and bonderized, with high -baked enamel finish on all parts and painted white enamel finish on exposed surfaces, ASTM C-655, maximum deflection 0.155 inch, Intermediate putt'. 2.Main Beams: .01 "T inch minimum commercial grade steel, bulb section, 1 1/2" web and 15/ 16" fiange, 12 lbs. per lineal foot simple span minimum load limit. Rout beams at 12" on center. S.Cross Tees: .01 Z inch minimum steel, 1 1/4" web and 15/ 16" flange, formed TAB -LOCK ends for attachment to adjoining beam cross tee, providing minimum torsional movement and lateral displacement. Rout tees at 12" on center. 4.5eam Gross Tees: .01 '7 inch minimum steel, 1 1/2" web and 15/ 16" flange, formed TAS -LOCK ends for attachment to adjoining main beam, providing minimum torsional movement and lateral displacement, 12 lbs. per lineal foot simple span minimum load limit. Rout tees at 12" on center. 5.Angie molding: .020 inch minimum cold roiled steel, 15/ 16" x 15/ 16". &.Accessories: 5peciflcaliy designed as an integral part of the grid system: *i.rihere hanger wires cannot be directly wire -tied to structural or intermediate framing members, provide attachment devices designed for the type of construction used in the work and with a carrying capacity of not less than 5 times the design loads involved. SECTION O g 5 1 O PAGE 3 ACOUSTICAL CEILIN65 SECTION O cl 51 O B. Wire Hangers 1.Not less than 12 gauge (0.016" diameter), galvanized, soft annealed, mid steel wire. C. AGOUWaal Panels 1.Equal to U.S.G. AaCUStone panel item 5/4" X 2'X 2' and 5/4" X 2'X 4" with square edge. White in color. All materials shall be asbestos free. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 PREPARATION A. Examine spaces and correct defects that could interfere with proper installation. Installed ceiling system shall meet requirements of "Specifications for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceiling Suspension 595tem," published by the Acoustical Materials Association. B. Install acoustical treatment after moist materials have been installed. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating the Interior conditions which will exist when the building is occupied but not less than 50 deg. or more than 65 deg. F. before, during and after installation. C. Prior to start of acoustic ceiling work, consult other trades and contractors involved to determine areas of potential interference. Do not start installation of suspension systems until interferences have been resolved. 5.02 . LAYOUT A. The acoustical -pane Is shall be installed as shown on the reflected Ceiling Plans on the Drawings. Unless shown otherwise on the Reflected Ceiling Pians, in general, the acoustical panels shall be symmetrical about the center lines of the room in both directions and edge panels on opposite sides of each room shall be equal in width. 5.05 SUSPENSION A. Molding: 1.Install angle molding around perimeter of room at proper level. 2.Miter angle molding at exterior corners; S.Cut flanges and bend web at interior corners; SECTION 0 q 5 10 PAGE 4 r, 7 r 711, 7 7, r 17 7 7 7 7 7 . ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS SECTION 09 51 O 4.Expo5ed leg shall be in same plane as bottom flange of main beam and cross tees. B. Hangers: 1.Hang main beams at 4 feet on centers with hangers spaced at 4 feet on centers. 2.virap hangers around beams or joists and twist at least s full turns. S.Where hanger wires cannot be wrapped around structural members, provide: a. Attachment devices for the type of construction (Vertical screws up into wood are not acceptable). b. r4ith a carrying capacity of at least 5 times the design loads. 4. Space hangers not more than 6 inches from each end. S. Provide additional hangers for support of other items to be supported by the suspension system, including all light fixtures. 6. Hangers shall be plumb: a. If splayed hangers cannot be avoided; b. Provide counter splay, bracing or other suitable offsetting members. '. Hang beams level: 81.0o not make kinks or bends in hanger wires to level. 6. Tightly wrap beams to prevent vertical movement or rotation. a. Twist wires at least 5 full turns. G. Grid: 1. Install cross beams at right angles to main beams. 2. Space 2 feet on centers. S. Join beams to positive interlock. SECTION 0 9 510 PAGE 5 ACOUSTICAL CEILIN65 SECTION 09 5 10 a. rilthin 1 /52 inch of required lo4ation. b. Within 0.015 (1 /64) inch of horizontal plane. c. Never below a continuous member. 5.04 ACOUSTICAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General 1.Position acoustical units on flanges of inverted tees. 2 -Cut and fit acoustical units closely and accurately around recessed light fixtures, grilles or other ceiling items. S.Throw away and replace units that are damaged. B. Shall be by an applicator who is an authorized representative of the manufacturer of the units. C. Do not install acoustic ceiling until installation areas meet the following requirements. Exterior openings have been closed and roofs are weathertight; mechanical, electrical and other work above ceilings have been completed; wet . work has been installed; temperature and relative humidity have reached levels which comply with acoustic material manufacturer's recommendations for the units to be used in the work and are acceptable to the Installer. D. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed Instruations and other recommendations applicable to the work. E. All acoustical unit surfaces shall be true and free from irregularities; joints shall be straight and continuous. All units at walls, columns and openings shall be scribed accurately. 5.05 FURRING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ITEMS A. All Mechanical and Electrical Items occurring immediately below acousticalceilings: 1.6hall be furred in with the acoustical ceiling materials whether shown on the Architectural plans or not. 2.Refer to Mechanical and Electrical plans for a complete description of items. SECTION 095 10 PALM 6 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS I SECTION O q 5 14 End of Section � 7- SECTION 0 9 510 PAGE 9 5.06 COOPERATION A. This Contractor shall consult and cooperate with trades whose work precedes and follows ceiling installation, to permit orderly procedure in executing work under this contract. Installation of tile shall not start until foundation work to receive the tile has been completed and Inspected, and the Architect'6 approval has been obtained to proceed. The Contractor shall give the Architect advance notices for inspection. ANIS GLEANING 8.0'1 PROTECTION A. Touch-up or replace damaged ceiling grids. B. Replace damaged and stained acoustical units. C. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning. and touch up of minor finish damage. 5.06 ASBESTOS FREE MATERIALS A. The General Contractor shall provide a letter, certification or MSPS sheet stating that all materials Installed are fabricated of Asbestos Free Material. End of Section � 7- SECTION 0 9 510 PAGE 9 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09650 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS - A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified In this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK I A. Resilient flooring, related materials and accessories, for Alternate #3, generally consist of the following: 1.Yinyl Composition Tile 2.Re5ilient Cove Type Base B. Refer to drawings and schedules for extent of resilient materials. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Resilient Materials: For information only submit 2 copies of manufacturer's speciflcations and installation instructions for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. Indicate by transmittal that a copy of each installation instruction has distributed to the Installer. B. Maintenance Instructions: Resilient Materials: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's written instructions for recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient material C. Additional Material: Provide one full carton of resilient tile to be stored on the site for future use by the owner. 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Installer must thoroughly examine the substrate and the conditions under which 'I resilient flooring is to -be performed. Notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected In a manner acceptable to the installer. it B. Surfaces shall be smooth, level and at required finished elevations and without more than 1 /8" in 10'-0" variation. Cracks, holes, seems or low spots shall be filled with approved patch or filler material T SECTION 09650 PA&E -1 1.E5ILIENT FLOQRING SECTION 09650 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. vinyl composition Tile: Equal to 12" x 12" x. 1 /8" thick as manufactured by Tarkett - 11Gla5sics° B. Resilient Base: Equal to Rubber riall Base as manufactured by Roppe-1 /8 inch thick, 4" high, cove type. Provide pre -formed corners in lieu of bending the base. G. Reducer strips: Equal to model #q 10 5nap-down molding manufactured by Mercer Plastics company, Inc. Provide metal track recommended by manufacturer. D. colors a5 selected by the Architect. E. Adhesives: waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by the manufacturer. Emulsions and other non -waterproof type adhesives are not acceptable. F. concrete Slab Primer: Non -staining as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Prior to laying flooring or other resilient materials, broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered and inspect subfloor. Start of flooring installation will indicate acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed work. Remove existing fini5h on concrete floor as required for a permanent and satisfactory , installation. B. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by manufecturer, prior to application _ of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 0. continuously heat areas to receive flooring to '10 degrees F. for at least 48 _ hours prior to installation, when project conditions are such that heating 15 required to raise the temperature to ?O degrees F. Maintain i0 degrees F. temperature continuously during and after in5tallatioh as recommended by manufacturer, but for not less than 48 hours. V. Install flooring and other resilient items after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of aonarete slabs, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by manufacturer. SECTION 09 ro 50 PAGE 2 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION O q 6 50 E. Place resilient materials with adhesive cement in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings and edging5. Scribe as necessary around obstructions and to produce neat joints, laid tight, even and straight. Extend into toe spaces, door reveals and into closets and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. use chalk or other non -permanent marking device. Install flooring around covers for floor type telephone and electrical outlets and other such items as occur within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed around covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers. H. Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, void5, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks or other surface Imperfections. f I. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of the area be of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of out widths less than 5" at perimeters. Lay tile square to wall axis, unless otherwise shown. .I. Match the for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same Sequence as manufactured and packaged. Gut tile neatly to and around all appurtenances. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed 'tile are not acceptable. K. Lay the with grain a5 directed by the Architect. L. Provide all edge moldings and trim pieces to provide for a complete and satisfactory installation. 5.02 CLEANIN6 ANSA PROTECTION A. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed materials from damage with suitable protective covering. SECTION O 9 6 50 PAGE 5 r RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION O q 6 50 5.05 FINISHING A. After Completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. Apply wax and buff, with type of wax, number of coats (no less than two) and buffing procedures, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. 5.04 A65ESTOS FREE MATERIALS A. The General Contractor shall provide a letter, certification or MsnS sheet stating that all materials installed are fabricated of Asbestos Free Material. End of Section SECTION 0 q 6 50 PA0E 4 7 PART 1 GENERAL CARPETIN6 SECTION O 9 6 SO I' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including . 6eneral Conditions, Supplementary 6eneral conditions, Special conditions and 6eneral Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK I A. The extent of surfaces to receive glue down carpet Is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. The work includes the furnishings of all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required for Installing all new carpeting complete. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer shall be firm with not less than 2 years of experience in installation of commercial carpet, by methods similar to those required for this project. B. Manufacturer shall be a firm with not less than 5 years of production experience with carpet similar to types specified In this section; and whose published product literature clearly indicates compliance of product with requirements of this section. G. Refer to "carpet 5pecifier's Handbook" by the carpet and Rug Institute for general information and recommendations and for definitions of terminology. D. Garp et substituted for the carpet specified herein must meet or exceed all construction specifications and must match the colors and patterns specified. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit data to show compliance with requirements for carpet including test laboratory reports and manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for Installation and maintenance. B. Submit samples of each type, color and pattern of carpeting materials required. C,. submit carpet layout drawings at same scale as contract drawings, showing carpet seam locations and location and type of edge treatment. D. Deliver usable scrap materials to Owner's designated storage space as directed, properly packaged/protected and identified. Usable scraps are defined to include roll ends of less than 9'-0" length, and pieces of more than 3 sq. ft. area and more I^ R SECTION 09660 PAGE 1 CARPETIN6 SECTION O q 6 80 than 12" wide. Dispose of smaller pieces. E. Submit manual of carpet manufacturer's complete recommendations for the care, cleaning and maintenance of carpeting; prepared After detailed analysis of Owner's Intended occupancies and resulting traffic conditions. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver carpeting materials in protective wrapping, and store inside, protected from weather, moisture and soiling. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. Industry standards of five (5) years guarantee for materials shall prevail. All workmanship and installation shall be guaranteed for a period of one ( 1 ) year. - B. carpet not meeting these specifications in every respect will be replaced by the contractor with carpeting that does meet specifications. This will be completed at no cost to Owner. There will be no negotiations or adjustments in price to compensate for carpet that does not meet these specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Floor carpet shall be equal to Blue Ridge "Orient Express" of Ellijay, Georgia (allowance of `521.00 per yard installed) with the following minimum specifications. The following is only a guide: Weave Tufted step over step Rows Per Inch 6.0 Pile Height .166 Face Yarn 100'/o Antron Ply 4 Dye Method Yarn Dyed Yarn Weight 52.0 Oz. Total Weight 66.0 Oz. Flammability ASTM -E-64 (NFPA-255) Tunnel Test - class A. 25 or less ASTM -E-646 (NEPA-255). Flooring Radiant Panel Test Exceeds .45 watts per CM sq,. yd. DOC -FF -1-10 (Pill Test) Passes Smoke Density NB5 Smoke Density chamber (NFBA-256) Less than 450 SECTION O q 6 60 I PAC7E 2 .. a 17 C R-PETING SECTION 09680 B. Color shall be as selected by Architect or Owner from manufacturer's standard colors. Co. Adhesive shall be equal to W.W. Henry's #s56, white latex. Verify with Owner and existing conditions as to glue down or stretch over pad. P. Provide hot -melt seaming adhesive of the type recommended by the carpet manufacturer for taping seams and buttering cut edges of carpet backing (and bottom of face pile) at seams, to form secure seams and eliminate pile loss at seams. 7 E. Provide nails, thread, tapes, adhesives and other accessory Items and materials of types recommended by carpet manufacturers, and as recommended by Installer for project requirements. F. Provide vinyl snap -down reducers equal to Mercer #sss full width where carpet abuts different flooring finishes. Color shall be as selected by the Architect. PART S EXECUTION 8.01 INSTALLATION A. ' Installer must examine substrates. and conditions under which carpeting is to be Installed, and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. no not proceed with installation of carpeting until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the carpet manufacturer. yB. Do not install carpet over concrete with either excessive moisture or dust producing surface which is not adequately sealed. C. Clear away debris, cementitious deposits, and similar obstructions or substrates to receive carpeting. Fill cracks and voids Including honeycombed concrete, but do not obstruct expansion joints. ( V. clean surfaces to be carpeted immediately prior to installation of carpeting materials, by vacuum cleaning or as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Prior to start of carpet installation, check critical dimensions of spaces to be carpeted, to ensure that planned use of materials will fulfill requirements, Including locations for seams, Joints and edgings. F. At contractor's option, carpeting materials may be prefabricated prior to delivery to point of installation. 6. comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Place seams in j SECTION 09680 PAGE 5 r CARPETING SECTION O 9 6 80 directions indicted, and as accepted on shop drawings. Maintain direction of pattern and texture, including lay of pile. Do not seam weft to warp, except as specifically indicated for a direction change. H. Extend carpet under open -bottomed and raised -bottom obstructions, and under removable flanges or obstructions. Extend carpet into closets and alcoves of rooms indicated to be carpeted, unless another floor finish is indicated for such spaces. I. where seams relate to doors, center seams under door thickness. Do not place carpet seams in traffic direction in doorways. J. All Carpet shall be installed by direct glue -down method. K. Pit sections of carpet into each room or space prior to application of adhesive. Trim off mill edges unless carpet has been pre -trimmed. Maintain straight seams, true with lines of building. L. Apply seaming cement on cut edges of carpet at seams, without being in evidence on face of carpet but securing base of pile at cut. M. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's Instructions. Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Roll lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform total -area bond or carpet to substrate. Remove adhesive (if any appears) promptly from face of installed carpet. 8.02 GLEANING, PROTECTION, FOLLOW-UP SERVICE A. Remove debris from installation, carefully sorting pieces to be saved from scraps to be disposed of. B. Vacuum carpet with a commercial machine, with rotating agitator or beater in nozzle. Remove spots, and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. SECTION 051680 PAGE 4 5 7 FAINTING SECTION O q 9 00 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DE5CRIPTION OF WORK �. A. .The extent of painting work is shown on the drawings and schedules, and as herein specified. 8. The work includes painting and finishing of interior exposed items and surfaces throughout the project, except as otherwise indicated. 1.Surf ace preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop -priming and surface treatment specified under other sectlons of the work. C. The work includes field painting of all bare and covered pipes and ducts (including I color coding), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under the mechanical and electrical work, except as otherwise specified. V. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems, materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and filler and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. E. Paint all exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where the natural finish of the material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not (� designated, the architect will select these from standard colors available for the I materials systems specified. F. The following categories of work are not included as part of the field -applied finish work, or are included in other sections of these specifications: 1.Unles5 otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under the various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, and similar Items. 2. Pre -Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory -finishing or Installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited SECTION 0 9 9 00 PAGE 1 PAINTINCG SECTION 0 9 q 00 to) metal toilet enclosures, prefinished partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework, finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets, elevator -- entrance frames, doors and equipment. s. concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting Is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts. 4. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated. S. Do not paint over any code -required labels, such as Underwriters'. Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or — nomenclature plates. 6. Items to receive transparent finish shall be protected during the texture and painting phases and shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted prior to finishing. After ~ finishing, these items shall be protected from overspray and other potential damage from other trades. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Painting: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application instructions for each materials proposed for use. Transmit a copy of each manufacturers instructions to the paint Applicator. B. Samples: Painting: Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of .the Contractor. Provide a listing of the material and application for each coat of each finish sample. 1.On 12" x 12" hardboard, provide two samples of each color end material with texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit each sample as requested until acceptable sheen, color and texture is achieved. 2.On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4" x 8" samples of each natural .and stained wood finish as required. Label and identify each as to location and application. 1.04 DELIVERY AND ,STORAGE SECTION O q 5100 PASE 2 — t7 PA%INTING 71, SECTION 0 c q00 A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: Name or title of material. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. Manufacturer's name. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. i Thinning instructions. Color name and number. -7, B. Store materials and equipment in a single loakable area of project site. Provide adequate means to protect floors and adjacent surfaces of this area from m damage. C. Store clean rags, paint and .solvents in closed metal containers located in designated area. Dispose of soiled rags daily. D. Comply with applicable health and fire regulations. 1.05 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds and stages necessary to complete work. B. Protect completed finish and painted work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work. 1.06 EXTRA PAINT A.' Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Owner two (2) gallons of each color of latex and enamel paint used. I 1.01 6UA IZANTEE A. This contractor shall guarantee all work performed under this contract for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance. Cracking, peeling and scaling of paint shall be judged as defective work. 1.08. .JOS CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees and ci0 degrees F., unless ` otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. l i SECTION O q 00 PAC q S PAINTING SECTION O Cl ei 00 B. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 65%; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. G. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.OQ COLORS AND FINI5HE5 A. Paint finishes are indicated in the schedules of the contract documents. B. Prior to beginning work, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted. 1.Use representative colors when preparing samples for review: -- 2.pinal acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job. G. color Pigments: Pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit the substrates and servlce indicated. D. Paint coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure, compatibility of total coatings system ` for ' varlous substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify the Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. 1.1 O TEXTURE ON &YP5UM BOARD SURFACES A. Nall$: Shall be equal to textone as manufactured by U.S. 6yp5Um co. Application shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Finish texture shall be as selected by Architect or Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Products speclfled in Schedule of Painting are as manufactured by Pittsburgh Paint company unless otherwise indicated; 'equivalent products of Pratt and Lambert, DuPont, 5herwin-Ailiiams, Glidden, Devoe, cook, TV and Kelly -Moore may SECTION 09 q00 PAGE 4 PAINTING SECTION 0 99 00 ! I be furnished in lieu of those listed, provided that they are of equal type and quality. B. Materials selected for coating systems shall be products of a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. 4 G. Secondary products such.as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be first line quality products of a reputable manufacturer. O. Lead Free Paint: All paint specified for use under this section shall be lead free and mercury free and chromate free, and shall be in full compliance with Federal I Hazardous Substances ,pct. Provide M5DS lead free sheets certifying lead free status. % E. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard, best -grade product will not be. acceptable. F. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. f use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 2.02 MIXING AND TINTING A. Accomplish job site tinting and mixing only when approved by the Architect. Use tinting colors recommended by paint manufacturer for specific type of finish. B. Thin paints only when specifically allowed by manufacturer: do not exceed thinning directions. 2.03 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Compounds: Pre -fill powdered joint compound, taping compound and topping compound, ASTM 04'15-'1 O. B. Joint Tape: Perforated tape, ASTM C,47 5-10. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of finish work, and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through normal preparatory work. SECTION 09 900 PAGE 5 PAINTING SECTION 09 900 S.. Notify Architect in writing of such unacceptable conditions. C. _ Do not proceed with surface preparations or coating applications until conditions are suitable. D. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. E. Application of paint or finish to surfaces shall constitute acceptance of that surface. -- 5.02 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. The intent of these specifications is to produce highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. S. Do not apply exterior paint while surface is damp, or during cold, rainy, or frosty weather or when temperature is below 5o' F. G. Floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as surfaces to be paintedshall be clean before painting. D. Glean surfaces free of foreign matter before applying paint or finishes. E. Maintain ambient temperature in building of not less than 60' F. for 24 hours prior to and minimum of 24 hours after interior painting. F. Do not paint masonry surfaces with a moisture content exceeding 12%. 6. Provide a minimum of 20 foot candles illumination for surfaces to be painted or finished. H. Apply materials with adequate ventilation; maintain ventilation in occupied rooms. 5.05 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PAINTING REOUIREMENTS A. Paint metal surfaces, including pipes, conduit, machinery, equipment panels and boxes where exposed in finished spaces, mechanical rooms or on exterior. Paint equipment Machinery Gray, unless otherwise noted, paint pipes and conduits to match adjacent surfaces unless otherwise scheduled: S. Metal surfaces delivered with prime coat shall have abrasions touched up and fihish -- costs applied as specified. SECTION 0 9 9 00 P,4 7E 6 PAINTING ` SECTION 0 9 q 00 I I G. Touch up abrasions in factory finishes. V. Paint exposed underside of cast iron sinks and fixture supporting members or I structure with 2 coats of enamel. E. Paint galvanized ducts exposed to view on interior of building in accordance with schedule. F. Paint air conditioning grilles, registers, ceiling diffusers and speaker grilles in accordance with schedule unless otherwise directed by Architect. G. Paint exposed conduit supports, clamps, hangers and exposed conduit and boxes Tin accordance with schedule. "' H. Paint p anelboards and other cabinets in accordance with schedule to' match adjacent sprfaces, when located in finished spaces other than closets or aT mechanical rooms. I. Paint surfaces inside of ducts, diffusers and other mechanical openings which are exposed to view flat black. J. Vo not paint nameplates on equipment or labels on doors and frames. 5.04 PREPARATION OF 5URFACES A. Seal knots, pitch streaks and sappy spots with 2 Ib. cut shellac priming. Ie. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects with putty after first coat. color to match finish. C. Sand woodwork smooth and clean surface before finishing. D. Sackprime Interior trim and cabinetry with tinted wood primer before installation. E. Paste wood filler, applied on open grain wood when "set" shall be wiped across grain of wood, then with grain to secure a clean surface. F. coat surfaces to be stained with a uniform coat of stain and wipe excess off. 6. Sand enamel or varnish finish on wood between coats using a fine sandpaper to produce an even, smooth finish. Thoroughly clean surfaces. H. Wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt, oil or grease before applying primer. Remove rust or scale by wire brushing or sanding clean before SECTION 0 cl q 00 PACGE 1 OftI PAINTING SECTION 0 c 900 painting. Glean marred shop coats and touch-up with primer. I. Pretreat galvanized metal surfaces with a crystalline zinc phosphate treatment -- such as Lithoform, by American Chemical Paint Co., Ambler, Pa., or Gaivaprep #5, by Neilson Chemical Co., Vetroit, Michigan. J. Fill scratches, cracks and abrasions in drywall with a spackling compound 1lush with adjoining surface. Men dry, sand smooth and seal before application of priming coat. K. Fill and sand metal door frames as required to provide a smooth surface before finishing. Touch-up factory prime coat before applying first coat. L. Touch-up shop coats on metal surfaces before applying finish. M. Vo not paint over, dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or — conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. N. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. 5.05 JOINT TREATMENT A. Treat joints, interior angles, fastener depressions and finishing trim on face -layer — wallboard. Prefill, tape, fill and finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. Sand finish coat and leave surfaces smooth, uniform, and free of fins, depressions, cracks and other imperfections. Treat joints of all face layers "- including above ceilings. 5.06 APPLICATION A. Final coat of paint shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or _- skipped areas. B. Apply paint, stain, and varnish with suitable brushes, or rollers, as recommended by manufacturer. Spray application will be allowed only upon written approval of the — Architeat. C. Allow previous coat5.to thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats. "- V. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. E. Slightly vary color of successive coats. SECTION 0q q00 PAGE 8 9 r~� FAINTING SECTION 09 900 F. sand and dust between each coat as required to remove visual defects. 6. Each coat of paint applied shall be inspected by Architect before application of succeeding specified coats. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in, determining number of coats. Provide Architect a report of each coat applied when completed for inspection to comply with above. Architect reserves right to make revisions within color range of paint prior to final coat. H. Apply each coat of paint uniformly to minimum wet film (Mrir-) thickness specified in schedule, or as recommended by manufacturer. Additional coats shall be applied I if required to produce full coverage. TT- 5.0'7 GLEANING, PATCHING AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of work, remove paint and varnish spots from floor, glass and other finished surfaaes. Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated Tmaterials. Leave work in clean, orderly, and acceptable conditions. 5. spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing. Otherwise, re -coat entire section to corners or visible stopping point. i Co. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the Architect. D. Provide 11kxet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. p E. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 8.08 WOOD DOORS A. seal tops and bottoms of wood doors immediately upon their delivery to the job site with two coats of varnish. 5. Reseal any door that has been trimmed after the initial Sealing. 5.05 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING A. The kinds and brands of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be those listed below. r SECTION 09 940 PAGE 9 7 PAINTING SECTION O q q00 B. Exterior and Interior metal: 1.First Goat: PPG 6-6 5peedhide enamel undercoat 2.5econd Goat: PP6 6-252 Series 5peedhide gloss enamel S.Third Goat: PP6 6-252 Series 5peedhide gloss enamel G. Interior wood: For paint finish 1.First Goat: PPC -76-6 5peedhide enamel undercoat 2 -Second Goat: PP6 6-110 Series low sheen enamel S.Third Goat: PPG 6-40 series low sheen enamel D. Interior wood: For transparent Finish: 1.First Goat: Rex '77 line semi -transparent stain 2.5econd Goat: PP6 5peedhide 6-10 sanding sealer S.ThirdCoat- PP6 Lo -sheen varnish or flat lacquer 4.Fourth Goat: PPG Lo -sheen varnish or flat lacquer E. Gypsum Board walls: 1.First Goat: PP6 6-2 5peedhide drywall sealer 2 -Second Goat: PPG 6-5 1 O 5peedhide acrylic latex semi- gloss enamel S.Third Goat: PPG 6-5 1 O 5peedhide acrylic latex semi- gloss enamel F. Galvanized metal: 1.First Coat: PP6 6-204 galvanized steel primer 2.5econd Goat: PPG 6-242 Series 5peedhide gloss enamel S.Third Goat: PPG 6-252 5peedhide gloss enamel 6. Concrete Masonry units: 1.First Goat: PPG 6-1 Block Filler 2.5econd Goat: PP6 6-5 1 O 5peedhide acrylic latex semi- gloss enamel S.Third Goat: P06 6-5 1 O 5peedhide acrylic latex semi- gloss enamel End Of section SECTION 0 q q 00 PASTE 10 rn ` BAKEP POLYURETHANE COATED' TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1 1 SECTION 10168 PART 1. 6ENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.02 SECTION INCL-UDES A. Floor mounted, overhead braced, baked polyurethane coated toilet partitions. B. Attachment hardware. rr` 1.05 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry B. Section Oa260 - Gypsum Wallboard Systems c. Section 10600 - Toilet Accessories. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI A 1 1 9.1 - specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by the Physically Handicapped. B. ANSI A205.1 - Mat Formed Mood Particleboard. Co. APA - American Plywood Assoclation. D. ASTM A 161 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, sheet, and Strip. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings indicating partition layout and dimensions, panel and door sizes, door swings, elevations, anchorage and mounting details, and finishes. B. Submit product data for components, hardware, and accessories. c. submit manufacturers color and finish samples. D. Submit manufacturer's Installation instructions. 1.06 REGULATORY REOUIREMENT5 SECTION 10168 PAGE 1 6 BAKEP POLYURETHANE COATEt TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10168 A. Conform to AN51 A 1 1 'i.1 for provisions for the physically handicapped. 1.01 FIELD MEASUREMENT5 r A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. — PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. 5anymetal Products Company B. Ampco Partitions C. Substitutions: In aaaordanae with the General Provisions of Arahitecural Work 2.02 MATERIALS A. Doors, panels and screens: 22 gauge bonderized and galvanized steel faces with oval crown edge strip mitered, welded and finished at corners. B. Finish: Two component polyurethane coated finish. C. Headrail: 1 x 1-5/5 inch anodized extruded aluminum; with cast socket type wall brackets. 2.05 ACCE550RIE5 A. Pilaster Shoe: ASTM A 161, Type 504 stainless steel, s inch high with adjustable screw jack. - B. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, theft proof type, heavy duty extruded aluminum brackets. C. Through Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel with tamperproof heads. D. Steel Plate Reinforcement: Carbon steel, prepared for fasteners, 1 /8 inch thick. 2.04 HARDWARE A. Hinges: Non-ferrous cast pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning, nylon bearings. B. Latch and Keeper: Thumb turn door latch, door strike and keeper with rubber -- bumper. SECTION 101 6 6 P,4GE 2 '.r BAKED POLYURETHANE COATEV TOiLET.COMPARTMENTS 71 SECTION 101 b 6 PARTS. EXECUTION 8.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work. B. VerifW field measurements are as shown on shop drawings. C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, bracing, and plumbing fixtures. P. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. I SECTION 10165 PAC -7E 5 G. coat Hook: Gast alloy hook with rubber bumper tip. 71 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate partitions in accordance with manufacturer's standards for baked i polyurethane finished partition systems. B. Reinforce pilaster and panels with steel plate reinforcement sandwiched within kI particle core at attachment points. Router cut openings as required. c. Thickness of Partition Panels and Moors: One inch. 6 D. Thickness of Pilasters: 1-1 /4 inch. 2.06 FINISHES A. Baked on Polyurethane - two ( 2) component system, color as selected by the Architect. B. Stainless Steel Surfaces: No. 4 finish. c. Exposed Steel Surfaces: Polished chrome plated. E V. Aluminum: Anodized to color as selected. E. Non-ferrous Surfaces: Polished chrome plated. PARTS. EXECUTION 8.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work. B. VerifW field measurements are as shown on shop drawings. C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, bracing, and plumbing fixtures. P. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. I SECTION 10165 PAC -7E 5 BAKED POLYUKETHANE COATED TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10168 5.02 ERECTION A. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. — 8. Install partition components secure, plumb and level. _ C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls and floors using appropriate anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with through bolts and nuts. Locate headrail joints at pilaster center line. E. Provide ,/kinch space between wall surface and panels or pilasters. F. Provide for adjustment of floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. G. Equip each toilet stall door with top and bottom hinges, and door latch. H. Install door strike keeper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch. I. Equip each toilet stall door with one coat hook and bumper. 5.05 ERECTION TOLERANCE5 A. Maximum Variation From Plumb or Level: 1 /8 inch. B. Maximum Misplacement From Intended Position: 1 /8 inch. — 5.04 ADJUSTING - fti A. Adjust and align door hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors. Clearance space not to exceed 5/1 &.inch. B. Adjust door hinges so that free movement Is attained and will locate in -swinging doors in partial open position when unlatched. Return out -swinging doors to closed position. 5.05 CLEANINGS A. Remove protective coverings. B. Clean surfaces and hardware as recommended by the manufacturer. SECTION 10168 PAGE 4 BAKEP POLYURETHANE COATEV TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 166 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINI5Hi D WORK A. Protect finished installation. S. Field touch-up of finished surfaces will not be permitted. Replace damaged components. End of Section SECTION 10 16 5 PAC -M 5 `1 SIGNAGE SECTION .10400 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of signage is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Furnish any materials, labor and equipment to coordinate the installation of the signs. C. Unless otherwise acceptable to the'Architect, furnish all signage and accessories by one manufacturer for the entire project. D. In addition to the requirements of these specifications, comply with the manufacturer's Instructions and recommendations for preparation of substrate, installation of anchors, and application of signage units. Coordinate with work of other trades for application of inserts or other integral equipment items. E. Provide colors and finishes of materials for signage as specified or as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors and patterns. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data showing compliance with these specifications. Submit drawings showing installation details. Provide template for exterior building letters. Provide blueline rubbing for cast plaque for approval. B. Submit color samples for signage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESSIBLE RESTROOM SIGNAGE A. Restroom signage to be constructed of plastic laminate or acrylic plastics with contrasting background color and white lettering and symbols. The sign shall meet all requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act and Texas AGceselbility Standards In all conditions. This shall include but is not limited to the following: Room Name, universal male or female symbol (in raised condition), accessibility symbol, and braille and other tactile identifiers. SECTION 10400 PAGE 1 i SIGNAGE SECTION 10400 PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Securely mount signage in strict aaoordance with manufacturer's written instructions with concealed, theftproof fasteners. _ B. Install signage level, plumb, and at the proper height. Cooperate with other trades for Installation of signage to finish surfaces. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by the Architect. End of Section SECTION 10400 PAC -7E 2 PIPE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS ANLL ACCESSORIES SECTION 10522 PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, supplementary beneral Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets. B. Fire Extinguishers C. Accessories 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Section 06100 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: toughed -in wall openings. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for extinguishers. 1.05 REFERENCES A. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. shop Drawings and Product Data 1. include physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, wall mounting brackets with mounting measurements; anchorage details, rough -in measurements, location, and details. .2. submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. S. Submit manufacturer's standard printed operation and maintenance data. a. include test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures, and re -certification requirements. 1.017 PROJECT CONDITIONS SECTION 10522 PAGE 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CA131NETS AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 10522 A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures may cause freezing. PART 2. PRODUCTS . 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Brackets 1. J. L. Industries, Bloomington, Minnesota. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co., Minneapolis, Minnesota. 5. Potter-Rommer, Inc., Cerritos, calif. 2.02 EQUIPMENT B. Fire Extinguishers 1. Type a. Fire Glass: b. Type: Dry Chemical C.. Capacity: 5 pounds d. Range: 15 feet e. UL Rating: 2A 1 OBC f. Shell Material: Enameled Steel 0. Weight: a1/2 lbs. h. Acceptable product: J.L. Industries Cosmic 5E G. Cabinets: Formed sheet steel, 16 gage, primed, galvanized, semi -recessed type, size to accommodate extinguisher(s). D. Trim: Maximum v4 inoh return to wall surface, 1/4 iMah wide face, primed steel. 1. Door: Primed steel, 16 gage thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity with roller latch. 2. Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. E. Accessorles 1. Signs: White background door With red letters "FIRE EXTINOUI5HER." Horizontal letters with vertical alignment. ,2.05 FABRICATION SECTION 10522 PAGE 2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, G,4E;INETS A►Nt7 ACCESSORIES j SECTION 10522 A. Form body of cabinet with tight inside corners and seams. B. Predrill holes for anchorage. G. Form perimeter trim and door stiles by welding, filling, and grinding smooth. D. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch. i l 2.04 F-IN15HF-5 A. Extinguishers 1. Type I - Red enamel. y B. Cabinets 1. Cabinet Trim and moor: White baked enamel.. 2. Cabinet Interior: White baked enamel. IT, PART S. EXECUTION .5.01 INSPECTION A. verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cabinets 1. Install plumb and level in wall openings. 2. Mounting height from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet as detailed on drawings. S. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Install one Type I fire extinguisher in each cabinet. End of Section SECTION 10522 R� PAC -7E 5 7 TOILET ACCESSORIES I SECTION 1050'0 PART GENERAL 1 I 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, supplementary General Conditions, Special conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work speaified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of each type of toilet accessory is located and indicated on the Drawings. S. certain aacessorles (i.e. soap dispenser, towel dispenser and seat protection cover) shall be provided by the City of Lubbock's supplier for the General contractor to install 1.03 GENERAL A. use concealed fastenings wherever possible. S. verify type of mounting surfaces; provide proper anahors or fasteners to endure permanent mounting. G. Provide locks where specified; provide same keying throughout for all acaessory units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Equal to those manufacturer's and products as specified on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Install accessories plumb, square, level and true with wall or surfaces. S. Frames of recessed accessories shall neatly trim the opening. Gaps and voids between frames and finished walls will not be allowed._., Exposed and concealed fastening shall match finish of fixtures and shall be stainless steel, theftproof type. G. Install aoncealed anchor plates to wall construction for mounting all accessories. Provide grounds or rough bucks to rigidly secure aaaessories. r SECTION 10500 FA6E 1 k TOILET ACCESSORIES SECTION 10800 P. All controls, dispensers or other operable equipment $hall be mounted no higher than -- 46 inches above the floor. 5.02 GLEANING A. Remove all manufacturer's temporary labels or marks of Identification. Glean and polish to remove all oil, grease and foreign material. Leave accessories in a neat, orderly and clean condition acceptable to the Architect. End of Section SECTION 10500 6' jk GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 SPECIAL NOTE A. The Architectural, Structural, and Electrical Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Engineer, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical plans, and shall be complied with in every respect. All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is on file at the Architect's office, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of drawings. Where the Supplementary General Conditions conflict with the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern. 1.2 CHECKING VOCUMENT5 A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Engineer of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Engineer will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.5 GENERAL A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. B. All piping and ductwork for the mechanical trade shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping and ductwork may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, �•. SECTION 15000 PAGE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL SECTION .1 5000 where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required V. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the _ building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be _ made because of the contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated,. satisfactorily operating installation. G. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Engineer shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for, the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Engineer — before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the contractor. shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. I. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Engineer before the work is started, and SECTION 15000 PAGE 2 "NERAL PROV15IONS FOR MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the contractor before the work proceeds. J. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, and material in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, paneiboards, etc. coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 5. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. K. Piping and ducts serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. L. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Engineer's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. M. The contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. N. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M" or "P" drawings, he shall notify the Engineer in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. if no notification is received, the contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Pians in accordance with the specifications. 1.4 DIMENSIONS: A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the r SECTION 15000 PAGE 5 r r GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Engineer for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.5 INSPECTION OF SITE: A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.6 ELECTRIC CONTROL WIRING OF HVAC MOTORS AND MOTOR -OPERATED EQUIPMENT: - A. Control wiring of HVAC motors and motor -operated equipment: 1. General requirements: a. It is the intent of these specifications to provide a clear delineation of responsibilities for the providing of electrical control wiring. b. Divisions 15 and 16 shall jointly coordinate with each other to insure that all control wiring Is provided as described. Co. All required items shall be furnished under the contract, with responsibilities of specific items as described hereafter, or in — Division 16 Specifications. d. While these specifications indicate the contract responsibilities of the various Divisions, they do not prevent job -site mutually — agreed upon revisions or modifications to these responsibilities provided that ultimate contract responsibilities are retained as described in the Speclfications. -- 2. Responsibilities of Division 15 (Mechanical): a. Furnish and set in place, ready for electrical connection, all HVAC motors and motor -operated HVAC equipment unless specifically — noted otherwise. b. Provide and set in place all HVAC control devices, such as relays, thermostats, electrically operated valves and related items. _ SECTION 15000 PAGE 4 r GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 S. Responsibilities of Division 16 (Electrical): a. Furnish, mount and connect to safety and disconnect switches for rooftop units, chillers, fan -coil units and similar HVAC equipment not furnished from the factory with integral safety or disconnect switches. b. connect to speed switches factory furnished on fractional horsepower fan -coil units, convectors and similar equipment. Division 16 is not required to provide field installed speed switches unless specifically noted on the Drawings. Cl. Furnish, mount and connect to single and two speed full voltage non -reversing motor starters for all mechanical equipment requiring starters such as pumps, air handling units and similar equipment unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. Generally, it is the responsibility of Division 16 (electrical) to provide and install all standard magnetic starters, except for integral starters normally provided with mechanical equipment such as chillers or rooftop units. d. connect to line and load side power wiring of solid state starters or variable frequency drives furnished by Division 15. Generally, it is the responsibility of Division 15 (mechanical) to provide and mount solid state or variable frequency drives. coordinate with Division 15 to determine exact mounting and connection details of the equipment. e. Refer to the Drawings for specific or unusual connection arrangements. f. Provide and install all HVAC interconnecting control wiring between the equipment and its associated control. install all HVAC, control wiring in accordance with Division 16. 1.1 MOTORS A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. 1.5 PROGRESS OF WORK: elf full informed as to the progress of the A. The contractor shall keep hems y p g work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Engineer or Owner. SECTION 15000 PAGE 5 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 1.5 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.10 MATERIALS ANP WORKMANSHIP A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality _ specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, inc, have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Engineer before proceeding. C. The Engineer reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Engineer's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to _ lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of_equipment. V. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. _ E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all _ construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. 1.1 1 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Where a definite material of a manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a base for competitive �- bidding. B. Where practical, in mentioning the name of a specific manufacturer, the _ specifications list alternate manufacturers whose products are SECTION 15000 PAGE 6 -- r r� f GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 acceptable. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved for review by the Engineer as to the make and type of material. Shop drawings shall be submitted in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Engineer reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the contractor. 5. The Engineer shall review contractor submittals, such as shop drawings, product data, samples and other data, as required by the Engineer, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the design concept and the information expressed in the contract documents. This review shall not include review of the accuracy or completeness of details, such as quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes, construction means or methods, coordination of the work with other trades or construction safety precautions, all of which are the sole responsibility of the contractor. The Engineer's review shall be conducted with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Engineer's judgment to permit adequate review. Review of a specific item shall not indicate that the Engineer has reviewed the entire assembly of which the item is a component. The Engineer shall not be responsible for any deviations from the contract documents not brought to the attention of the Engineer in writing by the contractor. The Engineer shall not be required to review partial submissions or those for which submissions of correlated items have not been received. c. shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the EXACT ITEM offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time. Shop drawing submittals shall consist of a three-ring binder of all shop drawings. Each section shall be properly indexed and separated from other sections. All shop drawings (" shall be certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. Provide a A SECTION 15000 PAGE 7 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 space for both the Contractor's and Engineer's review stamp. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Engineer, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. F. The Engineer reserves the right to directly charge the Contractor for time and material costs, at standard rates, if more than two (2) submittals of the same class or type of materials or equipment is required to obtain approval. 1.13 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incompleted building with tarpaulines or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. 1.14 PERMITS, FEE, ETC. A. The Contractor under each section of these specif►cations sha►I arrange for a permit from the local authority. The City will pay for the permits, however, the Contractor is responsible for obtaining the permits. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including sewer, water, gas and electric services as applicable. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications. 1.15 TESTING A. The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Engineer and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. _ 1.16 LAW5, CODES ANP ORPINANCE5 A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and SECTION 1 5000 PAGE 5 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Engineer, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.111 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install, "provide and Install', and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under. this Division of the specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. S. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. "concealed" areas are those areas which cannot be seen by the building occupants from the floor with all buildingcomponents in place. "Exposed" areas are all areas which are exposed to view by the building occupants, including mechanical rooms. G. in describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.1 S COOPERATION AND GLEANING UP: I A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one r.. SECTION 15000 PAGE 91 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from the Engineer, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. 1.1 4 COORDINATION OF TRADES: A. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Divlsion 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 5. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 1. Control devices and details 5. Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc. C. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish. D. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the — reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. E. All items specified under Divisions 15 and 1 6 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. _ SECTION 15000 PAGE 10 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL .. SECTION -15000 1.20 PAINTING A. All painting shall be done by the Contractor under Division Q. Following is a general outline of the required work for Divisions 15. 1. When the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half flat half enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports and miscellaneous metal. s. Paint all exposed sheet metal. 4. Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. Size surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. 5. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or insulation surface is visible. 6. Paint all surfaces above or behind perforated return air grilles or other open spaced air outlet devices with flat black paint. All pipes, conduits, ductwork and structural members shall be painted. These surfaces shall be painted a distance away from the grille such that no unpainted surfaces are visible to a person standing on the room side and viewing through the device. 1.21 SEALING AROUND PIPES, CONDUITS, DUCTS, ETC. A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors with approved fire stopping materials. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.22 ACCESS PANELS A. Wherever mechanical and/or electrical equipment is installed and where future access is required through either walls or ceilings and such cannot be obtained through the removable ceiling or through other means, the Contractor shall provide access doors at least 12 inches by 12 inches in size or larger if required for access. Provide access doors for all fire dampers, smoke dampers, valves, etc. 1.25 USE OF SYSTEMS A. It is considered that it will be necessary to operate the mechanical systems to provide heating and ventilation in portions of the building that are SECTION 15000 PAGE 1 1 i GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 enclosed. As systems or portions of systems become operable, they shall be operated as required to maintain habitable conditions in enclosed portions of the building that are still under construction and portions that are fully complete as may be required to properly protect installed piping, equipment and finishes. 5. In order, to provide protection to ducts, plenums, etc, install temporary filters over or in return air openings until all finished painting is completed. Protect supply outlets, coils, etc. as necessary in each case. G. Except for operation of cooling equipment to prove its performance and to adjust and balance the systems, that equipment will not be operated for comfort of construction workers. D. During warm weather the Contractor shall arrange for the operation of systems to supply a minimum of 15% and a maximum of 100 percent outside air. The systems controls shall be reset to their normal cycle of operation in each case during the times that heating is required and when the cooling equipment is operated. E. Immediately prior to the time that the systems are to be accepted by the Owner, each system shall be carefully examined and if ductwork is dirty, it shall be carefully cleaned by men skilled in that type of work. All filters shall be put in first class condition by replacement of filters and/or other procedures as directed. F. The use of the equipment for maintaining environmental and/or protective temperature conditions shall in no way constitute acceptance of that equipment and the connected piping, ducts, insulation, finishes, etc. by the Owner. Furthermore, it shall in no way shorten the guarantee period hereinafter specified. The Contractor shall either secure extended warranties from the vendors of equipment or shall purchase insurance to provide proper coverage on the equipment through the guarantee period and shall file with the Engineer substantiating affidavits from equipment manufacturers or a copy of the insurance policy covering the equipment through the guarantee period. The personal underwriting of the Contractor for equipment manufacturers' warranties is not acceptable, but his personal -- underwriting of piping, ductwork, insulation and associated materials is acceptable subject to the provisions of the contract. G. The Contractor shall provide such labor as may be required in the operation of the systems and shall pay all costs. 1.24 SCHEDULE OF WORK SECTION 15000 PAGE 12 -- GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL RPM SECTION 15000 A. The work under the various sections must be expedited and close coordination will be required in executing the work. The various trades shall perform their portion of the work at such times as directed so as to insure meeting scheduled completion dates, and to avoid delaying any other trade. The Engineer will set up completion dates, schedule the times of work in the various areas involved, etc. Each contractor shall cooperate in establishing these times and locations and shall process his work so as to insure the proper execution of it. 1.25 INSTALLATION PRAKINGS ;� A. It shall be incumbent upon the contractor to prepare special drawings as l l called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Engineer to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Engineer for his information. I' 1.26 ROUGH -IN ANP MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Engineer and finally connect as directed by the Engineer. C, Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. P. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the contractor. r. SECTION 15000 PAGE 15 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL' SECTION 15000 11.21 MARKING OF PIPE A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. Refer to Section 15 1 40 for specific requirements. 1.28 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems In this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. Refer to Section 15 1 40 for specific requirements. 1.241 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. 1.80 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare and submit 5 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Engineer will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. S. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Miring diagrams. 't. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 6. Parts list for all items. SECTION 15000 " PAGE 114 ',T GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 Q. Name and address of each vendor. 10. Filter sizes. 1.51 GUARANTEE A. Unless a longer guarantee is hereinafter called for, all work, material and equipment items shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner. All defects in labor and materials occurring during this period, as determined by the Engineer, shall be repaired and/or replaced to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. Guarantee shall be in writing and in triplicate. 1.52 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate record drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Engineer when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 5. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and 5alance Report. 1.55. CONTRACTOR'S RE5PON5151LITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION A. 5efore calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each Division shall carefully inspect his work to be sure it is complete and according to plans and specifications. END OF SECTION r r., SECTION 15000 PAGE 15 TRENCHING SECTION 15100 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating trenches for utilities from 5 feet outside building to the site utilities. B. Compacted fill from top of utility bedding to surface elevations. c. Backfilling and compaction. 1.2 DEFINITIONS: A. Utility: Any buried pipe, duct, conduit, or cable. 1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS: A. verify that survey bench mark, control point, and intended elevations for the Work are as shown on drawings. 1.4 COORDINATION: A. coordinate work with other Sections. B. verify work associated with lower elevation utilities is complete before placing higher elevation utilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIALS: A. Fill Type S: 1. Excavated and reused material. 2. Graded. 5. Free of roots, lumps larger than 5 inches, rocks larger than 1 inch, debris, large weeds and foreign material. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 PREPARATION: A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. SETION 15 100 I°A6M 1 TRENCHING SECTION 15100 B. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. C. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. D. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with Fill Type 5 and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material. 5.2 EXCAVATING: A. Excavate subsoil required for utilities to utility services. B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation and allow inspection. Remove water or materials that interfere with Work. C. Hand trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter. P. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1 /S cu yd, measured by volume. E. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess material not being used, from site. F. On excavated depths greater than 5 feet the trench walls will be shored as required by OSHA Regulations. 5.5 BACKFILLING: A. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen fill materials. B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces. C. Soil Fill Type 5: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 12 inches compacted depth. Compact soil to 95% of the density of the surrounding soil. D. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage or utilities in trench. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. 5ETION 15 100 PAGE 2 TRENCHING SECTION 15100 F. Remove surplus fill materials from site. G. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials. 5.4 TOLERANCES: A. Top Surface of Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 5.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK: A. Protect finished Work as noted under other sections. B. Reshape and re -compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction. SETION 15100 END OF SECTION PAGE 5 MOTORS SECTION 1 5 110 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. single phase electric motors. B. Three phase electric motors. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AFBMA Q - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. AFBMA 1 1 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. IEEE 1 12 - Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. D. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. E. NFPA '10 - National Electrical Code. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other sections of the specifications. B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication, and wiring instructions. 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures. B. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. conform to applicable electrical code and NFPA '10. B. Products Requiring Electrical connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' SECTION 15 1 '10 PAGE 1 MOTORS SECTION 15170 Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. — 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 01. B. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. 1.17 WARRANTY — A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Division O 1. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS — A. Motors Less Than 250 Watts, for Intermittent Service: Equipment manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications. — B. Electrical Service: 1. Refer to Division 16 for required electrical characteristics. — C. Type: 1. Open drip -proof except where specifically noted otherwise. 2. Motors: Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment. 5. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type. D. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power factor. — E. Wiring Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 'f 0, threaded for conduit. 2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly,' .- provide conduit connection in end frame. 2.2 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS SECTION 1 5 1 i0 PAGE 2 µ MOTORS 67 SECTION 15 1 "10 A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque. B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current. c. Pull-up Torque: Up to 550 percent of full load torque. D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. E. Motors: capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. F. Drip -proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees c temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) Insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.5 THREE PHASE POWER - SOUIRREL GAGE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1 /2 times full load torque. B. Starting current: Six times full load current. c. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics. D. Design, construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors. E. Insulation System: NEMA class B or better. F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 1 12. Load test motors to determine free from electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data. G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T -Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. H. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti -friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA a, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V -belt pulley with belt centre line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes Con nameplate. SECTION 1 5 1 '?O - PAGE 5 MOTORS SECTION 15 1 ZD I. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA M6 1. J. Part Winding Start Where Indicated: Use part of winding to reduce locked rotor starting current to approximately 60 percent of full winding locked rotor current while providing approximately 50 percent of full winding locked rotor torque. K. Nominal Efficiency: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with IEEE 1 12. L. Nominal Power Factor: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with IEEE 1 12. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 }APPLICATION A. Single phase motors for fans: Capacitor start type. S. Motors located in exterior locations: Totally enclosed type. 5.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 5. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position. C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate. ENO OF SECTION SECTION 15 1 '70 PAGE 4 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 15 1 q 0 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. stencils. D. Pipe Markers. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASME A 15. 1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other sections of the specifications. S. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of other sections of the specifications. B. Record actual locations of tagged valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES SECTION 15 1 QO PAGE 1 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 15 1 ct0 A. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light — contrasting background color. 2.2 TAGS A. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1 /2 inch diameter with smooth edges. B. Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame. 2.5 STENCILS — A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. 5/4 to 1- 1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1 /2 inch high letters. 2. 1- 1/2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 5/4 inch high letters. S. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1 /2 inch high letters. B. Stencil Paint: Semi- gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME A 15. 1. 2.4 PIPE MARKERS A. Color: Conform to ASME A 1 S. 1. _ B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. PART 5 EXECUTION — 5.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the Painting Specification for stencil painting. _ 5.2 INSTALLATION SECTION 15 110 1 PAGE 2 7 L MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION P" SECTION 15190 .I. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers, plastic tape pipe markers, or stencilled painting. use tags on piping 5/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. K. Identify ductwork with stencilled painting. Identify with furnace and coil unit identification number and area served. Locate identification at furnace and coil unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. END OF SECTION r SECTION 15190 F PAGE 5 A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. 5. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Painting Section. I D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Identify funace and coil units, heat transfer equipment, and tanks with stencil Tpainting. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags. G. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic f nameplates. H. Identify thermostats relating to furnace and coils or valves with nameplates. ` I. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. .I. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers, plastic tape pipe markers, or stencilled painting. use tags on piping 5/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. K. Identify ductwork with stencilled painting. Identify with furnace and coil unit identification number and area served. Locate identification at furnace and coil unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. END OF SECTION r SECTION 15190 F PAGE 5 PIPING INSULATION SECTION 15260 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 1 a5 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Gement. B. ASTM 0335 Steady -State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation. C. ASTM C44 Q - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic -setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. D. ASTM C54-1 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. E. ASTM 0640 - Corkboard and Cork Pipe Thermal insulation. F. ASTM E54 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. G. ASTM Eci6 - Water vapor Transmission of Materials. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other sections of the specifications. B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E64. B. All materials shall not contain asbestos and shall be asbestos free. SECTION, 15260 PAGE 1 PIPING INSULATION SECTION 15260 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. _- 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANPLINCG A. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic. C. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. '- 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER A. Insulation: ASTM C541; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K' value : ASTM C555, 0.24 at 15 degrees F. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: -20 degrees F. S. Maximum Service Temperature: 650 degrees F. 4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. B. Vapor Barrier Jacket 1. White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E416; 0.02 perm inches. S. Secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. C. Tie Ntire: 16 gage stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum .12 inch centers. D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive 1. Compatible with insulation. SECTION 15260 PAGE 2 PIPING INSULATION 5EGTION 152&0 E. Insulating Gement/Plastic 1. ASTM G 1 cis; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. F. Fibrous Glass Fabric 1. cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq, yd weight. 2. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density. 6. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. H. Insulating Gement 1. ASTM C44a. 2.2 JACKET5 A. PVC Plastic 1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off white color. a) . Minimum Service Temperature: O degrees F. b) Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c) Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM EQ6; 0.002 perm inches. e) Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E64; 25. f) Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E64; 50. g) Thickness: 15 mil. h) connections: Brush on welding adhesive. 2. covering Adhesive Mastic a) compatible with insulation. B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed. 1. Fabric: 6 oz sq, yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 5.2 INSTALLATION SECTION 15260 PAGE 5 PIPING INSULATION SECTION 15260 A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. On exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Insulated cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. 5. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. 4. PVC fitting covers may be used. S. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. 6. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. 17. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory applied or field applied. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. S. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive. 4. PVC fitting covers may be used. 5. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F �or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. 6. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment. E. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1 /2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 5. Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. — 4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert Material: ASTM 0640 cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. F. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. 5.5 TOLERANCE A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 SECTION 15260 PAGE 4 PIPING INSULATION SECTION 15260 percent at normal conditions, as materials indlaated. 5.4 GLASS FIBER INSULATION SCHEDULE PIPING SYSTEMS PIPE SIZE THICKNESS A. Plumbing Systems Inch Inch Domestic Hot Water Supply All sizes 1/2" Domestic Hot Water Recirc All sizes 1/2" {� Domestic Gold Water All sizes 1/2" ENO OF SECTION 1� . I e 71 SECTION 15260 P I. it PAGE 5 4 } DUCTWORK INSULATION r SECTION 15290 i r , PART 1 GENERAL E' 1. 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductwork insulation. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM G5 1 S - Stead -State Heat t Flux Measurements and Thermal r Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. ! B. ASTM C555 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation. G. ASTM E54 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. i D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. a 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provision of other sections of the specifications. 5. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness T for each service, and locations. G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures which ensure 17 acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 'I � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE �j A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84. 7 B. All materials shall not contain asbestos and shall be asbestos free. I 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS pF A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. SECTION 15290 PAGE 1 I >I DUCTWORK INSULATION SECTION 152Q0 r B. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic. C. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B.. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 _ hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS .. 2.1 61 -ASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Insulation: ASTM 0553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1 . 'K' ('Ksi') value : ASTM C5 16, 0.2 Q at i 5 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume. 4. Density: 1.0 Ib/cu ft. B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm. 5. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. C. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. D. Tie Yore: Annealed steel, 16 gage. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 5.2 INSTALLATION - SECTION 15 2 Q 0 PAGE 2 7 T DUCTWORK INSULATION SECTION 1 5 2 9 0 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's insturctions. B. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 5. continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. C. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 71, 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. D. External Duct insulation Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. 5. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. S. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. 5.5 TOLERANCE A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at normal conditions, as materials indicated. 5.4 FLEXI5LE 6AL55 F15ER DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE DUCTWORK Supply Ducts Return Ducts END OF SECTION �•• SECTION 1 5 2 a O k 4 THICKNESS Inch 21- 1 "1 1/2" PAGE 5 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410 PART) GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. 1. Sanitary sewer. 2. Domestic water. 5. Natural gas. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASME B 16.5 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. B. ASME B 16.1 6 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. C. ASME B 16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. D. ASME 55 1.1 - Power Piping. E. ASME 153 1.2 - Fuel Gas Piping. F. ASME 55 1.a - Building Service Piping. 6. ASTM ASS - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. H. ASTM A'74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. I. ASTM A254 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. J. ASTM B52 - Solder Metal. K. ASTM 555 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. L. ASTM 0564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. M. ASTM 02-129 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. N. ASTM 02555 - Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. SECTION 15410 PAGE 1 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15 41 O SECTION 15 4 1 O PAGE 2 O. ANNA 0500 - Gate Valves for Water and Sewer Systems. P. ANNA C65 1 - Disinfecting Water Mains. Q. GISPI 501 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary _ Systems. R. NCPWB - Procedure Specifications for Pipe Welding. S. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other section of the specifications. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.4 PROJECT RELOAD DOCUMENTS A. Record actual locations of valves. . 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 1 Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. "- B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 4. D. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with local plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. _ SECTION 15 4 1 O PAGE 2 '; I PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15 410 C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. G. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A'T 4 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: ASTM 0564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum. 2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM Al service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub -and -spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM 0564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. 2.5 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM Al 4, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. �.. SECTION 15410 PAGE 5 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15 4 10 2. Joints: ASTM 0564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum. 5. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 501, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 51 O, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp -and- _ shield assemblies. 2.4 WATER PIPING, BURIED A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B42, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B 1 6.16, cast copper alloy or ASME B 16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM 552, solder, Grade 95TA. 2.5 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM 588, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.16, cast copper alloy or ASME B 1 6.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM 552, solder, Grade 41 STA. 2.6 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE ` A. Steel Pipe: ASTM ASS or A 120 Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B 1 6.5, malleable iron, or ASTM A254, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI BS 1. 1, ANSI B5 1.2, ANSI B5 1.9, or ASME Sec 1. _ 2.1 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: 150 prig malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. -- 2.6 GATE VALVES A. Up To and Including 2 Inches: 1 . Bronze body, bronze trim, non -rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder or threaded ends. SECTION 154 10 PAGE 4 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410 B. Provide valve charts for each valve size utilized. 2.9 BALL VALVES A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze two piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, solder or threaded ends with union. B. Provide valve charts for each valve size utilized. 2.10 PLUG VALVES A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non- lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends. B. Provide valve charts for each valve size utilized. 2.11 RELIEF VALVES A. Bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled. B. Provide valve charts for each valve size utilized. 2.11 SNING CHECK VALVES A. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze swing disc, solder ends. PART S EXECUTION S.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over - excavated. 5.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 5.5 INSTALLATION SECTION 15410 PAGE 5 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. V. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. �- G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. _ H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed., I. install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. L. Excavate in accordance with Section 15 100 for work of this Section. M. Backfill in accordance with Section 15100 for work of this Section. N. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. �- O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. R. Provide one plug valve wrench for every ten plug valves sized 2 inches and smaller, minimum of one. 5.4 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus _ connections. SECTION 154 10 PAGE 6 -- I. PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410 B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. c. Install gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. D. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. E. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. 5.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1 /8 inch per foot. Maintain gradients. B. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. 5.6 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC VSATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between ?.4 and 1.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). c. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 5o to 50 mg/L residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AINiNA C65 1. 5.1 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and r■ SECTION 15 4 10 PAGE '7 1. PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410 ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. B. Provide new water service complete with approved water meter. END OF SECTION SECTION 15410 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 154SO PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floor Drains B. Cleanouts. C. Circulator Pump 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions in other sections. B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, finishes, and Pump Data. 1. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements. 2. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. S. Provide pump electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions in other sections. B. Accept specialties on site In original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified. C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non -overloading in parallel or individual operation, SECTION 15450 PAGE 1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15430 — operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by — Underwriters Laboratories Inr as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. r-. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for in-line circulator. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOOR DRAINS A. Floor Drain (FD): -. 1. Manufacturers: a. Wade Model W-1 103. 2. ANSI A 1 12.21.1; galvanized cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel -bronze strainer. 2.2 CLEANOUTS — A. Interior Finished Floor Areas (CD): 1. Manufacturers: a. Wade Model W-6050-5. 2. Galvanized cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in — service areas and square gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. B. Interior Finished Wali Areas (WCo): 1. Manufacturers: a. Wade Model W -6450-R.. -- 2. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. 2.5 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. Casing: Bronze, rated for 12 5 prig working pressure. SECTION 15430 PAGE,2 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15480 B. Impeller: Bronze. G. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings. D. seal: carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. E. Drive: Flexible coupling. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. G. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. rT D. Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or I group of fixtures. Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 5/4 inch minimum, and minimum 18 inches long. E. Reinstall the existing relocated water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to NFPA 54 requirements. F. coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping, gas venting and electrical work to achieve operating system. G. Pumps: 1. Provide line sized isolating valve and line sized soft seated check valve and balancing valve on discharge. 2. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. S. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non -overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. SECTION 15450 r END OF SECTION PAGE 5 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Lavatories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping. B. Section 1 5480 - Plumbing Specialties. 1.5 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME A 1 12.6.1 -supports for Off -the -Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use. B. ANSI/ASME A 1 1 2.1 8.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings. G. ANSI/ASME A 1 12.1 9. 1 - Enamelled Gast Iron Plumbing Fixtures. D. ANSI/ASME A 1 1 2.1 9.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. E. ANSI/ASME A 1 12. 1 9.8 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use). F. ANSI/ASME A 1 12.1 9.4 - Porcelain Enamelled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures. G. ANSI/ASME A 1 12. 1 9.5 - Trim for Water -Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions in other sections. B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough -in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION SECTION 15440 PAGE 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440 A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. B. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Oualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the -- Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, store, and protect products under provisions in other sections. B. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS _ A. Supply two sets of faucet washers, flush valve service kits, lavatory supply fittings, and toilet seats. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TANK TYPE YqATER CLOSETS A. Bowl: _. 1. Manufacturer: EI jer Model 09 1-1 1 35. 2. ASME A 1 12.11.2; floor mounted, siphon jet, vitreous china, 15 inches high close -coupled closet combination with elongated rim, insulated vitreous china closet tank with fittings and lever flushing valve, bolt caps. B. seat: SECTION 15440 PAGE 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440 1. Manufacturer: Beneke Model 52155. 2. Solid white plastic, open front, brass bolts, without cover. 2.2 LAVATORIES A. Vitreous China Wail Hung Basin (P-1): 1. Manufacturer: EI jer Model 05 1-2644. 2. ASME A 1 12.1 41.2; vitreous china wall hung lavatory 20 x 16 inch minimum, with 4 inch high back, drillings on 4 inch centers, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soap depression. B. Supply Fitting: 1. Manufacturer: Eljer Model 557-1062. 2. ASME A 1 12. 16. 1; chrome plated combination supply fitting with water economy aerator with maximum 2.0 gpm flow, single lever handle. C. Accessories: 1. Chrome plated 1 '1 gage brass P -trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon. 2. Offset waste with perforated open strainer. 5. Screwdriver stops. 4. Flexible supplies. V. Wall Mounted Carrier: 1. Manufacturer: Wade. 2. ASME A 1 12.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 5.2 PREPARATION SECTION 15440 PAGE 5 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440 A. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough -in schedule for particular fixtures. . 5.5 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with screwdriver stops, reducers, and escutcheons. G. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. — E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in other sections of the specifications. F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. G. Install with proper wrench, scratched valves will be replaced at no cost to the City. 5.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 5.5 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 5.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED IoNORK 'A. Do not permit use of fixtures. — END OF SECTION SECTION 15440 PAGE 4 FORGED AIR FURNACES SECTION 15625 PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Forced air furnaces. B. Refrigerant cooling coils. C. Air cooled condensing units. D. Controls. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air -Conditioning and Air -Source Heat Pump Equipment. B. ASHRAE 14 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Condensing units. C. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. D. ASHRAE QOA - Energy Conservation in New Building Design. E. ASHRAE 103 - Heating Seasonal Efficiency of Central Furnaces and Boilers, Methods of Testing. F. NFPA 54 (AGA 2225.1) - National Fuel Gas Code. G. NFPA ROA - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. H. NFPA 2 1 1 - Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances. I. UL 20'7 - Refrigerant -Containing Components and Accessories, Non -Electrical. J. UL 505 - Refrigeration and Air -Conditioning Condensing and Compressor Units. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Procedures for submittals are specified in other sections of the specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical SECTION 15625 PAGE 1 FORGED AIR FURNACES SECTION 15625 characteristics and connection requirements, and duct connections. C. Product Data: Provide capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies reuired for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and duct connections. — D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate assembly, . support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experlence. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters — Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until ready for immediate installtion of units. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide five years manufacturers warranty for refrigeration compressors. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide one set of filters for each furnace. PART 2 PRODUCTS — 2.1 6AS FIRED FURNACES A. Manufacturer: Trane Model XE 98. S. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. — 1. Carrier. SECTION 15625 PAGE 2 it FORGED AIR FURNACES SECTION 15625 c. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre -wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, heating element, controls, air filter, and accessories; wired for single power connection with control transformer. 1. Air Flow configuration: Upf low. 2. Heating: Natural gas fired. S. Electric Refrigeration: Refrigerant cooling coil and outdoor package containing compressor, condenser coil and condenser fan. 4. Minimum seer allowed is 10.5. V. cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors with safety interlock switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner. E. Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type rubber mounted with direct drive. F. Motor: 1 '750 rpm multiple speed, permanently lubricated, hinge mounted. 6. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel or Stainless steel welded construction. H. Gas Burner: 1. Atmospheric type with adjustable combustion air supply, 2. Gas valve to provide 100 percent safety gas shut-off; 24 volt combining pressure regulation, safety pilot, manual set (On -Off), pilot filtration, automatic electric valve. S. Electronic pilot ignition, with electric spark igniter. 4. 1 Automatic vent damper with synchronous spring return damper motor. I. Gas Burner safety controls: 1. Thermocouple sensor: Prevents opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven and stops gas flow on ignition failure. 2. Flame rollout switch: Installed on burner box and prevents operation. 3. vent safety shutoff sensor: Temperature sensor installed on draft hood and prevents operation, manual reset. 4. Limit control: Fixed stop at maximum, permissible setting, de -energizes burner on excessive bonnet temperature, automatic resets. J. Operating controls 1. Room Thermostat: cycles burner to maintain room temperature setting. 2. Supply Fan control: Energize from bonnet temperature independent of burner controls, with adjustable timed off delay and fixed timed on delay, with manual switch for continuous fan operation. K. Air Filters: 1 inch thick glass fiber, disposable type arranged for easy replacement. Filter rack shall be installed with the units. g� SECTION 15623 'I. PAGE 3 FORCED AIR FURNACES SECTION 15625 L. Performance: 1. Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than requirements of ASHRAM 90A; seasonal efficiency to ASHRAE 10$. Refer to drawing for Scheduled capacities. 2.2 EVAPORATOR COIL UNIT A. Manufacturer: Trane. 5. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. Carrier. C. Evaporator Coil: Copper tube aluminum fin assembly, galvanized drain pan, drain connection, refrigerant piping connections, restricted distributor or thermostatic expansion valve, steel cabinet with baked enamel finish and insulation. 2.5 CONDENSING UNITS A. Manufacturer: Trane 5. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. Carrier. Co. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI 2 10/240. Testing: ASHRAE 14. 0. Compressor: Hermetic $600 rpm, resiliently mounted integral with condenser, with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high pressure control, motor overload protection, service valves and drier. Provide time delay control to prevent short _ cycling. E. Refrigeration Accessories: Filter Orier, high pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure switch (automatic reset), service valves and gauge ports, thermometer well (in liquid line). Provide thermostatic expansion valves. Provide refrigerant lines, factory cleaned, dried, pressurized and sealed, with insulated suction line. F. Air Cooled Condenser: Aluminum fin and copper tube coil, with direct drive axial propeller fan resiliently mounted, galvanized fan guard. 2.4 THERMOSTATS A. Adjustable Room Thermostat: Low voltage, to control burner operation, compressor and condenser fan and supply fan to maintain temperature setting. SECTION 15 6 2$ PAGE 4 FORGED AIR FURNACES SECTION 15623 Include system selector switch (heat -off -cool) and fan control switch (auto -on). Provide a lockable metal cover over each thermostat and cover shall be master keyed to the same key system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. verify that floors are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that proper power supply is available. G. Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA QOA. B. Pipe drain from cooling coils to nearest floor drain. C. Install gas fired furnaces in accordance with ANSI 2223.1 (NFPA 54). D. Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE 15. E. Mount air cooled condensing unit on a 4" thick concrete pad. END OF SECTION SECTION 15625 PAGE 5 PONIER VENTILATORS SECTION 15890 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof exhausters. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AMCA 9 Q - Standards Handbook. S. AMCA 2 10 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. Co. AMCA 500 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. D. AMCA 501 Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. E. NFPA 9O - National Electrical Code. F. UL 905 - Power Ventilators. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under the provisions of other sections of the specifications. B. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. Provide operating curves for air flow versus RPM and for RPM versus horsepower. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF EXHAUSTERS SECTION 15890 PAGE 1 POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 15670 A. Manufacturer: Greenheck. 5. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. Gook. 2. Penn. C. Product Requirements: 1. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMGA 2 10 and bear the AMGA — Certified Rating Seal. 2. Sound Ratings: AMGA 501, tested to AMGA 500, and bear AMGA Certified Sound Rating Seal. 5. Fabrication: Conform to AMGA 9 a. 4. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL '705. P. Fan Unit: V -belt or direct driven as indicated, with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor; 1/2 inch mesh, 0.62 inch thick aluminum wire birdscreen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets. E. Roof Curb: 6 inch high of galvanized steel aluminum with continuously welded seams, built-in cant strips and factory installed nailer strip. — F. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non -fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor. G. 5ackdraft Hamper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with nylon bearings. — PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. S. Secure roof exhausters with cadmium plated steel or aluminum lag screws to . roof curb. C. Extend ducts to roof exhausters into roof curb. D. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof exhausters. E. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, and bearings are lubricated. _ SECTION 15610 PAGE 2 POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 156'10 END OF SECTION SECTION 15 610 PAGE 5 DUCTWORK SECTION 156Q0 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel. B. ASTM A 50 - Weight of Coating on Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. ' C. ASTM A 1 6'T - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. D. ASTM A 366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality. E. ASTM A 525 - 6eneral Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. F. ASTM A 52'1 - Steel Sheet, zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming Ouality. G. ASTM A 566 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High -Strength, Low -Alloy, Hot -Rolled and cold -Rolled. H. ASTM A 56Q - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Ouality. I. NBS PS 15 - Voluntary Product Standard for custom Contact -Molded Reinforced-Polyestor chemical Resistant Process Equipment. J. NFPA QOA - Installation of Air conditioning and Ventilating Systems. K. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written SECTION 156Q0 PAGE 1 DUCTWORK SECTION 15690 permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other sections of the specifications. B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials and duct connectors. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction — standards - Metal and Flexible. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. — 1."1 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 9OA standard. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS SECTION 1 5690 PAGE 2 W I DUCTWORK SECTION 15690 A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A52'? galvanized steel sheet, lock -forming quality, having G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM AQO. 5. Insulated Flexible Ducts: 1. Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. 2. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative. S. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 4. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 1 60 degrees F. Co. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. D. sealant: R 1. Non -hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. E. Hanger Rod: ASTM A56; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.2 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with 5MACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. S. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1 /2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 50 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in 5MACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connections may be used. PART 5 EXECUTION 17 SECTION 15690 I 0 PAGE 5 VUCTYVORK SECTION 158Q0 5.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. I Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HYAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. C. Puct Sizes are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. F. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. H. connect diffusers to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. 5.2 GLEANING A. clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. B. clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. SECTION 15 5 Q 0 PAGE 4 7 7 7 a 7 R 7 7 7 1 r 7 7 1 7 DUCTWORK SECTION 15890 5.5 SCHEDULES A. DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Supply Steel Return Steel General Exhaust Steel 5. DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS Supply 1 inch Return 1 inch General Exhaust 1/2 inch END OF SECTION SECTION 15890 PAGE 5 DUCTY+IORK ACCESSORIES ,.I SECTION 15 Q 10 71, PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air turning devices/extractors. B. Duct access doors. IT, ' C. Duct test holes. D. Fire dampers. E. Flexible duct connections. F. volume control dampers. 1.2 REFERENCES �+ A. NFPA ciOA - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction standards - Metal and Flexible. `I Co. UL 55 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire -Protection service. D. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. I 1.5 SUBMITTALS TA. Submit under of other sections of the specifications. provisions B. shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control I dampers, duct access doors and ducttest holes. T, C. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies Including volume control dampers, duct access doors, duct test holes and hardware used. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate for fire dampers. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS T SECTION 15 ci 10 PAGE 1 it DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15 101 10 A. Record actual locations of access doors and test holes. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' ` Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide two of each size and type of fusible link. _ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. Multi -blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. ^' 2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. 5. Fabrication: Rigid and close -fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 16 Inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. C. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.5 DUCT TEST HOLES SECTION 15 9 10 PAGE 2 DUCTAORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15 9 10 A. Temporary Test Holes: Gut or drill inducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist -on metal caps. 2.4 FIRE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA QOA and UL 555, and as indicated. 8. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. configure with blades out of air stream. C. Fusible Links: UL 55, separate at 160 degrees F with adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers. 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire -retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density SO oz per sq, yd. 2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately s inches wide. S. Metal: 5 inch wide, 24 gage galvanized steel. 2.6 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS. A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 12 x 45 Inch. C. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil -impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. PART S EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION A. install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA C1 OA, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. SECTION 15 9 10 PAGE 5 DUCTlNORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15 g 10 Refer to Section 15880 for duct construction and pressure class. S. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as Indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication. "- V. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. E. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components and where required by authorities having -- jurisdiction. install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. F. Vemonstrate re -setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative. G. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts .� associated with fans and motorized equipment. H. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take -off. I. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, _ regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. END OF SECTION SECTION 1 5 g 10 PAGE 4 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SECTION 154140 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Diffusers. 5. Registers/grilles. Co. Louvers 1.2 REFERENCES A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual. B. ASHRAE "10 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other sections of the specifications. B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and Inlet performance in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS SECTION 15Q40 PAGE 1 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SECTION 15940 2.1 PERFORATED FACE CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus Model PSC -NT. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Krueger. b. Metalaire. 5. Type: Square, four way pattern, full perforated removable face. C. Frame: Surface mount or T -bar type as indicated on the drawings. D. Fabrication: Steel or Aluminum with baked enamel off-white finish. E. Accessories: Opposed blade damper and multi -louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. 2.2 PERFORATED RETURN OR EXHAUST GRILLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus Model PAR -NT. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. • Krueger - b. Metalaire. 5. Type: Perforated face and removable face, square or round neck as indicated on drawings. C. Frame: T -BAR D. Fabrication: Aluminum with aluminum frame and baked enamel off white finish. E. Accessories: Exhaust grilles only - provide with opposed blade damper adjustable "- from grill face. 2.S WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus Model 501 FL Supply/550 FL Return. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Krueger. b. Metalaire. a. J b S. SECTION 15940 PAGE 2 AIR OUTLETS AN37 INLETS SECTION 15440 B. Type: streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 5/4 inch minimum depth, 5/4 inch maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, horizontal face, single deflection. C. Frame: 1-1 /4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. D. Fabrication: Aluminum with 20 gage frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white enamel or mill finish. Coordinate finish with Architect. E. Damper: Integral, gang -operated opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.5 Louvers A. Manufacturers: 1. Cesco Model SLS2-JB45. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Ruskin. B. Type: 2 inch deep with blades or 45 degree slope with insect screen, heavy channel frame. C. Fabrication: 16 gage thick galvanized steel, welded assembly, with factory prime coat finish color to be selected. D. Frame: Furnish with channel frame. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, -and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. SECTION 15440 PAGE S SECTION 15 a 40 T 'I T n 7 it GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16000 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. Examine all Drawings, Specifications, and associated Contract Documents and coordinate them with work described in this Division of the Specification. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work covered by Division 16 of the Specifications includes the furnishing of all materials, labor, transportation, tools, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary for the complete installation of all electrical work required in the Contract Documents. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in every respect. C. All items noted, indicated, and called for herein and on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor unless noted to be furnished by others. These items may include wiring, conduit systems, electrical equipment, and other electrical systems required for a complete system. D. In the event that additional or special construction is required, the Contractor is responsible for providing all material and equipment which are usually furnished with such construction in order to complete the installation, whether indicated or not. E. The Contractor is advised to -visit the premises and thoroughly familiarize himself with existing conditions including any conditions on which his work might depend. Advise the Architect of any discrepancy or conflict prior to bidding. The submission of bids is deemed evidence of the Contractor's coordination of all existing conditions and the inclusion of all considerations for existing conditions into his bid. 1.05 PRANN65 AND SPECIFICATIONS A. These Specifications are accompanied by Drawings and details of the Installations indicating the locations of equipment, outlets, controls, circuits, and related items. The Drawings and these Specifications are complimentary to each other, comprising the contract Section 16000 PA6E 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16000 Documents, and what is required by one is as binding as if required by both. Where conflicts may occur between the Drawings and the Specifications, the most stringent interpretation of the design concept is binding unless the Architect waives this provision. B. if the Contractor deems it necessary to change or depart from indications, requirements, or similar instructions of the Drawings or Specifications, submit to the Architect or Architect representative for review details of and reasons for the proposed departures. Do not make changes or departures without prior approval. 1.04 CODES, STANDARDS AND FEES A. General code compliance: 1. in general, comply with the current editions of the following codes, standards, ordinances, regulations, etc.: a. National Electrical Code (NEC) (NFPA '70). b. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). _ C.. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). d. Uniform Building Code (UBC). e. Uniform Fire Code (UFC). — f. National Fire Protection Association Codes (NFPA), including Life Safety Code. g. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). h. Occupational Safety and Health Acts (OSHA). I. Illuminating Architecting Society (IES). j. Insulated Cable Architects Association (ICEA). _ k. Federal Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). L State of Texas Elimination of Architectural Barriers Act (Texas Civil Statutes). _ M. City Electrical Codes and Ordinances. n. The terms and conditions of services of the electrical utility. o.. Any other authorities that may have lawful jurisdiction pertaining to the work specified. 2. Refer to the individual specification sections for detailed references to applicable standards. Where specific codes or standards are listed individually in other sections of these Specifications, the intent is to call attention to the requirements of these particular codes or standards and not — to imply that the previously listed codes or standards do not apply• B. None of the terms or provisions of this Specification waive any of Section 1 6000 PAGE 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSOR ALL LL ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16000 the rules, regulations, or requirements of authorities with standards governing the construction work. In any instance where these Specifications call for materials for construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the codes, the provisions of these Specifications take precedence. In case of direct conflict between applicable Godes and the Contract Documents, the Godes govern. Co. The Contractor is responsible for all permits, fees, and licenses ?� required due to or, because of this project. Include costs of all such permits or fees in the bid. No additional compensation will be made for any required inspection, permit, license, or fee. 1.05 SUPERVISION A. Provide a competent foreman at the building site to receive l instructions and to act for the contractor. 5. The Architect or Architect's representative reserves the right to '17 observe the work at any time. Give assistance, as may be required, to the representative or observer during inspection of the work. G. Expeditiously carry out recommendations made by authorized persons. Replace or revise unsatisfactory material or workmanship in a timely manner. D. The Contractor is responsible for work methods, safety considerations and contract compliance. The presence of the Architect or Architect's representative at the Job site or his observance of the Contractor's work does not relieve the Contractor of any safety or work related responsibilities. l I 1.06 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of twelve 12 months after the final acceptance of work unless a longer guarantee period is required by another Section or Division of the Specifications or another portion of the Contract Documents. 1.0i PU5LIC OR PRIVATE UTILITIES A. Where noted, the Contract Documents reflect the general locations and sizes of utilities known to exist and to which modifications and/or extensions are to be made. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to field verify locations and to coordinate with utility 5 Section 16000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16000 company personnel. S. Include with the bid all costs for utility work for which the utility requires reimbursement. Reimbursable casts may include items such as material, labor, overtime, ditching, or other costs. — 1.08 BUILDINCG CONSTRUCTION AND LAYOUT OF WORK A. Consult all Drawings and Specifications to thoroughly familiarize 'oneself with the type and quality of construction to be provided on this project. B. The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic in character. installation details are subject to the requirements of structural and architectural conditions as well as code and ordinance provisions. C. Plan the installation so that work will be concealed in walls, ceilings, chases and related portions of the building unless specifically noted or indicated to be exposed. D. The location of electrical items is indicated approximately on the Electrical Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and exact details in regard to location of outlets, equipment, and other items. Exact locations are to be determined by — actual measurements and equipment shop drawings. Symbols or notes for equipment starters, disconnects, and similar items are provided to alert the Contractor of the need for such equipment and _ are not be construed to Identify the exact placement of the required items. E. Consult the Architectural Details to determine wall finishes and locations of wall mounted signs, boards, mirrors, and similar items to insure that electrical outlets do not interfere with wall finishes or materials attached to walls. 1.0a EXISTING FACILITIES _ A. The Contractor is responsible for any damage to the existing facilities caused by him and his workmen, and must repair or replace damaged materials or surfaces with items acceptable to the Architect. B. All demolition of existing electrical facilities shall be performed by Section 16000 PAGE 4 7, 7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16000 Division 16 unless noted or directed otherwise. 1.10 SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. Within a minimum of thirty (50) days after the contract has been awarded, submit for approval complete data covering equipment and materials which the Contractor proposes to furnish and for which submittal information is required. Consult the General and Special Conditions of the Contract Documents to determine if a faster response time than thirty days is required. E7 Section 16000 2. Submit all data at one time in three ring hard back or heavy paper binders sized for enclosures. Partial submittals may only be made for large projects and only with the prior approval of the Architect. S. The Architect and Owner will each retain one copy of each submittal. Provide sufficient additional copies for the PAGE 5 B. General submittal requirements: 1. Before submitting shop drawings or any related material to the Architect, contractor shall: a. Thoroughly review safety practices, precautions, and programs for the construction process and determine if any proposed or indicated construction or sequences of construction will or may possibly cause undue hazards, fail to properly protect workers, or otherwise violate the letter or intent of applicable safety practices. Any such question of compromise of safety shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Architect. b. Review each submission for conformance with the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and operations of construction. c. Coordinate all items to determine if the physical sizes of the submitted Items are in accordance with the allowable sizes or dimensions as indicated on the Drawings and as called for on any dimensioned Architectural plans. t I d. Approve each submittal prior to submission to the Architect. Stamp or otherwise acknowledge that the submission has been reviewed and approved prior to submission. e. Notify and document in the submittal index any deviation from specified materials. E7 Section 16000 2. Submit all data at one time in three ring hard back or heavy paper binders sized for enclosures. Partial submittals may only be made for large projects and only with the prior approval of the Architect. S. The Architect and Owner will each retain one copy of each submittal. Provide sufficient additional copies for the PAGE 5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL ELECTRICAL WORK C. section 16000 SECTION 16000 Contractor's use and the use of his suppliers. Submittal documents: 1. Provide a cover sheet with the following information: the title of the submittal; the name and location of the building; the names of the Architect and the name of the entity making the submittal; the supply house(s) supplying the equipment, and the date of the submittal. 2. Equipment requiring submittal• a. Lighting fixtures, lenses, lamps, and ballasts. b. Panelboards, switchboards, and transformers. Co. disconnect and safety switches. d. Starters and the loads that they control. e. Contactors, time clocks, and photocells. f. Fuses. g. Wiring devices and plates. s. At the Architect's request, the following equipment and items must also be submitted: a. Conduit, raceways, and fittings. b. Wires and cables. c. Boxes. Submittal approval and review: 1. Submittals which are submitted in the manner outlined previously will be reviewed by the Architect. 2. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of any time constraints for equipment order placement, release, or similar requirements that make expeditious submittal approval required. The Architect will then make a good faith effort to expedite said submittals. Otherwise, submittals will be reviewed during the course of normal work. 3. The Architect's approval and review process is provided under the following conditions: a. The Architect will make a good faith effort to evaluate all materials and equipment submitted. b. The Architect may require additional documentation, tests, information, or other data in order to finalize the approval process. If this additional documentation or information. is not provided, is provided in an unsatisfactory manner, or is not provided in a timely manner, the affected materials and equipment shall be furnished as specified, complete in all respects. c. The approval review will be performed only for general conformance with the design concept of the project PAGE 6 7 i I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16000 and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. d. Modifications or comments made on or attached to the shop drawings or submittals do not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. e. Approval of a speciflc item does not include approval of the assembly of which the item is a component. f. Quantities of materials or numbers of items to be Installed are solely the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.11 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Unless identified as a sole source item, the listing of product manufacturers, catalog numbers, etc., on the Drawings and in the various sections of the Specifications is intended only to establish a standard of quality. However, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to review all items he wishes to substitute with the Architect to determine if such substitutions meet the requirements and intent of the Specifications and the Drawings. B. Unless noted otherwise, the following categories of items shall each be furnished by a single manufacturer: 1. switchboards, panelboards, disconnect switches. 2. Starters and contactors. s. Lighting fixture lamps. 4. Fuses. S. Wiring devices and plates. The Architect reserves the right to disqualify a manufacturer from supplying a portion of the items in a category if the manufacturer cannot furnish all items in a category. C. The Contractor may submit substitute materials or methods (unless such substitution is prohibited on the Drawings or in the Specifications) which he feels are equal or superior to those specified. if the Contractor does submit alternate materials or methods, it is understood that the Contractor: 1. Has Investigated the substitute product and determined that it has all the same accessories and is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. Has coordinated the installation of the equipment which he proposes to substitute with all trades and Includes the costs for any changes required for the substitution. 5 Section 16000 PAGE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16000 5. Waives any and all claims for additional costs related to the substitution. 4. Will,secure authorization for substitution from the Architect prior to ordering and installing the substitute. 1.1 2 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Keep a set of Drawings on the job, noting all changes made in these Drawings in connection with the final installation including dimensioned locations of all lines and utilities outside the building. B. Turn over to the Architect, for delivery to the Owner, at least one clean, neatly marked set of blue line drawings showing "as -installed" work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS A. National Electrical Code requirements. B. Material testing: 1. Materials must be listed, inspected, and approved by a nationally accepted testing laboratory such as UL and/or ETL (Electrical Testing Laboratories) where testing for the particular type of material is available. 2. Materials shall bear the UL or ETL label where labeling service Is available. S. The listing and/or labeling will be accepted as evidence that _ the materials or equipment conform to the applicable standards of that testing organization. 4. Where certification by more than one testing laboratory is available, the certification arrived at by the most stringent '— testing method is required. 2.02 STANDARD PRODUCTS " A. Materials and equipment must be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged ' in the manufacture of products conforming to these Specifications. 2.05 CONDITION OF MATERIALS AND APPURTENANCES SeCtiOn 16000 - PAGE 6 t17 �i GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16000 A. All conduit, fixtures, panelboards, and other material systems must be new unless otherwise specified. S. Replace any equipment injured or damaged in transit from the factory, during delivery to premises, while in storage on premises, while being erected and installed, or while being tested, until time of final completion, without extra cost to Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SPACE AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT A. Install equipment to allow ready access to parts requiring operation or service without disassembly of other equipment. S. Working clearances required by the NEC are minimum standards. Co. Protect equipment against construction and weather damage. 3.02 GUTTING AND PATCHING A. Where it becomes necessary to cut through any wall, floor, or ceiling to permit installation or repair of any electrical work, such cutting must be approved by the Architect. The Contractor is not permitted to cut or modify any structural members without the written permission of the Architect. 3.03 CLEANING A. Keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish. S. At completion of the job, remove all tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and leave the area "broom clean". 3.04 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS A. Install conduit sleeves in a timely manner so as not to impede other trades. Moisture seal sleeves in a manner approved by the Architect. B. Install pitch pans and flashing for roof penetrations that are compatible with the roofing systems. Roof penetrations are subject Section 16000 PAGE Q 6ENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16000 to the approval of the Architect. 5.05 CONDITIONS OF EQUIPMENT AT FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Prior to the time of acceptance, inspect all installed systems to assure the following has been completed: 1. All fixtures are operating and lenses and reflectors are free of dust, debris, and fingerprints. 2. Lamps are new or do not have significantly reduced lifetimes. S. Switchboards and panelboards have all conductors neatly. formed, laced and made-up tight. Enclosures are cleaned of stray paint, dust, grease and visible fingerprints. 4. All circuit directories and labels are in place. S. Wall plates and exposed parts of equipment are clean, free of paint, plaster, and other foreign materials. 6. All scratched surfaces are touched -up with paint matching original paint type and color. Where paint cannot be matched, repaint the entire surface in a color and manner approved by the Architect. END OF SECTION SeGtiOn 16000 PAGE 10 CONDUIT SECTION 161 1 1 PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements to !^fork of this Section. 1.O2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal conduit. B. Flexible metal conduit. C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. Electrical metallic tubing. E. Fittings and conduit bodies. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ANSI 080.1 - Rigid steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI/NEMA FS 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. Co. ANSI/NFPA '70 - National Electrical Code. D. NECA "Standard of Installation." E. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (P\/C) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and intermediate Metal Conduit. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA i0. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight Section 161 1 1 PAGE 1 CONDUIT SECTION 16 1 1 1 flexible metal conduit, metallic tubing, fittings and conduit bodies. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of other sections. -- B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches. 1.0'1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA'1O. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. _ B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. C. conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. PART 2 PRODUCTS r 2.01 CONDUIT REOUIREMENT5 A. Minimum Size: ,/2inch unless otherwise specified. B. Y4et and Damp Locations - Above Grade: Use rigid steel. c. Dry Locations: 1. concealed: Use electrical metallic tubing. 2. , Exposed: Use electrical metallic tubing. Section 1 6 1 1 1 PAGE 2 CONDUIT SECTION 161 1 1 D. Below Grade: Use only factory applied 20 mil PVC coating or wrapped rigid steel as specified herein. E. Below Slab: Non metallic 'PVC, schedule 40 is acceptable within limitations specified herein. 2.01 METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. LTV Steel Tubular Products. 2. Allied Tube and conduit. S. Wheatland. B. Rigid steel conduit: ANSI c80.1. c. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FS 1; all steel fittings with threaded couplings. 2.02 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Levy Industrial Group. 2. Robroy Industries. S. Substitutions: Under provisions of other sections. B. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil thick. C. General: 1. Protective layer may be factory applied PVC, coating or galvanized conduit may be wrapped with 2 layers of corrosion -resistant tape. 2. Corrosion -resistant tape shall be 0.01 inch half -lapped tape equal to Scotch 50 applied after pipe primer. S. Hot dipped galvanized steel with threads galvanized after cutting. D. Fittings and conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FS 1; steel fittings with external PVC, coating to match conduit. 2.03 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: Section 1 6 1 1 1 PAGE 5 CONDUIT SECTION 1611 1 1. Electri-Flex. 2. Allied Tube and Conduit. — B. Description: Interlocked steel construction. Aluminum is not permitted. C. Fittings: AN51/NEMA FB 1 with fitting specifically approved for use with steel flex. D. Applications: 1. Use for final connections to motorized equipment for vibration isolation. _ 2. Connections to recessed lighting fixtures located in accessible ceilings. 3. Utilization of 5/5" instead of 1/2' flex is acceptable under the provisions indicated in the National Electrical Code. 4. connections to interior dry -type transformers. _ 2.04 LIOUIDT16HT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Electri-Flex. — 2. Allied Tube and conduit. B. description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. — C. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1 with water tight fittings specifically approved for liquid tight flex. _ D. Applications: 1. Use for final connections to motorized equipment in exterior _ locations for vibration isolation. 2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC, TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Wheat land. -' 2. Allied Tube and conduit. B. Description: ANSI 080.5; galvanized tubing. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: AN51/NEMA FI5 1; all steel, compression type. D. Do not use in slabs or below grade. Section '1 6 1 1 1 PAGE 4 CONDUIT SECTION 161 1 1 E. Use for all interior dry locations not subject to damage. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "standard of installation." B. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring Installation. All conduits shall be mechanically and electrically continuous. C. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. D. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for z 5 percent additional conduits. E. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 161 90. F. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports G. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. H. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. I. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. J. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. L. Do not cross conduits in slab. M. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. N. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. O. Gut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends. P. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. Provide insulated bushings Section 16 1 1 1 PAGE 5 cONVUlT SECTION 161 1 1 for all conductors #2 AWG and larger. Install double locknuts on all conduits entering metallic enclosures. Q. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to cast boxes. R. Install no more than equivalent of three ao-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. S. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. T. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses, control and expansion joints. U. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. V. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. 1N. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 161 '70. X. identify conduit under provisions of section 161 Q5. Y. Duct shall be cleaned with an assembly, that consists of a flexible Mandrel (manufacturers standard product in lengths recommended for the specific size and type of duct) that is 1/4 inch less than inside diameter of duct; 2 wire brushes, and a rag. The cleaning assembly shall be pulled through conduit a minimum of 2 times or until less than a volume of & cubic inches of debris is expelled from the duct. Z. The cable lubricant shall be compatible with the cable jacket for cable that is being installed. Application of lubricant shall be in accordance with lubricant manufacturer's recommendations. AA. Conduit passing vertically through slabs -on -grade shall be rigid steel or IMG. -- Rigid steel conduits installed below slab -on -grade or in the earth shall be field wrapped with 0.0 1 O inch thick pipe wrapping factory -applied polyvinyl chloride coating system. BB. The number of conductors in a.single conduit shall not exceed the requirements of NEC Article S 10-15, Note 8 for deration. Section 16 1 1 1 PAGE 6 r CONDUIT SECTION 161 1 1 CC. All conduits shall be concealed unless noted or approved by the Architect. Oa. All field cut rigid steel conduits shall be treated with paint -on or sprayed -on galvanized coating. EE. Vo not install conduits on roof without prior approval. FF. Provide steel conduit sleeves for conduits entering building exterior walls below grade. GG. Provide for minimum depth of coverages as follows: 1. Minimum of 50" outside of building. 2. Minimum of 6" for conduits routed below slabs. 5.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods with similar building materials. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. END OF SECTION Section 16 1 1 1 PAGE ? BUILDING WIRE AND GABLE SECTION 16125 PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements to Work of this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA '70 - National Electrical code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Product Data: Provide for each type of conductor insulation. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. conform to NFPA 90. B. Furnish products listed and aiassifled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS Section 16123 PAGE 1 BUILVING WIRE AND GABLE SECTION 16125 A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. conductor sizes are based on copper. C. mire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. - 1.08 COORDINATION A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILVING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. Triangle. 2. Okonite. — 5. Aetna. B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. — c. conductor: copper. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: - 600 volts. E. Insulation: NFPA '70; Type THW or THHN/THWN insulation for all feeders and — branch circuits. F. All conductors shall be soft drawn annealed copper. 2.02 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Wire Nuts (smaller than #6 AWG) — 1. Scotch 2. Burndy S. Buchanan — B. Compression Connectors (#6 AWG and larger): 1. T8B 2. Burndy C. The cable reel shall be inspected for correct storage positions, signs of ._ physical damage, and broken seals. If end seal is broken, moisture shall be Section 1 6 125 PAGE 2 _ BUILDING WIRE AND GABLE SECTION 16128 removed from cable in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations. PART 5 EXECUTION 8.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. 3.02 PREPARATION A. completely and thoroughly swab raceway in accordance with section 16 1 1 1 before installing wire. 5.03 WIRING METHODS A. In all locations: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. B. Use wiring methods indicated. C. In wet locations, utilize silicon filled connectors. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install all power and lighting conductors in conduit. B. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. C. Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation." D. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. E. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. F. use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. G. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits. Section 1 6 12 5 PAGE 3 BUILDING WIRE AND GABLE SECTION 16125 H. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than '75 feet. I. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 2'7'T volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet. J. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. Do not exceed manufacturer's maximum pulling tensions. K. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. Lubricant must be UL for use with the conduit and conductor insulation. L. Protect exposed cable from damage. M. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal _ cable ties to support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. N. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. O. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. P. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. Q. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. R. Use compression connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, larger than #6 AWG. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. S. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and smaller. T. Identify and color code wire .and cable under provisions of Section 161 cis. 5.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. 5. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section '7.5.1. END OF SECTION _ Section 1 6 12 5 PAGE 4 BOXES SECTION 16150 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. NEMA 05 1 - Sheet -steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). E. NFPA '10 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA 05 1, stamped, one piece galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported. 2. Provide solid ganged boxes for over two devices. Section 16150 PAGE 1 BOXES SECTION 16180 — 5. Boxes shall be a minimum of 1-1 /2" deep. 4. Provide reduced size boxes to accommodate devices in door jams, etc. -- 5. Securely fasten all boxes to prevent movement. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. Utilize cast boxes for surface mounted applications. C. Yiall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16 140. D. Provide suitable plates or covers for all outlet boxes and junction boxes. 2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250; flat -flanged, surface mounted junction box: — 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. _ PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify locations of outlets prior to rough -in. 5.2 INSTALLATION A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "standard of Installation." B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights specified in section for outlet device. D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide ganged boxes where devices are grouped. — E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented and mounted as heights specified in Section 16140. Section 16 15 0 PAGE 2 ft 7 BOXES SECTION 16150 F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. H. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods similar to building construction. I. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. J. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. K. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. L. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. M. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. N. Vo not install flush mounting box back-to-back in wails; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. O. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. P. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. 0. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. R. use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. S. Vo not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. T. Support boxes independently of conduit. U. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. vo not use sectional box. V. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. R Section 16150 7 PAGE 5 BOXES SECTION 16 150 W. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast metal box in other locations. X. Boxes for mounting light fixtures shall not be less than 4 inches square. 5.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 5.4 GLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. END OF SECTION Section 1 6 150 PAGE 4 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16140 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device plates. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements. D. NFPA '10 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 'i 0. Section 16140 PAGE 1 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16140 B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES A. General: 1. Leviton Model 122 1-I. 2. Hubbell Model 12 2 1-I. -' S. General Electric Model 5415 1-2G. B. Utilize equivalent series of switches for double pole, three way and four way applications C. Color: 1. Ivory, unless otherwise noted. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Duplex Convenience Receptacle: 1. Leviton Model 5352-I. 2. Hubbell Model 5352-I. S. General Electric Model GE5352-2. B. GFCI Receptacle: — 1. Leviton Model GF5352-I. 2. Hubbell Model GF5352-1. S. General Electric Model GFR -5342. -' 2.5 WALL PLATES A. Decorative cover Plate: smooth stainless steel for use in all finished areas. B. Weatherproof cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover. 2.4 FLOOR MOUNTED SERVICE FITTINGS — A. Pedestal convenience Receptacle: 1. Housing: Galvanized cast steel _ 2. Device Plate: stainless steel. Section 16 140 PAGE 2 -- KRING VEVICES SECTION 16140 S. Configuration: One duplex. 4. Hubbell Model SC -509 1 PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 5.2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 5.5 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom. E. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. F. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. H. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. I. In damp locations: Provide double flap covers to provide a weatherproof Section 16 140 PAGE 5 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16140 enclosure in the sealed position. J. Where more than one device is in an outlet box causes 500 volts or more — between devices, provide isolation barrier in accordance with NEC. 5.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install wall switch 46 inches above finished floor unless otherwise noted. B. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise — noted. C. Install convenience receptacle & inches above counter unless otherwise noted. D. install telephone outlet box 18" above finished floor unless otherwise noted. E. Install telephone outlet box for side -reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54 inches above finished floor. F. Install telephone outlet box for forward -reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 48 inches above finished floor. G. Install data outlet boxes at 15" above finished floor. 5.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. F. Where coverplates do not completely seal penetrations, contractor shall paint, patch and seal all openings. — 5.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. Section 1 6 140 r IPAGE 4 �I WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16140 I 5.11 GLEANING n A. Glean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION ;I. 1l i.I rl I 'I ±-� Section 16140 PAGE 5 GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 1 6 1"70 PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - 6eneral Requirements to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding electrodes and conductors. B. Equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (international Electrical Testing Association). B. NFPA -10 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Systems as denoted in Article 250 of the NEC. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: Maximum of 25 ohms. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections. 1.1 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground. Section 1 6 1'70 PAGE 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 16110 Section 1 6 1 '10 PAGE 1 B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations _ of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. conform to requirements of NFPA 90. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as `- suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ROD ELECTRODES A. Material: Copper -clad steel. B. Diameter: 3/4 inch. — C. Length: 1 O feet. 2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: _ 1. Midwest Electric 2. Bridgeport Fittings. s. Blackburn. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Other Sections. _ B. Material: Bronze. r. 2.3 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTORS Section 1 6 1 '10 PAGE 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 1 6 1 ?0 A. Manufacturers: 1. Cadweld 2. Substitutions: Refer to Other Sections. 2.4 WIRE A. Material: Insulated stranded copper. Minimum grounding conductor shall be # 12 AWG. B. Grounding Electrode conductor: Size to meet NFPA '10 requirements, or as indicated. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide grounding electrode conductor and bond to electrode for dry type transformer. B. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. 5.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA AT5, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in META ATS, Section "1.1 S. END OF SECTION Section 16 1 '10 PAGE 1 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 16190 PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements to Mork of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NECA - National Electrical contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA '10 - National Electrical code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other Section. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 90. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. As suitable for purpose specified as shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. Section 16190 PAGE 1 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 1 6 1 q0 B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps. -- S. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. _ S. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 'T. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. 2.2 STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturer: 1. Unistrut. 2. 5 -Line. B. description: Galvanized steel PART S EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions: B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of _ Installation". Co. Vo not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. _ V. Vo not drill or cut structural members. E. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. F. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 6. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and Section 1 6 1 q0 PAGE 2 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 16 1 QO panelboards one inch off wall. H. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. ENP OF SECTION Section 16 1 90 PAGE 5 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 16 1 Q 5 PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable marking. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 't0 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other Section. B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of Product. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background. Section 1 6 1 x 5 PAGE 1 ELECTRICAL IVENTIFICATION SECTION 16 1 Q 5 B. Locations: _ 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. C. Letter Size: — 1. Use 1 /6 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1 /4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. V. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 5/ 16 white letters on black background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, control device stations. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 PREPARATION A. Vegrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. 5.2 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. S. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive. c, Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. V. Phase conductors shall be identified by color coding. The color of the insulation on phases A, B, and C respectively (for three phase) of different voltage systems shall be as follows: _ 120/206 volt, 5 -phase: Black, red, and blue. 2'7'7/480 volt, 5 -phase: Brown, orange, and yellow. _ conductor phase and voltage identification shall be made by color -coded insulation for all conductors smaller than No. 6 AWG. For conductors No. 6 AWG and larger, identification shall be made by color -coded insulation, or conductors with black insulation may be furnished and identified by colored electrical tape. Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. ENV OF SECTION Section 1 6 1 9 5 PAGE 2 ENCLOSED 5104ITCHES SECTION 16441 PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for construction, supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fusible switches. B. Nonfusible switches. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical contractors Association). B. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). D. NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (published by the International Electrical Testing Association). E. NFPA '70 - National Electrical code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified In this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Section 16441 PAGE 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES SECTION 16441 A. Conform to requirements of NFPA '10. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, inc: as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D. _ B. General Electric. C. Westinghouse. 2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. B. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R fuses. C. Switches shall be capable of interrupting the locked rotor current of the motor load served. D. Provide disconnect switches for all equipment not furnished integrallly with the equipment. 2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HO with externally operable handle interlocked _ to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. B. Switches shall be capable of interrupting the locked rotor current of the motor load served. 2.4 ENCLOSURES A. Fabrication: NEMA KS 1. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Damp Locations: Type 5R. - S. Wet Locations: Type 4. Section 1 &441 PACGE 2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES SECTION 16441 PART 8 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. D. Provide a disconnect for all equipment not furnished under other Divisions. 8.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with META ATS, except Section 4. S. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section '1.5. END OF SECTION Section 16441 PAGE 5 PANELSOAR05 SECTION 164'10 PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Branch circuit panelboards. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA AS 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. NEMA PS 1 - Panelboards. D. NEMA PS 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. E. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing 5pecifiaations for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment (published by the International Electrical Testing Association). F. NFPA '10 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. Section 16410 PAGE 1 PANELBOARDS SECTION '1 6470 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.9 REGULATORY REOUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA '70. _ S. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each panelboard key. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. 2. General Electric. 8. Westinghouse. B. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACK for air _ conditioning equipment branch circuits. C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard. D. Minimum Short Circuit Rating: Fully rated as indicated. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AS 1, bolt -on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SIND for lighting circuits, Type HACK for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. F. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type SK. CG. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide. _ Section 1 64-10 PAGE 2 E , PANELSOARDS SECTION 164'70 H. Cabinet Front: Flush cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION A. install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PS 1.1 and the NECA "Standard of Installation." S. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. C. Height: Maximum of 6 feet to top of panelboard. Verify physical space prior to installation. V. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 161 Q5. G. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 2 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE. H. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 161 "70. I. Maintain working clearances in accordance with National Electrical Code as a minimum. Assure working clearances above panel are also in compliance prior to installation. 5.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. S. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 9.4 for switches, Section 1.5 for circuit breakers. 5.5 ADJUSTING A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of Section 164'70 PAGE 5 PANEL50ARPS SECTION 164770 each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. END OF SECTION FUSES SECTION 164'71 PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fuses. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NFPA '70 - National Electric Code. B. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics including time -current curves. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA '10. B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1.17 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide three of each size and type fuse installed with legend listings where each fuse is used. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Section 164'7'T PAGE 1 FUSES SECTION 164'7.1 A. Sussman. B. Gould Shawmut. C. Little fuse. 2.2 FUSE REOUIREMENTS A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated. S. Voltage: Provide dual element fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase -to -phase voltage. C. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5. D. Other Branch Circuits: Class RKS. 2.3 CLASS RK5 FUSES A. Manufacturers: — 1. Sussman Model FRN -R. 2. Bussman Model FRS -R. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses at each required location in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read. C. Fuse sizes indicated on the drawings are based on equipment sizes utilized in the design. Contractor shall field determine equipment and select appropriate fuse sizes based on actual equipment provided. -- END OF SECTION Section 1 64'7'1 P,467E 2 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 16481 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements to rtork of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manual motor starters. S. Magnetic motor starters. C. Combination magnetic motor starters. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NFPA 'i0 - National Electrical Code. B. UL 1 a6C - High -Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type. C. UL 1 96E - Class R Fuses. D. NECA "Standard of Installation;' published by National Electrical Contractors Association. E. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. F. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. 0. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other Section. B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details. C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: indicate application conditions and Section 16481 PAGE 1 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 16481 limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 5. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REOUIREMENT5 A. Conform to requirements of NFPA '10. S. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUAL CONTROLLERS A. Manual Motor Controller: NEMA IGS 2, AC general-purpose Glass A manually operated, full -voltage controller with overload element, NO auxiliary contact, and toggle operator. Square D Glass 25 10 or 25 12. 5. Fractional Horsepower Manual controller: NEMA IGS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full -voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, and toggle operator. C. Enclosure: NEMA Icy 6; Type 1. 2.2 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS A. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. Square D Class 8556. 5. coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. C. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS; bimetal. Section 16451 PAGE 2 I r ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 16461 I D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1. ^1 2.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES ,,.,. A. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA IGS 2,2 each field convertible contacts in addition to t;. seal -in contact. B. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty type. C. Pushbuttons: Recessed type. �J D. Indicating Lights: LED type. E. Selector Switches: Rotary type. +'1 F. Relays: NEMA IC5 2. G. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary. Provide fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure. 2.4 DISCONNECTS A. Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with fusible switch l disconnect in common enclosure. B. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA K5 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate class R fuses. 2.6 FUSES A. Description: Dual element, current limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 600 volt, UL f 1 ci SE, Class RK 1. i B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's ' instructions. Provide a motor controller for all equipment not furnished as integral with equipment. Coordinate actual motor loads with overload protection. B. Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with 5ection Section 164a 1 PAGE 5 II ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 16451 16190. C. Height: 5 ft to operating handle. D. Install fuses in fusible switches. E. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 1 6 1 95. G. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door. identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. 5.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of other Sections. S. Inspect and test each enclosed controller to NEMA ICS 2. END OF SECTION Section 1 6451 PAGE 4 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES SECTION 16510 PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires and accessories. B. Ballasts. C. Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply. D. Lamps. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI 082.1 1 - High frequency fluorescent lamp ballasts. S. NFPA '10 - National Electrical Code. C. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of other sections. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT Section 16510 PAGE 1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES SECTION 1 6 5 10 A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. 1.17 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA '70. S. Conform to requirements of NFPA 10 1. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINARIES A. Furnish Products as saheduled.2.2 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS 2.2 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Advance. 2. Magnetek. S. General Electric B. Description: ANSI 082.1 1 - high frequency fluorescent lamp ballasts. C. Voltage: 120 volts. D. Source Ouality Control: Certify fluorescent ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. E. High frequency operation (20 kHz or greater). F. High power factor (O.aa minimum). G. Sound rating A or better. H. Lamp crest factor 1.'1 or less. I. Total harmonic distoration of 10% or less. Section 1 65 10 PAGE 2 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES SECTION 16510 J. Minimum ballast factor of 0.8-1. 2.5 FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY A. Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast compartment of fluorescent luminaire. 5. Lamp Ratings: One T6 lamp providing 1,100 lumens, minimum. C. 5attery: Sealed lead calcium type, rated for 10 year life. D. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from the outside of an assembled luminaire. 2.4 LAMPS A. Lamp Types: As scheduled on drawings for each. PART 5 EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION A. Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. 5. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing. C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. D. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. F. install recessed luminaires using accessories and fire stopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. G. Install clips to secure recessed grid -supported luminaires in place. H. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings. 1. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. Section 165 10 PAGE 5 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES SECTION 16510 J. Connect luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs as indicated. K. Make wiring connections to branch cirbuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. L. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. M. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire. 5.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after Installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. S.S ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated or as directed. 5.4 GLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 5.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate luminaire operation for minimum of two hours. S.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED AORK A. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Section 1 65 10 PAGE 4